SERVICE MANUAL

PN: RCSM7030

A741

®

®

®

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

SE

RV

ICE

MA

NU

AL

®

A741

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

®

®

A741SERVICE MANUAL

PN:RCSM7030

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing theinformation contained within this document tomaintain a level of confidentiality that is in the bestinterest of Ricoh Corporation and its membercompanies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BEREPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THEPRIOR

PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.

All product names, domain names or productillustrations, including desktop images, used in thisdocument are trademarks, registered trademarks orthe property of their respective companies.They are used throughout this book in aninformational or editorial fashion only and for thebenefit of such companies. No such use, or theuse of any trade name, or web site is intended toconvey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricohproducts.

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

LEGEND

PRODUCTCODE

COMPANY

GESTETNER RICOH SAVINA741 --- FW7030D ---

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY

REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS* 12/98 Original Printing

CAUTION

DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY RE-PLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENTTYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSEOF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFAC-TURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.

ATTENTION

IL Y A DANGER D’EXPLOSION S’IL Y A REMPLACEMENT IN-CORRECT DE LA BATTERIE. REMPLACER UNIQUEMENTAVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MÊME TYPE OU D’UN TYPE REC-OMMANDÉ PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RÉBUTLES BATTERIES USAGÉES CONFORMÉMENT AUX INSTRUC-TIONS DU FABRICANT.

Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our servicepersonnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as wellas themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel areadvised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with thewarnings and precautions described here before engaging inmaintenance activities.

Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel andcustomers from physical danger and to prevent damage to theirproperty. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result frominsufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warningmessages using this symbol.

WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficientattention to or incorrect compliance with warning messagesusing this symbol.

CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result frominsufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warningmessages using this symbol.

SymbolsThe triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including dangerand caution. The specific point of attention is shown insidethe symbol.

General warning.

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition isshown inside the symbol.

General prohibited action.

Disassembly prohibited.

indicates that action is required. The specific actionrequired is shown inside the symbol.

General action required.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

1. Installation Precautions

WARNING

• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified.Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electricshock. When using an extension cable, always check that it isadequate for the rated current. ...............................................................

• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not groundingthe copier may cause fire or electric shock. Connecting the earth wireto an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion orelectric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following:gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and waterpipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities. ........................

CAUTION:

• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier maytip over, causing injury. ...........................................................................

• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fireor electric shock. .....................................................................................

• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source ornear flammable material. This may cause fire. .......................................

• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills tokeep the machine as cool as possible. Insufficient ventilation maycause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ...............................

• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ....

• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped.Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly ortopple, leading to injury. ..........................................................................

• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toneror developer is accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it inthe stomach and obtain medical attention immediately. If it gets into theeyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtainmedical attention. ....................................................................................

• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings andprecautions in the copier’s instruction handbook. ...................................

2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING

• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before startingmachine disassembly. ............................................................................

• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the servicemanual and other related brochures. ......................................................

• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety featuresincluding safety mechanisms and protective circuits. .............................

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ...............................

• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the servicemanual or other related brochure when replacing them. Using a pieceof wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. ...........

• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies adistance or gap for installation of a part, always use the correct scaleand measure carefully. ...........................................................................

• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with aground connection. .................................................................................

• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that thepower plug is dust-free. If it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire orelectric shock. .........................................................................................

• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers.Leaking laser light may damage eyesight. ..............................................

• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to highpotentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly. .............

CAUTION

• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such asties, make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught inrotating sections. .....................................................................................

• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep awayfrom chains and belts. .............................................................................

• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can beextremely hot. .........................................................................................

• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean.Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures. .........................

• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except forroutine replacement. ...............................................................................

• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltagecomponents when removing them; always hold the plug itself. ..............

• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. Ifnecessary, protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item. ........

• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wireto avoid electric leaks. ............................................................................

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .........................

• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped ordamaged. ................................................................................................

• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectorsand wires that were removed, have been refitted correctly. Specialattention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire andmissing screws. ......................................................................................

• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machineaccording to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling.Replace with new ones if necessary. ......................................................

• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructionsbelow: .....................................................................................................· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to

spill. Wipe spills off completely.· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the

covers or turning the main switch on.· Always wash hands afterwards.

• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may causesparks when exposed directly to fire in a furnace, etc. .........................

• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the powerplug from the wall outlet immediately. ..................................................

3. Miscellaneous

WARNING

• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solventssuch as alcohol, other than the specified refiner; it may generate toxicgas. .........................................................................................................

340

CONTENTS

I THEORY AND CONSTRUCTION SECTION1-1 Specifications

1-1-1 Specifications ................................................................................ 1-1-11-2 Handling Precautions

1-2-1 Handling and storage of the drum .................................................. 1-2-11-2-2 Storage of developer and toner ...................................................... 1-2-11-2-3 Handling of the heaters .................................................................. 1-2-11-2-4 Storage of paper ............................................................................ 1-2-1

1-3 Mechanical Construction1-3-1 Part names and functions .............................................................. 1-3-11-3-2 Copy process ................................................................................. 1-3-31-3-3 Machine cross sectional view ......................................................... 1-3-31-3-4 Machine drive system .................................................................... 1-3-41-3-5 Mechanical construction of each section ........................................ 1-3-8

II ELECTRICAL SECTION2-1 Electrical Parts Layout

2-1-1 Electrical parts layout ..................................................................... 2-1-12-2 Detection of Paper Misfeed

2-2-1 Paper misfeed detection ................................................................ 2-2-12-2-2 Paper misfeed detection conditions ............................................... 2-2-22-3 Operation of the PCBs2-3-1 Power source PCB ........................................................................ 2-3-12-3-2 LPH power supply PCB ................................................................. 2-3-72-3-3 Servo motor control 1 PCB .......................................................... 2-3-102-3-4 Servo motor control 2 PCB .......................................................... 2-3-132-3-5 Main PCB .................................................................................... 2-3-162-3-6 Backup PCB ................................................................................ 2-3-252-3-7 ISU PCB ...................................................................................... 2-3-262-3-8 Operation unit PCB ...................................................................... 2-3-292-3-9 Inverter PCB ................................................................................ 2-3-30

III SET UP AND ADJUSTMENT SECTION3-1 Installation

3-1-1 Unpacking and installing the copier ................................................ 3-1-13-1-2 Copy mode initial settings ............................................................ 3-1-273-1-3 Installing the key counter (optional) .............................................. 3-1-283-1-4 Installing the roll unit (optional) .................................................... 3-1-313-1-5 Drum Conditioning ....................................................................... 3-1-42

3-2 Simulation3-2-1 Simulation function ........................................................................ 3-2-1

3-3 Assembly and Disassembly3-3-1 Cautions during disassembly and assembly ................................... 3-3-13-3-2 Paper feed section ......................................................................... 3-3-33-3-3 Main charger section .................................................................... 3-3-103-3-4 Exposure and original feed section .............................................. 3-3-193-3-5 Developing section ...................................................................... 3-3-31

Rev. 01/2001

340

3-3-6 Transfer/separation section 3-3-373-3-7 Cleaning section 3-3-423-3-8 Fixing section 3-3-483-3-9 Other sections 3-3-60

3-4 PCB Initial Settings3-4-1 Main PCB 3-4-13-4-2 Non-field-adjustable volume controls 3-4-3

3-5 Self Diagnostics3-5-1 Self-diagnostic function 3-5-1

3-6 Troubleshooting3-6-1 Image formation problems 3-6-13-6-2 Paper misfeeds 3-6-173-6-3 PCB terminal voltages 3-6-233-6-4 Electrical problems 3-6-383-6-5 Mechanical problems 3-6-51

3-7 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 3-7-1Timing chart No. 2 3-7-2Timing chart No. 3 3-7-3Timing chart No. 4 3-7-4Timing chart No. 5 3-7-5Operation unit PCB 3-7-6Power source PCB 1/2 3-7-7Power source PCB 2/2 3-7-8Detachable unit wiring diagram 3-7-9

4-1 Preventive Maintenance Check ListPreventive Maintenance Check List 4-1-1

Rev. 02/2000

I The

ory

and

Con

stru

ctio

n Se

ctio

n

THEORY ANDCONSTRUCTION

SECTION

I

1-1-5

340

CONTENTS

1-1 Specifications

1-1-1 Specifications ...................................................................................... 1-1-1

340

1-1-1

1-1-1 Specifications

Type …………………………… Console typeCopying method ……………… Dry indirect electrostatic photocopyingOriginal type …………………… SheetOriginal feed method ………… Moving originalsPaper …………………………… (1) Plain paper: 64 – 80 g/m2 (fed from the roll unit or

bypass table)(2) Special paper: Tracing paper, film (fed from the roll

unit or bypass table)Roll paper size ………………… Width: 420 – 920 mm/17" – 36"

Diameter: 180 mm/61/4" maximumInner diameter: 76 mm/3"Length: 175 m

Original sizes ………………… Standard: A0 – A4R (64 – 80 g/m2)36" × 48" – 81/2" × 11" (64 – 80 g/m2)

Maximum: 920 (w) × 5,000 (l) mm (64 – 80 g/m2)36" × 197" (64 – 80 g/m2)

Copy sizes …………………… Standard: A0 – A4R (64 – 80 g/m2)36" × 48" – 81/2" × 11" (64 – 80 g/m2)

Maximum: 920 (w) × 5,000 (l) mm (64 – 80 g/m2)36" × 197" (64 – 80 g/m2)

Effective image width: 920 mmLeading edge margin: 5 ± 4 mm

Copying magnificationratios …………………………… Manual mode: 25 – 400%

(at intervals of 1% or 0.1%)Auto copy mode:

Fixed ratios according to the original and papersizes

Metric:1:1±0.5%, 1:4.000, 1:2.829, 1:2.000, 1:1.410,1:0.706, 1:0.500, 1:0.352, 1:0.250

Inch (Architecture):1:1±0.5%, 1:3.143, 1:2.588, 1:2.000, 1:1.294,1:0.640, 1:0.500, 1:0.324, 1:0.250

Inch (Engineer):1:1±0.5%, 1:4.000, 1:2.667, 1:2.000, 1:1.333,1:0.667, 1:0.500, 1:0.333, 1:0.250

Copying speed ………………… 4.8 m/minFirst copy time ………………… 30 s maximum (A1 standard size copying)Warmup time ………………… 10 min maximum (room temperature 20°C/68°F,

65% RH)Paper feed system …………… Automatic feed from the roll unit and manual feed from

the bypass tableConsecutive copying ………… 1 – 20 copies (when the original length is 1300 mm

or less)

340-1

1-1-2

Photoconductor ……………… OPC (Drum diameter: 90 mm)Charging system ……………… Single plus corona charging

Drum surface potential: 870 ± 50 V DCExposure system ……………… Moving original scanningLight source …………………… Fluorescent lamp, 65 WDeveloping system …………… Dry (magnetic brush)

Developer: Dual-component (ferrite carrier and blacktoner: N22T)Toner density control: Toner sensorToner replenishing: Automatic supply from the tonerhopper

Transfer system ……………… Single negative corona charging: –5.3 kV DCSeparation system …………… Single AC corona charging: 5.6 kV ACFixing system ………………… Heat roller

Heat source: Halogen heaters120 V areas: 800 W (main), 400 W (sub)220 – 240 V areas: 1120 W (main), 480 W (sub)Control temperature: 150°C/302°F (plain paper or film)145°C/293°F (tracing paper)Abnormal temperature increase-prevention device:Thermostat, 145°C/293°FFixing pressure: 2.0 N at both ends, 5.9 N at center

Charge erasing system ……… Exposure by cleaning lampCleaning system ……………… Cleaning blade and cleaning fur brushFunctions ……………………… (1) Preheat/energy saving

(2) Auto clear (can be set to between 30 and 270 s atintervals of 30 s)

(3) Auto shutoff (can be set to between 15 and120 min at intervals of 15 min)

(4) Self-diagnostics(5) Simulation(6) Margin copy(7) Hanging copy(8) Program copy(9) Preview copy

(10) Paper cut length setting(11) Same-size/full-size magnification adjustment(12) Fixing temperature adjustment(13) Initial settings change(14) Original size detection(15) Paper size detection

Power requirement …………… 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 13 A220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 8 A

Power consumption …………… 1500 W (120 V areas)1900 W (220 – 240 V areas)

Machine dimensions ………… 1355 (w) × 635 (d) × 1107 (h) mm533/8" (w) × 25" (d) × 439/16" (h)

Weight ………………………… Approx. 268 kg, 590.3 lb. (main unit only)Floor requirement …………… 1355 (w) × 707 (d) mm, 533/8" (w) × 2713/16" (d)

340

1-1-3

Accessories …………………… Original reversing guideOptional accessories ………… 3rd roll unit, roll shaft, carrier sheets (A0, A1, A2), key

counter and original support

3rd roll unit (optional)Type …………………………… Built-in typePaper …………………………… Equivalent to the copier to be connected toPower source ………………… Electrically connected to the copier

1-1-7

340

CONTENTS

1-2 Handling Precautions

1-2-1 Handling and storage of the drum ....................................................... 1-2-11-2-2 Storage of developer and toner .......................................................... 1-2-11-2-3 Handling of the heaters ....................................................................... 1-2-11-2-4 Storage of paper ................................................................................. 1-2-1

340

1-2-1

1-2-1 Handling and storage of the drumUse the following caution when handling the drum.• When removing the drum from the main unit, make sure not to expose it to direct sunshine

or strong lighting.• Store the drum where the ambient temperature is kept between –20°C/–4°F and 40°C/

104°F and humidity around 85%RH. Sudden changes in temperature and humidity evenwithin the permitted ranges should be avoided, too.

• Avoid atmosphere laden with substances that might chemically damage the drum surface.• Never hit the drum surface with anything hard or pointed. Protect it from bare or gloved

hands; if it is accidentally touched, clean by following the proper procedure.

1-2-2 Storage of developer and tonerStore developer and toner in a cool, dark place free from direct sunshine or high humidity.

1-2-3 Handling of the heatersThis copier is equipped with heaters to avoid condensation inside. These heaters are keptpowered as long as the copier power cable is connected to a wall outlet with the main switchset off. Never disconnect the power cable if the copier is used in a humid place of 70%RHhigher.If the copier is not going to be used for long periods of time, disconnect the power cable fromthe wall outlet.Each roll unit of this copier is equipped with a roll unit heater*1 which can be individuallyturned on or off with a switch. If normal plain paper is kept in the roll units and there is a riskof high humidity, keep their heaters on. However, keep the heater off if tracing paper is keptin the roll unit.

1-2-4 Storage of paperPaper should be stored in a cool, dark place free from high temperature or humidity. If it isnot going to be used for a long time, take paper out of the roll unit, put it in the originalwrapping paper and seal.

*1 Optional for 220 – 240 V models.

1-1-9

340

CONTENTS

1-3 Mechanical Construction

1-3-1 Part names and functions ................................................................... 1-3-11-3-2 Copy process ...................................................................................... 1-3-31-3-3 Machine cross sectional view ............................................................. 1-3-31-3-4 Machine drive system ......................................................................... 1-3-4

(1) Drive system 1 (driven by the paper feed motor) ........................ 1-3-4(2) Drive system 2 (driven by the paper feed motor) ........................ 1-3-5(3) Drive system 3 (driven by the drum motor and fixing

drive motor) ................................................................................. 1-3-6(4) Drive system 4 (driven by the drive motor and toner

feed motor) .................................................................................. 1-3-6(5) Drive system 5 (driven by the original feed motor) ...................... 1-3-7

1-3-5 Mechanical construction of each section ............................................ 1-3-8(1) Paper feed section ...................................................................... 1-3-8

Winding operation of paper roll ................................................. 1-3-10(1-1) Bypass paper feed .......................................................... 1-3-12(1-2) Roll unit paper feed ........................................................ 1-3-13

(2) Main charger section ................................................................. 1-3-15Drum surface potential correction ............................................. 1-3-18

(3) Exposure and original feed section ........................................... 1-3-19(4) CIS and LPH section ................................................................. 1-3-22

Original image reading .............................................................. 1-3-24Static latent image formation ..................................................... 1-3-24CIS correction ............................................................................ 1-3-26

(5) Developing section .................................................................... 1-3-28Forming the magnetic brush ...................................................... 1-3-29Temperature compensation of the toner sensor output ............ 1-3-30Toner sensor output correction based on the copy count ......... 1-3-31Toner density control ................................................................. 1-3-32

(6) Transfer/separation section ....................................................... 1-3-33(7) Cleaning section ........................................................................ 1-3-36(8) Static eliminator section ............................................................ 1-3-39(9) Fixing section ............................................................................ 1-3-41

Heating and temperature control of heat roller andpress roller ................................................................................. 1-3-43

340

1-3-1

1 Main switch2 Total counter3 Front covers4 Carrier sheet guides5 Copy bins6 Bypass slot7 Bypass table8 Main body release levers9 Original guide0 Paper eject guides

! Original table@ Original loop guide# Original insert slot$ Copy eject slot% Operation panel^ Right cover& Key counter*1

* Copy ready indicator(ready lamp)

( Fuser release button

) Original holding section⁄ Original holder anchor pins¤ Upper rear cover screws‹ Upper rear cover› Transport knobfi Waste toner tankfl Copy bin stopper plates‡ Second roll unit— First roll unit· Instruction handbook box

‚ Roll unit handleŒ Paper roll insertion cover„ Paper roll insertion latches´ Roll unit heater switch*2

‰ Paper roll shaftˇ Paper roll size labelÁ Paper roll release lever¨ Paper roll shaft gearˆ Copy eject slot guides

1-3-1 Part names and functions

Figure 1-3-1

12

3

4

5 6 7

8

9

0 ! @#$ %

^&ˆ

ˆ

8

3

·

fi › °

„

‡ Œ‚fl

´

¨

‰

Á

ˇ

*1 Optional.*2 Optional for 220 – 240 V models.

340-3

1-3-2

Metric Inch

1 Preheat/energy saver key/indicator2 Preview copy key3 All clear/reset key4 Job stop/roll cut key5 Stop/clear key6 Numeric keys7 Mode set keys8 Enter key9 Leading edge margin key/indicators0 Left margin key/indicators! Leading edge hanging key/indicators

Figure 1-3-2 Operation panel

@ Trailing edge hanging key/indicators# Copy mode select key/indicators$ Zoom mode select key/indicators% Paper length key/indicators^ Paper source key/indicators& Auto/manual contrast select key/indicators* Copy contrast keys( Copy contrast indicators) Original contrast key/indicators⁄ Special paper select key/indicators¤ Image process select key/indicators

‹ Added features key› Memory recall keyfi Fusing temp. adjusted indicatorfl Display‡ Add paper indicator— Add toner indicator· Maintenance indicator‚ Interrupt key/indicatorŒ Memory copy key/indicator„ On-line key/indicator

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 .

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

2

3

‡ fl fi

°·

!#

%

^$

@

⁄

¤

)

*

(

&

6

5

‹

›

9‚

Œ

7

81

02

3

4

„

Add Paper

Add Toner

Mainte- nance

Added Features

Fusing Temp. Adjusted

Memory Recall

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 .

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

2

3

Memory Copy

Interrupt

Energy Saver

Preview Copy

Reset

Job Stop

Roll CutStopClear

Bold PrintLight Print

Copy Contrast

Auto

Half Tone

Dark Light

Vellum

Film

Material

Border Erase

Negative

Mirror

Image Process

Paper Length

Synchro

Paper Source

Full Size

APS

AMS

Zoom

Preset R E

Indepen- dent Zoom

LeadingEdge

Trailing Left

LeadingMargin

Enter

‡ fl fi

°·

!#

%

^

$@

⁄

¤

)

*

(

&

6

5

‹

›

9

‚Œ

7

8

10

2

3

4

On-Line„

340

1-3-3

1-3-2 Copy process

Figure 1-3-3 Copy process

1-3-3 Machine cross sectional view

*1: The third roll unit is optional.

1 Paper feed section (page 1-3-8)2 Main charger section (page 1-3-15)3 Exposure and original feed section (page 1-3-19)4 CIS and LPH section (page 1-3-22)5 Developing section (page 1-3-28)6 Transfer/separation section (page 1-3-33)7 Cleaning section (page 1-3-36)8 Static eliminator section (page 1-3-39)9 Fixing section (page 1-3-41)

Original

1 Exposure 2 Original image reading

3 Static latent image formation

4 Main charging

5 Developing

6 Transfer 7 Separation

8 Fixing

Fluorescent lamp CIS

LPH

Paper

Drum

Toner

Original image data read by the CIS is A/D converted and image-processed, and the LPH LEDs light to form a static latent image on the drum surface.

4

3 2 8 7

9

8

5

6

1

Figure 1-3-4 Machine cross sectional view

340-1

1-3-4

1-3-4 Machine drive system

(1) Drive system 1 (driven by the paper feed motor)

Figure 1-3-5 Drive system 1 (outer side to the left frame)

1 Paper feed motor pulley 15/182 Cutter drive belt3 Drive tension pulley4 Cutter drive pulley 205 SB gear 376 Cutter clutch gear7 Cutter drive gear 218 Duplex gear 329 Paper feed section drive belt 10 Drive tension pulley! Paper feed pulley 16@ Pre-transfer drive gear# Optical section idle gear 46$ Roll paper conveying clutch gear% Idle gear 45^ Paddle gear& Optical section idle gear 46* SB gear 37

( Bypass registration clutch gear) Gear 50T⁄ Registration clutch gear¤ Paper feed pulley 16‹ Idle gear 36/30› Middle feed clutch gearfi Optical section idle gear 46fl Idle gear 20/26‡ Middle roll winding clutch gear— Pulley 20P5· Paper feed section drive belt 2*1

‚ Pulley 20P5*1

ΠPaper feed pulley 16*1

„ Idle gear 36/30*1

´ Lower feed clutch gear*1

‰ Optical section idle gear 46*1

ˇ Idle gear 20/26*1

Á Lower roll winding clutch gear*1

*1: Parts 29 to 36 are present when the third roll unit (optional) is installed.

¤

⁄

‹› fi

fl

‡

·

°

) (

8

!

@#

$ %^

&

*

0

9

7

6

54

3

2

1

Œ

„´

‰ˇ

Á‚

340-1

1-3-5

(2) Drive system 2 (driven by the paper feed motor)

1 Cutter drive gear 212 Cutter gear 323 Eject gear 294 Fixing unit idle gear 24T5 Duplex gear 326 Drive gear 20T7 Drive gear 20T8 Paper feed pulley gear B9 Paper feed pulley gear B0 Idle gear 22! Paper feed pulley gear B@ Upper roll winding clutch gear# Drive gear 20T

$ Idle gear 16/25% Duplex gear 32^ Roll idle gear A& Spiral roller gear 23* Roll gear 40( Duplex gear 32) Upper feed clutch gear⁄ Drive gear 20T¤ Roll drive gear 16‹ Roll gear 40› Roll drive gear 16*1

fi Roll gear 40*1

*1: Parts 24 and 25 are present when the third roll unit (optional) is installed.

Figure 1-3-6 Drive system 2 (inner side from the left frame)

1

2

43

5

67 8

9

0

!@#

$

%^&

*

(

)

⁄

¤ ‹

fi›

340

1-3-6

(3) Drive system 3 (driven by the drum motor and fixing drive motor) (4) Drive system 4 (driven by the drive motor and toner feed motor)

Figure 1-3-8 Drive system 4 (inner side from the left frame)

1 Main drive pulley2 Drive tension pulley3 Pre-transfer drive belt4 Pre-transfer drive pulley 325 Developer gear6 Drum motor gear 177 Drum drive gear 458 Drum drive gear 609 Developing unit drive belt0 Tension pulley! Developing unit drive pulley 16@ Fixing drive motor gear

# Fixing section drive gear$ Developer gear 22% Idle gear 34^ Idle gear 26& SB gear 24* Heat roller gear( Fixing gear 24) Idle gear 22⁄ Sleeve gear 17¤ Fixing unit idle gear‹ Gear 27T

1 Pre-transfer drive gear 222 Drive gear 20T3 Pre-transfer gear 304 Drum joint5 Left drum flange6 Feed gear 257 Fur brush gear 178 Roll unit gear 189 Developing unit drive gear 200 Developing roller gear 19! Developing unit idle gear 17

@ Developer paddle gear# Spiral roller gear 23$ Toner shaft gear% Toner shaft gear^ Fixing idle gear

(left side of the machine)& Toner feed motor gear

(right side of the machine)* Toner gear 34( Toner gear 34

67

8

5

!

9

432

1

0)

(¤

*

%

#

$&

⁄

‹

@

Figure 1-3-7 Drive system 3 (outer side to the left frame)

13

248

7

590!

^&

*(

$%

#@

6

340

1-3-7

(5) Drive system 5 (driven by the original feed motor)

Figure 1-3-9 Drive system 5 (outer side to the right frame)

1 Original feed motor pulley2 Original feed drive belt 13 Idle pulley 164 Tension pulley5 Original feed clutch gear6 Developing unit pulley

7 Front lower original roller8 Front upper original roller9 Original feed pulley0 Original feed drive belt 2! Original feed pulley

4 3 21

6!09

8

7

5

340

1-3-8

1-3-5 Mechanical construction of each section

(1) Paper feed sectionThe paper feed section is comprised of the parts shown in Figure 1-3-10. Paper can be fedeither manually or automatically from a paper roll.In the paper feed section, a sheet of paper fed from the roll unit or placed on the bypass tableis conveyed to the transfer section in synch with the LED on timing of the LPH section.

Figure 1-3-10 Paper feed section

1

@

#

›

‰

fi

4

$

‹

fl

ˇ

)

36

!

„

¨

Ø

∏

%

5

&

^

‡

ˆ

°

⁄

27

Å

(

¤

Á

*

8

9

‚

´

Œ

0

·

340

1-3-9

Figure 1-3-11 Block diagram of the paper feed section

*1 Parts 34 to 41 are present when the third roll unit (optional) is installed.

1 Registration upper guide2 Bypass pulley3 Registration lower guide4 Bypass table5 Bypass registration roller6 Registration roller7 Cutter eject rear guide8 Registration pulley9 Cutter unit0 Cutter rear guide! Cutter front guide@ Roll lever# Roll base A$ Paper roll shaft% Roll paper feed upper guide A^ Roll paper feed upper roller& Roll paper feed lower roller A* Roll paper conveying rear roller A( Roll paper conveying front roller) Roll stay A⁄ Roll paper feed lower guide A

¤ Roll paper conveying upper guide‹ Center partition› Roll leverfi Roll base Bfl Paper roll shaft‡ Roll paper feed upper guide B— Roll paper feed upper roller· Roll front guide B‚ Roll rear guide BŒ Roll paper conveying rear roller B„ Roll paper conveying lower guide´ Roll paper conveying rear guide‰ Roll lever*1

ˇ Paper roll shaft*1

Á Roll base B*1

¨ Roll paper feed upper guide B*1

ˆ Roll paper feed upper roller*1

Ø Roll front guide B*1

” Roll rear guide B*1

Å Roll paper conveying rear roller C*1

CN3-14 CN3-34

CN6-14

CN3-1

CN3-5DCM2PCB

CN6-7

CN3-11CN6-8

CN7-13CN6-9CN3-9CN4-8ACN3-10

CN7-14

CN3-26CN3-28CN3-29CN6-10CN7-16

CN7-15

CN6-12CN7-17CN6-13

CN4-9A

CN6-11

MPCB

BYP RCL

RCL

RSW

RPCCL

PS-M

RWCL-M

PS-L

RWCL-L

PFM

FCL-M

FCL-L

FCL-U RWCL-U

RLDSW-U

CCL

BY

PR

SW

BY

PT

IMS

W

PFM ENAPFM SPEED2PFM SPEED1

CN7-12

RLDSW-L

CHPSW1CHPSW2

PS-U

RLDSW-M

Paper Feed Drive

The paper feed motor drives the paper feed rollers through electromagnetic clutches. When the feedclutch is off and the roll winding clutch is on, the paper spool reverses to pull back the roll leadingedge the home position.

Paper Roll and Original Width Detection

Two sensors, paper size switches 1 and 2, detect the roll width. The original width is also detected bytwo sensors, original size switches 1 and 2. Depending on the sensor status and UP setting, themachine can detect the widths of 17.0”, 22.0” 34.0 (Engineering) or 18.0”, 24.0”, 36.0” (Architecture).The paper leading edge switch is used only to detect the leading edge of roll paper.

Roll End

When the pulse disk on the roll winding clutch shaft stops rotation while the paper feed motor is on,the machine detects a roll end condition. If the paper leading edge sensor is on when roll end isdetected, the cutter clutch is energized to cut the paper.

Paper Feed Motor

Middle Feed Clutch

Lower Feed Clutch

Pulse Disk

Upper Feed Clutch

Pulse Disk

Upper Roll WindingClutch

Middle Roll Winding Clutch

Pulse Disk

Lower Roll Winding Clutch

1-3-9-1

Upper Paper Leading Edge Detection Switch

Middle Paper Leading Edge Detection Switch

Lower Paper Leading Edge Detection Switch

Original Size Switch1Original Size Switch2

Upper Paper Size Switch1

Upper PaperSize Switch

Lower PaperSize Switch

Lower Paper Size Switch

Paper Transport

The by-pass registration clutch and the by-pass registration switch are used to control the paper feedtiming.For roll feeding, the feed clutch, roll paper conveying clutch, registration clutch, and registration switchcontrol the paper feed timing. The paper feed length is measured by the registration sensor on time.Initially, the paper feed motor is slightly faster than the drive motor which drives the pre-transfer driveroller. This is to make a buckle between the registration roller and the pre-transfer drive roller. Thisbuckle absorbs the vibration when the paper is cut, to prevent jitter at the image transfer section. Aftera buckle is made, the paper feed motor speed becomes the same as the drive motor speed.

Cutter Unit

The paper feed motor drive is transmitted to the cutter clutch through gears and a timing belt. Therotary cutter rotates when the cutter clutch is energized. Initially, the cutter is in the home position, andthe cutter functions as a paper guide in this position. After the paper leading edge enters the cutterunit, the cutter moves to the cutting ready position. After the paper is cut, the cutter returns to thehome position. Paper transportation does not stop during cutting.

1-3-9-2

Cutting Ready Position

Cutter Blade

Home Position

Cutting Ready Position

Interrupted

Not Interrupted

Cutter Home Position

By-Pass Registration Clutch

Cutter Clutch

Roll Paper Conveying Clutch

Feed Clutch

Registration Clutch

340

1-3-10

Winding operation of paper roll

The leading edge of the paper in the roll unit is first fed to the home position (copy readyposition) by the winding operation, where it is ready for copying.

• After the following operations, if the leading edge of the paper roll is not at the homeposition, the winding operation for that roll unit will be performed.

1) After pressing the all clear/reset key.2) After performing the auto clear function.3) After changing the paper feed position with the paper source key.4) One minute after a copy cycle ends and the ready lamp (copy ready indicator) lights.

(If any key is pressed after the ready lamp is lit, another minute will be counted afterthe key press.)

5) After opening/closing the right cover (cycling safety switch 3), the main body(cycling safety switches 4 and 5), or the upper rear cover (cycling safety switch 6).

• After the following operation, the winding operation for all the roll units will be performed.(Winding starts with the lowest roll unit.)

1) After opening/closing the front covers (cycling safety switches 1 and 2).

• With the roll paper leading edge detection switch off

Timing chart 1-3-1 Winding operation for the first roll unit (1)

a The paper feed motor (PFM) and the upper feed clutch (FCL-U) turn on, and the paperis conveyed in the feed direction.

b The upper feed clutch (FCL-U) and the paper feed motor (PFM) are turned off 100 msafter the upper roll paper leading edge detection switch (RLDSW-U) is turned on, andthe leading edge of the paper stops at the home position (copy ready position).• Winding operation for the 2nd and 3rd roll units is performed similarly.

OnPFM

RLDSW-U100 ms

Off

On

Off

Off

OnFCL-U

a

b

340

1-3-11

• With the roll paper leading edge detection switch on

Timing chart 1-3-2 Winding operation for the first roll unit (2)

a The paper feed motor (PFM) and the upper roll winding clutch (RWCL-U) are turned on,and the paper starts to wind.

b After the upper roll paper leading edge detection switch (RLDSW-U) turns off, the upperroll winding clutch (RWCL-U) turns off and the upper feed clutch (FCL-U) turns on, andthe paper is conveyed in the feed direction.

c 100 ms after the upper roll paper leading edge detection switch (RLDSW-U) turns on,the upper feed clutch (FCL-U) and the paper feed motor (PFM) turn off, and the leadingedge of the paper stops at the home position (copy ready position).• Winding operation for the 2nd and 3rd roll units is performed similarly.

Off

On

OnPFM

RLDSW-U100 ms

Off

On

OffOff

On

RWCL-U

FCL-U

a

b

c

340

1-3-12

(1-1) Bypass paper feed

Timing chart 1-3-3 Bypass paper feed

a 1.75 s after the bypass registration switch (BYPRSW) is turned on by inserting paper intothe bypass table, the paper feed motor (PFM) and the bypass registration clutch(BYPRCL) turn on, and feeding of the inserted paper starts.

b 750 ms after the bypass timing switch (BYPTIMSW) turns on, the bypass registrationclutch (BYPRCL) turns off, and the paper stops at the copy ready position.

c Potential buildup, primary original feed and then shading correction are completed. 450ms after these secondary paper feed start conditions are satisfied, the PSYNC signalturns on.

d The bypass registration clutch (BYPRCL) turns on to convey the paper to the transfersection.

e 200 ms after the paper is conveyed to the transfer section and the bypass timing switch(BYPTIMSW) turns off, the bypass registration clutch (BYPRCL) turns off, and the paperfeed operation is completed.

1.75 s

Off

Off

Off

PFM

BYPRCL

OLDSW

BYPRSW

OTDSW

BYPTIMSW

750 ms

Off

Off

On

On

On

On

Off

On

OnOff

BYPRSW: On

BYPTIMSW: On

OLDSW: On

OTDSW: On

BYPTIMSW: Off

a b200 ms574 ms

450 ms

e

c

d

PSYNC signal

Paper insertion

Original insertion

Potential buildup completed. Primary original feed completed. Shading correction completed.

With the paper inserted before the original.

340

1-3-13

(1-2) Roll unit paper feed

Timing chart 1-3-4 Roll unit paper feed

a 1 s after the original is inserted and the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW)is turned on, the paper feed motor (PFM), the paper feed clutch for currently selected rollunit [the upper/middle/lower feed clutches (FCL-U/M/L)], the roll paper conveying clutch(RPCCL), and the registration clutch (RCL) are turned on to start feeding the paper inthe selected roll unit.

b The paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on. After 375 ms, the paper feed clutch[upper/middle/lower feed clutch (FCL-U/M/L)], the roll paper conveying clutch (RPCCL),and the registration clutch (RCL) are turned off and the paper stops. The cutter clutch(CCL) is then turned on and the cutter starts to move to the ready position and primarypaper feed is completed.

c After the cutter home position switches (CHPSW 1 and 2) are turned on, the cutter clutch(CCL) is turned off and the cutter stops at the ready position.

On

PFM

RCL

CCL

OLDSW

Off

On

On

On

Off

200 ms

78 P

OLDSW: OnOTDSW: On

RSW

RPCCL

PCSW

OTDSW

FCL-U/M/L

CHPSW1, 2

OFCL

OLDSW: Off

CHPSW: OffRSW: On

On

On

Off

Off

On

On

On

450 ms 600 ms574 ms

Off

375 ms

CHPSW: On

On

Off

a

f

g

RSW: Off

e

c

b

d

hOff

1 s

PSYNC signal

Potential buildup completed. Primary original feed completed. Shading correction completed.

Original insertion

340

1-3-14

d Potential buildup, primary original feed and then shading correction are completed. 450ms after these secondary paper feed start conditions are satisfied, the PSYNC signal isturned on.

e The roll paper conveying clutch (RPCCL) and registration clutch (RCL) turn on to startsecondary paper feed.

f 78 pulses (PFM FG pulses) after the original leading edge detection switch (OLDSW)turns off, the cutter clutch (CCL) is turned on and the paper is cut.

g After the cutter home position switches (CHPSW1 and 2) are turned off, the cutter clutch(CCL) is turned off and the cutter stops at the home position. At the same time, the rollpaper conveying clutch (RPCCL) turns off.

h 200 ms after the registration switch (RSW) is turned off, the registration clutch (RCL) isturned off to complete secondary paper feed.

340

1-3-15

(2) Main charger sectionThe main charger section is comprised of the drum, the drum potential sensor (DPS), themain charger assembly and the main charger grid as shown in Figure 1-3-12.The drum is electrically charged uniformly by means of a grid to form a static latent imageon the surface.The drum potential sensor measures the dark potential of the drum surface.

Figure 1-3-12 Main charger section

1 Drum2 Drum potential sensor (DPS)3 Charger wire (tungsten wire)

4

5

12 3

4 Main charger assembly5 Main charger grid

340

1-3-16

Figure 1-3-13 Main charger section (Main charger assembly)

1 Right main charger lid2 Screw3 Washer4 Charger wire (tungsten wire)

Figure 1-3-14 Block diagram of the main charger section

1

2

3

4 5

7

6

8

5 Left main charger lid6 Main charger terminal7 Charger spring8 Main charger shield

CN6-17

CN7-23

CN6-19

MC REM

MC ALARM

GRID CONT3

5

4

MPCB

MHVT

Grid

Drum

Block Diagram Description

3.534 seconds after the drum motor starts, MCREM signal turns on and the main high voltagetransformer applies approximately 6 kV to the charge corona wire. Grid voltage depends on the pulsewidth at CN7-2. When a charge corona leak occurs, the MC ALARM signal is sent to the main PCBand SC302 is displayed.

To prevent toner scattering caused by sudden changes in the drum voltage and development biasvoltage, voltage is change in steps. The development bias voltage and the grid voltage are increasedin several synchronized steps, to minimize the difference in voltage between the drum and thedevelopment roller.

After the copy operation is finished, the grid voltage and bias voltage are decreased in several steps.

1-3-16-1

340

1-3-17

Timing chart 1-3-5 Operation of the main high-voltage transformer

a When the original is inserted, the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW) isturned on. After 2.3 s, the drive motor (DM) and drum motor (DRM) are turned on.

b 3.534 s (1 turn of the drum) after the drive motor (DM) and drum motor (DRM) are turnedon, the main high-voltage transformer (MHVT) is turned on to start main charging. Thegrid voltage (GRID CONT) and developing bias voltage (DB CONT) are controlledstepwise to increase the drum potential gradually.

c The drum potential reaches 870 V DC and the developing bias voltage (DB CONT) step-up control ends. After 3.534 s (1 turn of the drum), potential buildup is completed.

d 3 s after copying is completed and the eject switch (ESW) is turned off, the grid voltage(GRID CONT) and developing bias voltage (DB CONT) are controlled stepwise todecrease the drum potential gradually.

e When the grid voltage (GRID CONT) step-down control ends, the main high-voltagetransformer (MHVT) is turned off and main charging ends.

DMDRM

OTDSW

ESW

MHVT

GRID CONT

DB CONT

OTDSW: On ESW: OnESW: Off

OnOff

Off

Off

OffOnOn

2.3 sOn

3.534 s

3.534 s

3 s

1.6 s

400 ms

400 ms

600 ms

400 ms

400 ms

a

b

c

e

d

Potential buildup completed.

Drum Drive Mechanism

The drum is driven by the drum motor through an idle gear. The gear of the drum flange transmits thedrum rotation to the cleaning brush and the cleaning spiral. This machine uses an OPC drum of 90mmdiameter.

There is an anti-condensation heater under the drum. The heater stays on while the main switch is off.

1-3-17-1

Drum Drive Gear

Drum Motor

Cleaning Brush

Cleaing Spiral

OPC Drum

340-3

1-3-18

Drum surface potential correction

The grid control voltage (GRID CONT) is determined based on the target value set bysimulation 35 to maintain the drum surface potential around the developing section to870 V DC.

• Correction timings1) When any of the safety switches are turned off and on.2) When the power plug is removed and reinserted.3) When the main switch is turned off and on.

• Drum surface potential correction flow chart

Start.

End.

The grid voltage is controlled stepwise to increase the drum surface potential gradually.

V1: Drum potential sensor output value set by simulation 35 for the drum surface potential of 870 V DC. V2: Average of sampled drum potential sensor output values V3: Average of sampled drum potential sensor output values

Dark potential is stabilized (maximum data is reached).

Yes

Yes

No No

Yes Yes

No

No

V1 – 16 ≤ V2 < V1 V1 < V3 ≤ V1 + 16

V1 – 16 ≤ V3 < V1 V1 < V2 ≤ V1 + 16

Is this the 10th correction?

V1 – 4 ≤ V2, V3 ≤ V1 + 4

The drum potential sensor output is sampled 20 times and average value V2 is calculated.

The drum potential sensor output is sampled 20 times and average value V3 is calculated.

The grid control voltage (GRID CONT) is determined based on V1, V2 and V3.

C-551 “Dark potential correction problem” is triggered.

After 3.534 s (1 turn of the drum)

After 200 ms

340

1-3-19

(3) Exposure and original feed section

Figure 1-3-15 Exposure and original feed section

Exposure is accomplished by scan exposure method with a moving original. A fluorescentlamp is used as the light source. While being conveyed across the contact glass by therollers, the original is exposed by the fluorescent light and the exposed image is read by theCIS (contact image sensor).The fluorescent lamp heater (FLH) is installed on the fluorescent lamp (FL) to improve thetemperature characteristics which maintains the temperature of the fluorescent lamp toapproximately 40°C/104°F. The CIS reads the reflection of the fluorescent lamp (FL) lighton the middle upper original roller (white reference) to maintain the intensity constant.The original is fed by the rotation of the front/middle/rear upper original rollers and the front/rear lower original rollers. These rollers are controlled by the original leading edge detectionswitch (OLDSW), the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW), and the original feedclutch (OFCL). The original feed motor (OFM) drives the exposure section.

1 Original insertion guide2 Front upper original roller3 Middle upper original roller4 Contact glass5 Original holder rear guide6 Rear upper original roller7 Original feed rear guide8 Rear lower original roller

9 Original feed rear light shielding plate0 Fluorescent lamp (FL)! Fluorescent lamp heater (FLH)@ Front lower original roller# Original feed front light shielding plate$ Original feed front guide% SLA (SELFOC lens array)^ CIS (contact image sensor)

1

$

45 236

7

89

0!

#@% ^

Original Feed Mechanism

Original is fed by original upper rollers and original lower rollers, which are driven by the original feedmotor. The original feed clutch controls the rollers movement according to the sensors.

In the syncro-cut function, the length of the original is detected by the original trailing edge detectsensor on time.

1-3-19-1

Orignal Trailing Edge Detect Sensor

Original Upper Roller

Original Feed Motor

Original Lower Rear Roller

Original Feed ClutchOriginal Lower Roller

Original Leading EdgeDetect Sensor

340

1-3-20

Figure 1-3-16 Block diagram of the exposure and original feed section

CN2-14CN3-12

CN7-22CN6-18

CN4-13B

CN4-7ACN3-13

CN3-30

CN3-31

CN3-32

CN3-33

CN3-23

CN3-24

CN3-25

CN2-1CN2-10

CN2-11

CN2-12

CN2-13

CN2-2

CN2-3

a

b

c

abc

FLH REM

FL CONT

MPCB

FL REM

CN6-6

CN5-5

OPPCB

INPCB

DCM2PCB

OFM

CN

2-1

CN

2-6CN

1-1C

N1-2

FLH

RE

M

~

OT

DS

W

FLH

FLTH

OLD

SW

OF

CL

OFM SPEED1

OFM ENA

OFM SPEED2

e

fg

d

efg

d DCM2PCB TXD/RXD

DCM2PCB RXD/TXD

GS

GS

FL

340

1-3-21

Timing chart 1-3-6 Operation of the exposure and original feed section

a 640 ms after the original is inserted and the original leading edge detection switch(OLDSW) is turned on, the original feed motor (OFM) starts to rotate forward and theoriginal feed clutch (OFCL) is turned on to start conveying the original.

b After the original is conveyed and the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW)is turned on, the original feed clutch (OFCL) is turned off and the original stops at the copyready position.

c 1 s after the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW) is turned on, the CIS(contact image sensor) starts shading correction and the fluorescent lamp (FL) lights.

d As soon as the secondary paper feed starts, the original feed clutch (OFCL) is turned onand the original is conveyed across the contact glass for exposure.

e 500 ms after original exposure is completed and the original trailing edge detectionswitch (OTDSW) is turned off, the original feed motor (OFM) is turned off.

f 200 ms after the original feed motor (OFM) is turned off, it starts to rotate in reverse toreturn the original.

g When the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW) is turned off, the original feedclutch (OFCL) is turned off and, after 48 ms, the original feed motor (OFM) is turned offto complete original return operation.

h 500 ms after original return operation is completed, the original feed motor (OFM) startsto rotate forward for the exposure for the second copy, and the original feed clutch(OFCL) is turned on to convey the original.

i When the original is conveyed and the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW)is turned on, the original feed clutch (OFCL) is turned off and the original stops at the copyready position.

j As soon as the secondary feed of the second sheet starts, the original feed clutch (OFCL)is turned on and the original is conveyed across the contact glass for exposure for thesecond copy. The original feed motor (OFM) and original feed clutch (OFCL) then repeate to g to return the original.

k 1325 ms after original exposure is completed and the original trailing edge detectionswitch (OTDSW) is turned off, the fluorescent lamp (FL) is turned off.

FL

OLDSW

OTDSW

OFCL

OLDSW: On

OTDSW: On

OFM

OTDSW: Off OTDSW: Off OTDSW: Off OTDSW: Off

OTDSW: On

OnOn

On

On On

1 s

640 ms

500 ms200 ms

On On

On

On

On

Off 200 msOff

Off Off

Off Off

Off

Off

1325 ms

Off

500 ms 500 ms48 ms 48 ms

a

b

c

d

e e'f f'

g g

h

ij

k

'

Forward Stop

Reverse

Shading correction start

Secondary paper feed start

Second sheet secondary feed start

Roll unit paper feed, multiple copying (2 sheets).

340

1-3-22

(4) CIS and LPH sectionIn the CIS and LPH section, the CIS reads the original image exposed by the fluorescentlamp (FL) and the drum surface is irradiated by the LPH to form a static latent image on it.

Figure 1-3-17 CIS and LPH section

1 SLA (SELFOC lens array)2 LPH (LED printhead)

1 23

4

3 Fluorescent lamp (FL)4 CIS (contact image sensor)

Contains 1 and 3.

340-1

1-3-23

Figure 1-3-18 Block diagram of the CIS and LPH section

CN11

CN7-22CN6-18

CN17

CN22

CN21

FL CONTFL REM

INPCB CN

2-1

CN

2-6CN

1-1C

N1-2

~

FLCIS

LPH

ISUPCB

LPHROMPCB

LPHPSPCB5 V DC

GND MPCB

340-1

1-3-24

Original image reading

The CIS (contact image sensor) consists of four channels of 3712 phototransistors. Theoriginal image is read by 14592 phototransistors along a line of the width of A0 (934 mm),and its analog data is sent to the ISU PCB (ISUPCB).

Figure 1-3-19 Original image reading

Static latent image formation

The LPH (LED printhead) consists of 14592 LEDs which are turned on and off based on theimage data read by the CIS to form a static latent image on the drum surface line by line.Toner adheres only to the areas irradiated by the lit LEDs, so the image is formed.

Figure 1-3-20 Static latent image formation

1, 2, 3 14592

Channel 1

Original image

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

CIS (contact image sensor)

1 line

Phototransistors

SLA (SELFOC lens array)

1,2,3 14592

LED

1 line

LPH (LED printhead)

DrumSLA (SELFOC lens array)

340

1-3-25

Timing chart 1-3-7 Image reading and formation

a 1 s after the original is conveyed and the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW)is turned on, the CIS (contact image sensor) starts shading correction and thefluorescent lamp (FL) lights.

b The original feed clutch (OFCL) is turned on to start secondary original feed. At the sametime, the fluorescent lamp (FL) starts exposure and the CIS starts to read the originalimage.

c 450 ms after the original feed clutch (OFCL) is turned on, the OSYNC and PSYNCsignals are turned on and, in synch with these signals, the original image is processedand the LPH forms a static latent image, respectively.OSYNC signal: original leading edge synchronization signalPSYNC signal: image formation synchronization signal

d 450 ms after the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW) is turned off, theOSYNC and PSYNC signals are turned off to end image reading and formation.

e 1325 ms after original exposure ends and the original trailing edge detection switch(OTDSW) is turned off, the original feed motor (OFM) and original feed clutch (OFCL)are turned off. At the same time, the fluorescent lamp (FL) is turned off.

FL

OLDSW

OTDSW

OFCL

OSYNC signal

PSYNC signal

OLDSW: On

OFM

OTDSW: Off

OTDSW: On

OnOn

On

On On

Forward Stop

Reverse

1 s

450 ms 450 ms

640 ms

Off

Off

Off

1325 ms

Off

Shading correction start

Original and paper secondary feed start Image reading start

a

b

c d

e

340

1-3-26

CIS correction

• Shading correctionShading correction is carried out to correct the fluctuation in the fluorescent lamp (FL)intensity and variations in the sensitivity between the sensor elements constituting the CIS.If shading correction does not end within 30 s from its start, an original jam (J-05) isindicated. If shading correction fails to end six times successively after the original isreinserted, service call code C-300 is triggered.

Start.

End.

CIS black reference value is created (black shading).

Yes

Yes

No Is the average read-in value below A0H?

With the fluorescent lamp off, the average of the sensor read-in data is calculated for each channel.

CIS white reference value is created (white shading).

NoIs the average read-in value above 80H?

With the fluorescent lamp lit, the aver- age of the sensor read-in data on the middle upper original roller (white reference) is calculated for each channel (see Figure 1-3-21).

The CIS read-in data is corrected based on the black and white reference values while the original image is read in.

CIS

SLA

Fluorescent lamp (FL)

Middle upper original roller (white reference)

Figure 1-3-21 White shading

340

1-3-27

• AGC processing (gray level correction)The tone of the image is reproduced by dividing the CIS image read-in value into 256 levels.If the absolute white level is assumed to be 5.0 V and the absolute black level 0 V, the rangeof the actual image read-in value is narrower than the range from 0 to 5.0 V, so the tone ofthe reproduced image is affected. AGC processing (auto gain control) corrects the imageread-in value to reproduce gray levels more accurately.

Figure 1-3-22 AGC processing

Example: If the maximum white reference value (AGCHMAX) read by the CIS is 4.0 V andthe minimum black reference value (AGCLMIN) is 0.8 V, the range of the imageread-in value is narrower than the range between the absolute white level (5.0V) and absolute black level (0 V). In such a case, the read-in value cannot bedivided into 256 levels and the tone of the reproduced image is affected. AGCprocess corrects VREFH to 4.0 V, VREFL to 0.8 V and the correction value to 0so that the read-in value can be divided into 256 levels to reproduce the tone ofthe image more correctly.

• γ (gamma) correctionThere are slight differences in the black-level read-in values between the four channels ofthe CIS. Gamma correction can be made by executing simulation 120 so that an even imageoutput level is obtained.

Absolute white level (5.0 V)

Absolute black level (0 V)

AGCHMAX (4.0 V)

AGCLMIN (0.8 V)

VREFH (4.0 V + correction value)

VREFL (0.8 V + correction value) Before AGC processing

After AGC processing

Divided into 256 levels.

340-1

1-3-28

(5) Developing sectionThe developing section is comprised of the developing unit assembly and the toner hopperassembly. The developing unit assembly is comprised of the developing roller and doctorblade which form a magnetic brush, and the developer paddle and developer spiral rollerwhich mix the developer. The toner hopper assembly is installed on the top of the developingunit assembly to supply toner to the developing unit assembly and is comprised of the tonerfeed roller and the toner agitation rod.

Figure 1-3-23 Developing section

1 Developing roller2 Doctor blade3 Developing unit thermistor (DTH)4 Toner sensor (TNS)5 Upper developing unit stay6 Front hopper stay7 Developing unit partition

5

@

!

49

0

8 7 6

$#

2

1

3

8 Toner feed roller9 Toner agitation rod0 Hopper lid! Rear hopper stay@ Developing unit housing# Developer spiral roller$ Developer paddle

DBHVT

MPCB

CN2-18

CN2-2

CN4-3BCN4-4BCN2-19

CN4-1A

CN4-2A

345

TNS

DTH

DB REM

DB CHG

DB CONT

TM

Figure 1-3-24 Block diagram of the developing section

Development Unit Drive

The development unit is driven by the drive motor through a timing belt. The development paddlemoves the developer from left to right, and the development spiral moves the developer from right toleft (as viewed from the operation side). This distributes the developer evenly in the development unit.

The development thermistor and the toner sensor are located in the center of the development unit.

1-3-28-1

Development Paddle

Drive Motor

Development Roller

Development Spiral

340-1

1-3-29

Forming the magnetic brush

The developer flows by the rotation of the developing roller and the magnetic brush is formedon pole N1. The height of the magnetic brush is set by the gap between the doctor bladeand the developing roller. The developing bias voltage (650 V DC) which is output from thedeveloping bias high-voltage transformer (DBHVT) is applied to the developing roller toimprove the image contrast. When the drum surface potential reaches 0 V after completionof copying, the developing bias voltage is switched to –100 V DC to prevent toner and carrierfrom adhering to the drum.

Figure 1-3-25 Forming the magnetic brush and agitation of the developer

A (gap between doctor blade and developing roller):0.55 to 0.65 mm around the center0.7 to 0.75 mm at both ends

N1: 900 × 10–4 ± 70 × 10–4TN2: 600 × 10–4 ± 60 × 10–4TS1: 750 × 10–4 ± 70 × 10–4TS2: 750 × 10–4 ± 70 × 10–4TS3: 600 × 10–4 ± 60 × 10–4T

1 Developing roller2 Doctor blade3 Developing unit partition4 Toner feed roller

A

S3

S1

S2

N2

N1

80°

60°

85°75°

60°

1

2

345

6

7

5 Toner agitation rod6 Developer spiral roller7 Developer paddle

340

1-3-30

Temperature compensation of the toner sensor output

Temperature compensation of the toner sensor (TNS) output value is applied by thefollowing formula.The output values from the toner sensor (TNS) and the developing unit thermistor (DTH)are input to the main PCB (MPCB). The main PCB samples the two input values at 8 msintervals. If two of three successive sampled input values are the same, this value is usedas one input value.

X = TS – K (TH – D26)where X: control input (V, toner sensor output value after temperature compensation)

TS: actual toner sensor output (V)K: temperature compensation coefficient (0.005 V/deg: TH > 26°C/79°F,

0.014 V/deg: TH < 26°C/79°F)TH: temperature of the developing unit (°C/°F, detected temperature of the

developing unit thermistor)D26: reference temperature (26°C/79°F)

A change in temperature TH – D26 based on the reference temperature (26°C/79°F) ismultiplied by temperature compensation coefficient K to obtain the temperature compensationvalue; this is then subtracted from actual toner sensor output TS. Because the rate ofincrease in the toner sensor output value is high when the temperature of the developingunit is greater than 26°C/79°F, the main PCB compensates the toner sensor outputfollowing the above formula, so as to lower the output. Because the rate of decrease in thetoner sensor output value is high when the temperature of the developing unit is less than26°C/79°F, the main PCB compensates to increase the output.

340

1-3-31

Toner sensor output correction based on the copy count

The toner sensor (TNS) output is corrected by the following formula based on the copy count(copy distance).

X = KM + TSwhere X: control input value (V, toner sensor output value after copy count correction)

M: copy distance after execution of simulation 60 (m)TS: actual toner sensor output (V)

K: distance correction coefficient (0.00021 V/m)

Figure 1-3-26

A The copy distance count is cleared during developer setting (simulation 60).B Until the copy distance reaches 1000 m, the actual toner sensor output value is corrected

by the formula as the copy distance increases.C When the copy distance exceeds 1000 m, the actual toner sensor output value is

corrected with a constant value of +0.21 V.

A

B

CControl input value (V)

Copy distance (m)

TS

10000

0.21 V

340

1-3-32

Toner density control

Figure 1-3-27 Toner density control

A The value set while simulation 60 (developer setting) is performed is used as the tonercontrol level (initial output value for the toner control sensor). Toner feed motor (TM) on/off control is based on this reference value.If the temperature- and count-corrected toner sensor output value exceeds the tonercontrol level, the toner feed motor is turned on for 0.5 s to supply toner from the tonerhopper to the developing unit assembly. (The toner feed motor can be turned on onlywhen the developing unit assembly is driven, i.e. the drive motor is on.)If the toner sensor output value does not drop during this 0.5 s period, the toner feedmotor is turned on for another 0.5 s, and this operation is repeated until the toner sensoroutput value becomes lower than the toner control level.

B If the toner sensor output value rises further and remains 0.234 V or more above the tonercontrol level for 10 s, the toner empty level is detected and toner feed aging operationis carried out. When the toner sensor output value reaches the toner control level, agingis performed for 3 minutes after toner replenishing ends (toner feed motor off). If thetoner sensor output value does not reach the toner control level after 3 minutes of tonerfeed aging, toner empty condition is detected and the add toner indicator on theoperation panel lights.

C When the toner sensor output value is 0.351 V or more above the toner empty level, thetoner empty high level is detected and the message requesting toner to be replenishedis shown on the display, inhibiting copying.

D When toner is replenished to the toner hopper and the toner sensor output value reachesthe toner control level, aging is performed for 3 minutes and then copying is enabled.

0.351 V

0.234 V

A B C D

3 minToner sensor output voltage (V)

Toner empty high level

Toner empty level

Toner control level

Add toner indictor on

Message requesting toner to be replenished

Toner Density Control [cont...]

If solid black copies are made continuously, toner supply from the toner hopper cannot keep up withtoner consumption and toner near end will be falsely indicaed. In this case, if “Single” has beenselected in SP 67, toner is supplied after every copy job, and the toner density will automaticallyrecover to the normal level (This prevents false toner near end detection, but users need to wait afterevery copy job). If “Continuation” has been selected in SP67, toner is supplied only after the fusingsection, right center door or upper rear cover is opened and closed.

1-3-32-1

340

1-3-33

(6) Transfer/separation sectionThe transfer/separation section is comprised of the transfer charger assembly, the pre-transfer roller, and the separation claws as shown in Figure 1-3-28.

Figure 1-3-28 Transfer/separation section

1 Separation claw solenoid (SSOL)2 Tungsten wires3 Pre-transfer upper inner guide4 Pre-transfer pulley5 Pre-transfer outer guide6 Pre-transfer roller

Figure 1-3-29 Block diagram of the transfer section

87

1

3 2

4

@!0

9

65

7 Transfer charger8 Separation charger9 Transfer charger assembly0 Separation claws! Separation guide@ Separation pulley

CN4-1B

CN6-6

CN4-2BCN3-3

TC REM

ST ALARM

SC REM

MPCB

STHVT

SSOL

TC SC

CN1-1

CN1-2

CN1-3

Drum

Block Diagram Description

The transfer & separation high voltage transformer applies the transfer and separation voltages. Thetransfer and separation triggers are applied from CN4-1B and CN4-2B. The transfer voltage is aboutdc –5.3 kV and the separation voltage is about ac 5.6 kV and dc 40 V.

When transfer or separation charge leakage occurs, the ST ALARM signal is sent to the main PCB,and SC401 is displayed.

The transfer and separation voltages are constant. The voltages are adjusted in the factory and theyshould not be changed in the field.

1-3-33-1

340

1-3-34

The transfer charger assembly is divided into the transfer charger which transfers the tonerimage formed on the drum to the paper, and the separation charger which removes thepaper from the drum. Transfer charging and separation charging are performed by applyinghigh voltage which is output from the ST high-voltage transformer (STHVT) to both ends ofeach tungsten transfer charger and separation charger wires. The separation claws areinstalled to ensure paper separation.

Figure 1-3-30 Transfer charger assembly

1 Left transfer charger lid2 Left transfer seal3 Charger spring4 Transfer charger left housing5 Tungsten wire (for transfer

and separation charger)6 Right transfer charger lid

1

23

4

56

7

89

0!

@

#

7 Right transfer seal8 Screw9 Washer0 Transfer charger right housing! Transfer inner shield@ Transfer outer shield# Transfer wire

Separation Claw (Pick-off Pawl) Mechanism

During stand-by, the separation claws are not in contact with the drum surface. 450 ms after the drumpotential step control is finished, the separation claw solenoid is energized and the claws move up tothe drum.

After that, when the paper conveying switch detects the leading edge of paper, the solenoid isde-energized.

1-3-34-1

Separation Claw

Separation Claw Solenoid

340

1-3-35

Timing chart 1-3-8 Operation of the transfer/separation section

a 2.3 s after the original is inserted and the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW)is turned on, the drive motor (DM) turns on and, at the same time, separation charging(SHVT) starts.

b 994 ms after the PSYNC signal is turned on, the separation claw solenoid (SSOL) isturned on.

c 1704 ms after the PSYNC signal is turned on, transfer charging (THVT) starts.d The moment the paper conveying switch (PCSW) is turned on, the separation claw

solenoid (SSOL) is turned off.e 1680 ms after the PSYNC signal is turned off, transfer charging (THVT) ends.f 800 ms after the developing bias step-down cotrol is completed, separation charging

(SHVT) ends.

OTDSW

OTDSW: OnOTDSW: Off

PCSW: On PCSW: Off

PCSW

SSOL

THVT

SHVT

DB CONT

On

2.3 s

944 ms

1704 ms 1680 ms

800 ms

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

On

DM OffOn

a

b

c e

f

dOn

Off

On

450 ms450 ms

Potential buildup completed. Primary original feed completed. Shading correction completed.

PSYNC signal

340-1

1-3-36

(7) Cleaning sectionCleaning is performed by the blade cleaning method and the cleaning fur brush. Thecleaning section is comprised of the cleaning blade and the cleaning fur brush which removethe residual toner adhering to the drum after transfer, and the cleaning unit spiral whichcollects and sends toner to the waste toner tank.The cleaning fur brush rotates always in contact with the drum surface and prevents thetoner scraped off the drum by the cleaning blade from dropping inside of the machine. Otherforeign matter such as paper fragments adhering to the surface of the drum are alsoremoved by the brush.When the waste toner tank becomes full, the overflow sensor (OFS) is turned off and amessage requesting the waste toner tank to be checked appears on the display on theoperation panel, and copying is inhibited.

Figure 1-3-31 Cleaning section

5

21

76

3

4

1 Cleaning blade2 Cleaning unit cover3 Cleaning housing4 Cleaning fur brush

5 Cleaning solenoid (CSOL)6 Cleaning unit spiral7 Lower cleaning blade

Toner Collection Mechanism

During stand-by, the cleaning blade is not in contact with the drum surface. During copying, thecleaning solenoid is energized and the cleaning blade is pressed against the drum surface.

When the toner disposal tank becomes full, the toner overflow switch turns off and a message isdisplayed for the user to replace the tank. The message is displayed when the weight of the usedtoner becomes about 1,200 g.

The cleaning unit is connected to the toner disposal tank through the toner collection pipe. When thetoner pipe is pushed down to disconnect it from the cleaning unit, the shutter is closed by tension froma spring to prevent used toner from falling.

1-3-36-1

Cleaning Solenoid

Cleaning Blade

Waste Toner TankDetection Switch

Toner Disposal Tank

Toner Overflow

Shutter

Toner Collection Pipe

Spring

340

1-3-37

Figure 1-3-32 Block diagram of the cleaning section

OFS

MPCB

CN6-5

CN6-4

CN3-8

CSOL

CSOL 1

CSOL 2

TDT DSW

CN3-7

340

1-3-38

Timing chart 1-3-9 Operation of the cleaning solenoid

The cleaning solenoid (CSOL) is controlled by signals CSOL 1 and CSOL 2.

a 1.3 s after the original is inserted and the original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW)is turned on, signals CSOL 1 and CSOL 2 are turned on and the cleaning solenoid(CSOL) is turned on.

b 1 s after the cleaning solenoid (CSOL) is turned on, the CSOL 1 signal is turned off. Thecleaning solenoid (CSOL) stays on.

c 10 minutes after copying is completed and the drive motor (DM) is turned off, the CSOL2 signal is turned off and the cleaning solenoid (CSOL) is turned off. (If the drive motoris turned back on for the next copy cycle within 10 minutes after it was turned off, a isrepeated.)

d 1 s after the cleaning solenoid (CSOL) is turned off, the CSOL 1 and CSOL 2 signals areturned on and off at intervals of 1 s and the cleaning solenoid (CSOL) is turned on twice.

1 s

1.3 s

10 min

DM

OTDSW

CSOL 1

CSOL 2Off

Off

On On

On

OnOff

OTDSW: On OTDSW: Off

On

On1 s 1 s

1 s

1 s 1 s

On On

ab

c d

Off

Off

340

1-3-39

(8) Static eliminator sectionThe static eliminator section is comprised of the two cleaning lamps as shown in Figure1-3-33. The post-transfer lamp (RTL) is to eliminate unnecessary charge, and the pre-charging lamp (PCHL) is to eliminate the residual charge after transfer.

Post-transfer lamp ....... Since the transfer charger has been turned on before the latentstatic image on the drum reaches the transfer charger, this lampeliminates the unnecessary charge generated by the transfercharger and prepares for the next main charging (copy operation).

Pre-charging lamp ....... Eliminates the residual charge on the drum after the toner isremoved in the cleaning section to prepare for the next copy.

Figure 1-3-33 Static eliminator section

Pre-charging lamp (PCHL)

Post-transfer lamp (RTL)

340

1-3-40

Figure 1-3-34 Block diagram of the static eliminator section

CN6-8

CN5-6

CN5-7

CN6-7

OPPCBCN4-12B

CN4-12A

RTL REM

PCHL REM

MPCB

PCHL

RTL

Drum

Timing chart 1-3-10 Operation of the static eliminator section

a After the drive motor (DM) is turned on, the pre-charging lamp (PCHL) and the post-transfer lamp (RTL) are turned on.

b After copying operation, the drive motor (DM) is turned off. Then the pre-charging lamp(PCHL) and the post-transfer lamp (RTL) are turned off.

2.3 sOTDSW

DM

PCHL

RTL

On

On

On

OnOff

Off

Off

Off

OTDSW: On OTDSW: Off

a b

340

1-3-41

(9) Fixing section

Figure 1-3-35 Fixing section

(

21567

98

&*

^%$# 4@

!

0

3

› ‹¤

)⁄

1 Fixing heater M (H1)2 Fixing heater S (H2)3 Oil roller4 Heat roller5 Fixing unit thermal switch 1 (FTSW1)6 Fixing unit thermal switch 2 (FTSW2)7 Fixing unit upper partition8 Fixing unit thermistor 1 (FTH1: near

the center of the heat roller)9 Fixing unit thermistor 2 (FTH2: right

end of the heat roller)0 Fixing unit cover! Fixing unit middle front guide@ Separation pulleys

# Fixing unit front guide$ Fixing unit lower partition% Front lower removal cover^ Press roller& Fixing unit thermistor 3 (FTH3: near

the center of the press roller)* Fixing unit thermistor 4 (FTH4: right

end of the press roller)( Lower eject guide) Press roller separation claw⁄ Eject roller¤ Eject pulley‹ Upper eject guide› Separation claw

Oil Supply Mechanism

The oil roller, which contacts the heat roller applies oil to the heat roller surface. The heat roller geardrive is transmitted to the oil roller gear through an idle gear, and the oil roller rotates in the samedirection as the heat roller.

Drive Mechanism

An independent dc motor drives the fusing unit. The drive is transmitted to the heat roller gear,through idle gears. The heat roller gear transmits the drive to the exit roller gear and oil roller gearthrough idle gears.

Fusing Pressure Mechanism

Two springs apply fusing pressure through the pressure arm.

1-3-41-1

Oil Roller

Heat Roller

Spring

Pressure Arm

Fixing Unit Release Mechanism

The fixing section can be released from the drum section to remove misfed paper in the fusing section.

When the left and right levers are pulled, the hooks are released and the fixing unit can be pulledtowards the operator’s side.

There are two safety switches in the left and right lock positions. When one of these switches is off,the 24V line is cut and a cover open message is displayed.

Fixing Unit Open Mechanism

To remove misfed paper between the heat roller and the press roller, the upper part of the fixing unitcan be opened. When the release button is pushed, the two lock arms are released and the upper unitopens because of the tension from the spring.

1-3-41-2

Release Lever

Safety Switch

Release Button

Lock Arm

Release Lever

Fixing Entrance Guide

The fixing entrance guide controls the angle of the paper leading edge, so that the paper is fedproperly between the heat roller and press roller without creasing or misfeeding. The height of thecenter of the guide can be changed by changing the number of spacers to suit various types of paper.

1-3-41-3

Fusing Entrance Guide

340-3

1-3-42

The fixing section is comprised of the parts shown in Figure 1-3-35. After the transferoperation, the paper is conveyed to the fixing section and passes between the heat rollerand the press roller. A constant pressure is applied between the heat roller and the pressroller by the fixing press spring and the toner transferred is fixed on the paper by the heatand pressure applied from each roller.Fixing heater M (H1) heats the center of the heat roller and fixing heater S (H2) heats theends of the heat roller.The oil roller cleans the surface of the heat roller to prevent the paper from wrapping aroundthe heat roller.After fixing, the paper is separated from the heat roller by the separation claws and ejectedto outside of the machine via the eject roller and the eject pulley.

Figure 1-3-36 Block diagram of the fixing section

CN4-8BCN4-7BCN4-3A

SSR2 REMSSR1 REMSSR3 REM

MPCB

CN2-5

FDM CLKCN3-4

CN7-6CN7-7

FDM REMCN3-3

DCM1PCB

CN5-1CN5-2CN5-3CN5-4

PRY1 FTSW1

FTSW2

FR*H2H1

+−FGFG

FTH1

CN2-6 FTH2

CN2-7 FTH3

CN2-8 FTH4

CN2-10 ETTH

CN3-16 ESW

CN3-17

CN4-5ACN4-5B

FPS

FFM-R

FFM-L

FFM REM

FFM H/L

*For 230 V, 50 Hz models only.

FDM

SSR2 SSR1

SSR3*

340

1-3-43

Heating and temperature control of heat roller and press roller

• Heat roller temperature control 1Fixing unit thermistor 1 (FTH1) detects the surface temperature around the center of theheat roller and fixing unit thermistor 2 (FTH2) detects the surface temperature of the rightend of the heat roller.If the temperature TPRD (surface temperature around the center of the press roller) detectedby fixing unit thermistor 3 (FTH3) becomes less than TPTH, fixing heaters M and S (H1 andH2) are turned on to heat the heat roller. Control temperature T is controlled by the followingformula.

Control temperature T = THCON + k (TPTH – TPRD)When (TPTH – TPRD) < 0, T = THCON.

THCON: heat roller control temperaturek: temperature compensation coefficient (standby: 0.33, copying: 1)

TPTH: press roller temperature threshold valueTPRD: fixing unit thermistor 3 (FTH3) temperature (surface temperature around

the center of the press roller)

Figure 1-3-37 Fixing temperature control

Standby StandbyCopy start

Copy end

THCON

TPTH

90˚C/194˚F 80˚C/176˚F

Heat roller temperature

Heat roller control temperature

Press roller surface temperature

340

1-3-44

• Heat roller temperature control 2When the temperature TETTH detected by the external temperature thermistor (ETTH) is asin the table, the control temperatures are changed to prevent poor fixing. If the ambienttemperature is below 15°C/59°F, fixing is not performed sufficiently, and if greater than30°C/86°F, the image may be blurred.

The heat roller control temperature and the press roller temperature threshold value mustbe changed as follows depending on the paper used (plain paper, tracing paper, or film) toprevent poor fixing.

External temperature thermistordetection temperature

Primary stabilizationtemperature

Secondary stabilizationtemperature

TETTH ≤ 15°C/59°F 145°C/293°F 165°C/329°F

15°C/59°F < TETTH < 30°C/86°F 165°C/329°F 155°C/311°F

30°C/86°F ≤ TETTH 165°C/329°F 155°C/311°F

External tempera-ture thermistor

detectiontemperature

Heat roller controltemperature

Press roller temperaturethreshold value

TETTH ≤ 15°C/59°F 155°C/311°F

15°C/59°F < TETTH

< 30°C/86°F

30°C/86°F ≤ TETTH

Plainpaper

Tracingpaper

Film Plainpaper

Tracingpaper

Film

150°C/302°F

155°C/311°F

105°C/221°F

100°C/212°F

105°C/221°F

150°C/302°F

145°C/293°F

150°C/302°F

145°C/293°F

140°C/284°F

145°C/293°F

105°C/221°F

100°C/212°F

105°C/221°F

105°C/221°F

100°C/212°F

105°C/221°F

340

1-3-45

• Press roller temperature control 1If the surface temperature of the press roller is less than its minimum value or the surfacetemperature between the heat roller side and on the opposite side is different, fixingproblems may occur. Therefore, the following control is performed to keep the surfacetemperature of the press roller constant.In ready status, if the fixing unit thermistor 3 (FTH3) temperature (temperature around thecenter of the press roller) becomes less than 80°C/176°F, fixing heaters M and S (H1 andH2) are turned on. The fixing drive motor (FDM) is then turned on at low speed to increasethe surface temperature of the press roller. When the temperature of fixing unit thermistor3 (FTH3) reaches 90°C/194°F, fixing heaters M and S (H1 and H2) and the fixing drive motor(FDM) are turned off. By repeating these operations, the surface temperature of the pressroller is maintained between 80°C/176°F and 90°C/194°F.

• Press roller temperature control 2When copies are made with small-size paper, the press roller temperature becomes higherat the ends where no paper passes than around the center where paper passes. Thiscauses the ends of the press roller to swell, reducing the paper conveying force around thecenter.After copying is completed, the fixing unit thermistor 3 (FTH3) temperature (temperaturearound the center of the press roller) is compared to the fixing unit thermistor 4 (FTH4)temperature (temperature at the right end of the press roller), and the fixing drive motor(FDM) speed is corrected in proportion to the temperature difference to prevent the paperconveying speed from decreasing in the fixing unit.

Figure 1-3-38 Heat roller and press roller temperature detection

Fixing heater M

Fixing heater S

Fixing unit thermistor 1

Fixing unit thermistor 3

Fixing unit thermistor 2

Fixing unit thermistor 4

Heat roller

Press roller

Paper Exit Mechanism

After the image is fixed, the copy paper is transported to the copy tray by the exit rollers. There are 13separation claws (hot roller strippers) which help paper to separate from the heat roller.

1-3-46

Separation Claw

Upper Exit Roller

Lower Exit Roller

ELECTRICALSECTION

II

II El

ectri

cal S

ectio

n

1-1-11

340

CONTENTS

2-1 Electrical Parts Layout

2-1-1 Electrical parts layout .......................................................................... 2-1-1

340-3

2-1-1

2-1-1 Electrical parts layout

Figure 2-1-1 Printed circuit boards

8

11

152224

14

10

6

13

4

2

9 1

3

516

21 1819

7

12

17

20

Machine left Machine inside Machine right

Right frame Left frame

Machine rear

23

1. Main PCB (MPCB) ............................................. Output control for imageprocessing and LED printhead(LPH) and control of otherelectrical components.

2. ISU PCB (ISUPCB) ............................................ Digital conversion of data fromthe contact image sensor (CIS)and data correction.

340-3

2-1-2

3. LPHROM PCB (LPHROMPCB) ......................... Stores LPH light intensitycorrection data.

4. Operation unit PCB (OPCB) .............................. Consists of operation keys,display LEDs and LCD.

5. Servo motor control 1 PCB (DCM1PCB) ........... Drive control of the drive motor,drum motor and fixing drive motor.

6. Servo motor control 2 PCB (DCM2PCB) ........... Drive control of the original feedmotor and paper feed motor.

7. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ............................. Output of 24 V, 5 V DC and±12 V DC supplies.

8. LPH power supply PCB (LPHPSPCB) ............... Converts 24 V DC into 5 V DCand supplies 5 V DC to LPH.

9. Output PCB (OPPCB)........................................ Powers roll unit heaters,dehumidifier, fluorescent lampheater, pre-charging lamp andpost-transfer lamp, and distributes24 V DC supply to multipledestinations.

10. Drum potential sensor PCB (DPSPCB) ............. Detection of input to the drumpotential sensor.

11. Inverter PCB (INPCB) ........................................ Output of DC supply to thefluorescent lamp.

12. Backup PCB (BUPCB) ....................................... Stores various setting data.13. Main high-voltage transformer (MHVT) ............. Generates a high voltage for main

charging.14. ST high-voltage transformer (STHVT) ............... Generates a high voltage for

transfer and separation charging.15. Developing bias high-voltage transformer

(DBHVT) ............................................................ Generates a developing biasvoltage.

16. Solid state relay 1 (SSR1) ................................. Turns power supply to fixingheater M on and off.

17. Solid state relay 2 (SSR2) ................................. Turns power supply to fixingheater S on and off.

18. Power relay 1 (PRY1) ........................................ Turns AC power supply on andoff.

19. Power relay 2 (PRY2) ........................................ Turns 24 V DC supply on and off.20. Power relay 3 (PRY3) ........................................ Turns 24 V DC supply on and off.21. Noise filter (NF) .................................................. Reduces noise on the power

supply line.22. Dehumidifier PCB (DRPCB) .............................. Supplies 24 V DC to the

dehumidifiers.23.* Flicker resistor (FR) ........................................... Regulates surge current flowing

into the fixing heater M.24.* Solid state relay 3 (SSR3) ................................. Short-circuits the flicker resistor.

*For 230 V, 50 Hz models only.

340-3

2-1-3

1. Main switch (MSW) ............................................ Turns AC power supply to thepower source PCB on and off.

2. Safety switch 1 (SSW1) ..................................... Forms a safety circuit when theleft front cover is open.

3. Safety switch 2 (SSW2) ..................................... Forms a safety circuit when theright front cover is open.

4. Safety switch 3 (SSW3) ..................................... Forms a safety circuit when theright cover is open.

5. Safety switch 4 (SSW4) ..................................... Forms a safety circuit when themain unit is open.

6. Safety switch 5 (SSW5) ..................................... Forms a safety circuit when themain unit is open.

7

8

5

12 1096

2,3

1

4

47

40

48

49

41

42

39

18,27,28

17,25,26

11

16,23,24

37,38

13,4335,36

30,3114

4534,44

Machine left Machine inside Machine right

21,22

2946

33

19

20

32 15

Figure 2-1-2 Switches and sensors (1)

340-3

2-1-4

7. Safety switch 6 (SSW6) ..................................... Forms a safety circuit when theupper rear cover is open.

8. Original holding section switch (OHSW) ............ Detects that the original holdingsection is open.

9. Bypass timing switch (BYPTIMSW) ................... Control of bypass registrationclutch.

10. Bypass registration switch (BYPRSW) .............. Detection of leading edge ofpaper from the bypass table,control of paper feed motor andbypass registration clutch, anddetection of paper jams in thebypass feed section.

7

8

5

12 1096

2,3

1

4

47

40

48

49

41

42

39

18,27,28

17,25,26

11

16,23,24

37,38

13,4335,36

30,3114

4534,44

Machine left Machine inside Machine right

21,22

2946

33

19

20

32 15

Figure 2-1-3 Switches and sensors (2)

340

2-1-5

11. Registration switch (RSW) ................................. Control of paper feed motor, drivemotor, fixing drive motor, feedclutch, roll paper conveying clutchand registration clutch anddetection of paper jams.

12. Paper conveying switch (PCSW) ....................... Control of separation clawsolenoid and detection of paperjams.

13. Eject switch (ESW) ............................................ Control of drive motor, fixing drivemotor and fixing unit fan motor,and detection of paper jams.

14. Original trailing edge detection switch(OTDSW) ........................................................... Detection of document passage

timing, control of drive motor,fixing drive motor, paper feedmotor, paper feed clutch, rollpaper conveying clutch,registration clutch, bypassregistration clutch and cutterclutch, and detection of originaljams.

15. Original leading edge detection switch(OLDSW) ........................................................... Detection of original insertion and

control of original feed motor andoriginal feed clutch.

16. Upper roll paper leading edge detectionswitch (RLDSW-U) ............................................. Detection of paper leading edge

home position, control of upperfeed clutch and upper roll windingclutch, and detection of paperjams.

17. Middle roll paper leading edge detectionswitch (RLDSW-M) ............................................ Detection of paper leading edge

home position, control of middlefeed clutch and middle rollwinding clutch, and detection ofpaper jams.

18. Lower roll paper leading edge detectionswitch (RLDSW-L)*1 .......................................................... Detection of paper leading edge

home position, control of lowerfeed clutch and lower roll windingclutch, and detection of paperjams.

19. Cutter home position switch 1 (CHPSW1) ......... Detection of cutter home position.20. Cutter home position switch 2 (CHPSW2) ......... Detection of cutter home position.21. Original size switch 1 (OSSW1) ......................... Detection of original size.22. Original size switch 2 (OSSW2) ......................... Detection of original size.

*1 Optional.

340-3

2-1-6

23. Upper paper size switch 1 (PSSW1-U) .............. Detection of paper size in the 1stroller unit.

24. Upper paper size switch 2 (PSSW2-U) .............. Detection of paper size in the 1stroller unit.

25. Middle paper size switch 1 (PSSW1-M) ............ Detection of paper size in the 2ndroller unit.

26. Middle paper size switch 2 (PSSW2-M) ............ Detection of paper size in the 2ndroller unit.

27. Lower paper size switch 1 (PSSW1-L)*1 ................. Detection of paper size in the 3rdroller unit.

7

8

5

12 1096

2,3

1

4

47

40

48

49

41

42

39

18,27,28

17,25,26

11

16,23,24

37,38

13,4335,36

30,3114

4534,44

Machine left Machine inside Machine right

21,22

2946

33

19

20

32 15

Figure 2-1-4 Switches and sensors (3)

*1 Optional.

340-3

2-1-7

28. Lower paper size switch 2 (PSSW2-L)*1 ................. Detection of paper size in the 3rdroller unit.

29. Waste toner tank detection switch(TDTDSW) ......................................................... Detects presence of the waste

toner tank.30. Fixing unit thermal switch 1 (FTSW1) ................ Forms the fixing heater M and S

safety circuits.31. Fixing unit thermal switch 2 (FTSW2) ................ Forms the fixing heater M and S

safety circuits.32. Fluorescent lamp thermistor (FLTH) .................. Detection of temperature in

vicinity of fluorescent lamp.33. Dehumidifier switch (DRSW) ............................. Turns AC power supply to the

dehumidifier PCB on and off.34. Developing unit thermistor (DTH) ...................... Detection of temperature in

vicinity of developing unit.35. Fixing unit thermistor 1 (FTH1) .......................... Detection of temperature of heat

roller at the center.36. Fixing unit thermistor 2 (FTH2) .......................... Detection of temperature of heat

roller at right end.37. Fixing unit thermistor 3 (FTH3) .......................... Detection of temperature of press

roller at the center.38. Fixing unit thermistor 4 (FTH4) .......................... Detection of temperature of press

roller at right end.39. External temperature thermistor (ETTH) ........... Detection of external (ambient)

temperature.40. Upper pulse sensor (PS-U) ................................ Detection of paper-out or paper

jam on 1st roller unit.41. Middle pulse sensor (PS-M) .............................. Detection of paper-out or paper

jam on 2nd roll unit.42. Lower pulse sensor (PS-L)*1 ......................................... Detection of paper-out or paper

jam on 3rd roller unit (option).43. Fixing unit pulse sensor (FPS) ........................... Detection of paper jam in fixing

unit.44. Toner sensor (TNS) ........................................... Detection of toner density in

developing unit.45. Drum potential sensor (DPS) ............................. Detection of drum surface

potential.46. Overflow sensor (OFS) ...................................... Detection of overflow of toner

collected in the waste toner tank.47. Upper roll heater switch (RHSW-U)*2 ....................... Upper roller unit heater in use/not

in use.48. Middle roll heater switch (RHSW-M)*2 ..................... Middle roll unit heater in use/not in

use.49. Lower roll heater switch (RHSW-L)*1 ........................ Lower roll unit heater in use/not in

use.

*1 Optional.*2 Optional for 220 – 240 V models.

340-1

2-1-8

3

1

4

11,12

2

8

5

6

7

9,10

Machine left Machine inside Machine right

Figure 2-1-5 Motors

340

2-1-9

1. Drive motor (DM) ............................................... Drives developing unit andtransfer unit.

2. Original feed motor (OFM) ................................. Drives original feed unit.3. Paper feed motor (PFM) .................................... Drives paper feed unit.4. Fixing drive motor (FDM) ................................... Drives fixing unit.5. Drum motor (DRM) ............................................ Drives the drum section.6. Toner feed motor (TM) ....................................... Supplies of toner.7. Paper conveying fan motor (PCFM) .................. Assistance of paper conveying,

and heat exhaust.8. Cooling fan motor (CFM) ................................... Heat exhaust from unit interior.9. LPH fan motor 1 (LPHFM1) ............................... Cools LED printhead (LPH).

10. LPH fan motor 2 (LPHFM2) ............................... Cools LED printhead (LPH).11. Right fixing unit fan motor (FFM-R) ................... Heat exhaust in fixing unit.12. Left fixing unit fan motor (FFM-L) ...................... Heat exhaust in fixing unit.

340-1

2-1-10

25

7

48 22

5

23

6

24

10

9

3

2

2719

2617

12,13

11

114,18 15

16

20,21

Machine left Machine inside Machine right

Figure 2-1-6 Others

1. Original feed clutch (OFCL) ............................... Original feed (control of originalfeed roller rotation).

2. Registration clutch (RCL) ................................... Secondary feed of paper fed fromroll unit (control of registrationroller rotation).

3. Roll paper conveying clutch (RPCCL) ............... Conveying paper fed from roll unit(rotation control of front roll paperconveying roller).

4. Upper roll winding clutch (RWCL-U) .................. Winding of paper roll (control of1st roll unit paper roll shaftrotation).

340

2-1-11

5. Middle roll winding clutch (RWCL-M)................. Winding of paper roll (control of2nd roll unit paper roll shaftrotation).

6. Lower roll winding clutch (RWCL-L)*1 ...................... Winding of paper roll (control of3rd roll unit paper roll shaftrotation).

7. Bypass registration clutch (BYPRCL) ................ Secondary paper feed duringmanual insertion (control ofbypass registration roller rotation).

8. Upper feed clutch (FCL-U) ................................. Primary paper roll feed from 1stroll unit (control of roll paper feedlower roller A rotation).

9. Middle feed clutch (FCL-M) ............................... Primary paper roll feed from 2ndroll unit (control of roll paperconveying rear roller B rotation).

10. Lower feed clutch (FCL-L)*1 .......................................... Primary paper feed from 3rd rollunit (option) (control of roll paperconveying rear roller B rotation).

11. Cutter clutch (CCL) ............................................ Cutter operation.12. Cleaning solenoid (CSOL) ................................. Cleaning blade operation.13. Separation claw solenoid (SSOL) ...................... Operation of separation claws.14. Fluorescent lamp (FL) ........................................ Exposues of original.15. Contact image sensor (CIS) .............................. Converts original data into analog

signal and outputs it.16. LED printhead (LPH) ......................................... Forms an image using the data

from the original on drum surfacevia LED illumination.

17. Ready lamp (R-Lamp) ....................................... Indicates that copying is possible.18. Fluorescent lamp heater (FLH) .......................... Maintains temperature of

fluorescent lamp.19. Dehumidifier (DH) .............................................. Prevents condensation on drum.20. Fixing heater M (H1) .......................................... Heats the center of the heat roller.21. Fixing heater S (H2) ........................................... Heats both ends of the heat roller.22. Upper roll unit heater (RH-U)*2 .................................... Dehumidifies paper in 1st roll unit.23. Middle roll unit heater (RH-M)*2 ................................... Dehumidifies paper in 2nd roll

unit.24. Lower roll unit heater (RH-L)*1 ..................................... Dehumidifies paper in 3rd roll unit

(optional).25. Total counter (TC) .............................................. Displays number of copies.26. Pre-charging lamp (PCHL) ................................ Improves evenness of charging

(main charging).27. Post-transfer lamp (RTL) ................................... Removes residual charge on

drum.

*1 Optional.*2 Optional for 220 – 240 V models.

1-1-13

340

CONTENTS

2-2 Detection of Paper Misfeed

2-2-1 Paper misfeed detection ..................................................................... 2-2-12-2-2 Paper misfeed detection conditions .................................................... 2-2-2

340

2-2-1

2-2-1 Paper misfeed detection

When a paper jam occurs, the copier immediately stops copying and the display on theoperation unit shows a code consisting of “J” followed by a number between 01 and 06,indicating the location of the jam.Paper jam counts sorted by the detecting conditions can be checked by simulation 74.To remove paper jammed in the copier, open the front covers and take out a roll unit, or openthe main unit, fixing unit, or original holding section.To reset the paper misfeed detection, open and close the front covers, main unit, right cover,upper rear cover or original holding section to turn safety switches 1 & 2, 4 & 5, 3, 6 or theoriginal holding section switch off and on, respectively.

Metric

Inch

J-01: paper feed section (1st roll unit)J-02: paper feed section (2nd roll unit)J-03: paper feed section (3rd roll unit*1)J-04: paper feed section (bypass paper feed section)J-05: original feed sectionJ-06: inside the copier main unit

*1 Optional.

Figure 2-2-1 Misfeed indication

PAPER MISFEED OPEN FRONT COVERS.

J-02

Paper jam Open front covers

J-02

340-1

2-2-2

2-2-2 Paper misfeed detection conditions

Figure 2-2-2 Misfeed detection

OLDSWOFCL

PCSW BYPRSW

BYPRCL

RCLRSW

FCL-M

FCL-L

OTDSW

ESW FPS

CCL

FCL-U

340

2-2-3

FCL-U

RSW 2720 ms

On

Off

On

Off

1. Paper jam in the paper feed section (1st roll unit): J-01When the new paper roll is wound up (first paper feed), the registration switch (RSW)does not turn on within 2720 ms after the upper feed clutch (FCL-U) has turned on.

Timing chart 2-2-1

When the paper roll need not be wound up (from the second sheet), the registrationswitch (RSW) does not turn on within 936 ms after the upper feed clutch (FCL-U) hasturned on.

Timing chart 2-2-2

2. Paper jam in the paper feed section (2nd roll unit): J-02When the new paper roll is wound up (first paper feed), the registration switch (RSW)does not turn on within 3632 ms after the middle feed clutch (FCL-M) has turned on.

Timing chart 2-2-3

When the paper roll need not be wound up (from the second sheet), the registrationswitch (RSW) does not turn on within 936 ms after the middle feed clutch (FCL-M) hasturned on.

Timing chart 2-2-4

FCL-U

RSW 936 ms

On

Off

On

Off

FCL-M

RSW 3632 ms

On

Off

On

Off

FCL-M

RSW 936 ms

On

Off

On

Off

340

2-2-4

3. Paper jam in the paper feed section (3rd roll unit): J-03When the new paper roll is wound up (first paper feed), the registration switch (RSW)does not turn on within 6380 ms after the lower feed clutch (FCL-L) has turned on.

Timing chart 2-2-5

When the paper roll need not be wound up (from the second sheet), the registrationswitch (RSW) does not turn on within 936 ms after the lower feed clutch (FCL-L) hasturned on.

Timing chart 2-2-6

4. Paper jam in the paper feed section (bypass paper feed section): J-04The bypass registration switch (BYPRSW) is on when the main switch (MSW) is turnedon or during ready mode.

FCL-L

RSW 6380 ms

On

Off

On

Off

FCL-L

RSW 936 ms

On

Off

On

Off

340

2-2-5

5. Paper jam in the original feed section: J-05The original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW) does not turn on within 3 s after theoriginal feed motor (OFM) has turned on to start original feed.The original leading edge detection switch (OLDSW) stays off 1 s after the originaltrailing edge detection switch (OTDSW) has turned on.

Timing chart 2-2-7

The original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW) stays off when the original feedclutch (OFCL) turns on during original read-in control.The original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW) does not turn off within 3500 msafter the original leading edge detection switch (OLDSW) has turned off during originalread-in control.

Timing chart 2-2-8

The original leading edge and trailing edge detection switches (OLDSW and OTDSW)are off 2500 ms after the original feed motor (OFM) has started to reverse during originalread-in control.

Timing chart 2-2-9

The original trailing edge detection switch (OTDSW) is on when the job stop/roll cut keyis pressed.

OTDSW

OFM 640 ms

On

Off

On

Off

OLDSW

3 s

1 sOff

On

OTDSW

OFCL

3500 ms

On

Off

On

Off

OLDSW

Off

On

OTDSW

OFM

2500 ms

On

Off

Reverse

Forward

OLDSW

Off

On

340-1

2-2-6

6. Paper jam inside the copier main unit: J-06The registration switch (RSW), paper conveying switch (PCSW) or eject switch (ESW)is on when the main switch (MSW) is turned on or during ready mode.The paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn on within 3392 ms after theregistration clutch (RCL) has turned on.

Timing chart 2-2-10

The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3752 ms after the paper conveying switch(PCSW) has turned on.

Timing chart 2-2-11

The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 2240 ms after the cutter clutch(CCL) has turned on.

Timing chart 2-2-12

RCL

PCSW 3392 ms

On

Off

On

Off

PCSW

ESW 3752 ms

On

Off

On

Off

CCL

RSW 2240 ms

On

Off

On

Off

340

2-2-7

The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within 8s after the registration clutch (RCL) hasturned off.

Timing chart 2-2-13

No pulse signal is detected from the fixing unit pulse sensor (FPS) for 1 s while the ejectswitch (ESW) is on.

Timing chart 2-2-14

RCL

ESW 8 s

On

Off

On

Off

ESW

FPS

On

Off

On

Off

Pulse detection time

1-1-15

340

CONTENTS

2-3 Operation of the PCBs

2-3-1 Power source PCB .............................................................................. 2-3-1(1) Noise filter circuit ......................................................................... 2-3-2(2) Rectification/surge limiter/smoothing circuit ................................ 2-3-2(3) Pulse width control circuit ............................................................ 2-3-3(4) 24 V DC output/error detection circuit ......................................... 2-3-4(5) 5 V DC output/5 V DC over-current protection circuit .................. 2-3-5(6) Over-voltage protection circuit ..................................................... 2-3-6

2-3-2 LPH power supply PCB ...................................................................... 2-3-7(1) Noise filter circuit ......................................................................... 2-3-7(2) Pulse width control circuit ............................................................ 2-3-8(3) 5 V DC output/error detection circuit ........................................... 2-3-9

2-3-3 Servo motor control 1 PCB ............................................................... 2-3-10(1) Drive motor control circuit .......................................................... 2-3-10(2) Fixing drive motor control circuit ................................................ 2-3-11(3) Drum motor control circuit ......................................................... 2-3-12

2-3-4 Servo motor control 2 PCB ............................................................... 2-3-13(1) Original feed motor control circuit .............................................. 2-3-14(2) Paper feed motor control circuit ................................................ 2-3-15(3) Reset circuit ............................................................................... 2-3-15

2-3-5 Main PCB .......................................................................................... 2-3-16(1) Fixing temperature error detection circuit .................................. 2-3-17(2) Reset circuit ............................................................................... 2-3-18(3) Image processing unit ............................................................... 2-3-20

2-3-6 Backup PCB ...................................................................................... 2-3-252-3-7 ISU PCB............................................................................................ 2-3-26

(1) Analog processing unit .............................................................. 2-3-27(2) A-D conversion/AGC processing unit ........................................ 2-3-28(3) Shading correction circuit .......................................................... 2-3-28

2-3-8 Operation unit PCB ........................................................................... 2-3-292-3-9 Inverter PCB ..................................................................................... 2-3-30

340

2-3-1

2-3-1 Power source PCB

Noise filter

circuit

Rectification/ surge limiter/

smoothing circuit

FET

Photocoupler

Photocoupler

Pulse width control/ over-current

protection circuit

24 V DC output circuit

Over-voltage detection circuit

Error detection circuit

AC input Transformer

24 V DC output

5 V DC output circuit

GND

GND

+12 V DC

–12 V DC

5 V DC output

±12 V DC output circuit

Figure 2-3-1 Power source PCB block diagram

The main components of the power source PCB are the noise filter circuit, rectification/surge limiter/smoothing circuit, pulse width control circuit, 24 V DC output circuit, 5 V DCoutput circuit, ±12 V DC output circuit and over-voltage and over-current protection circuits.The power source PCB generates stable 24 V DC, ±12 V DC and 5 V DC from the AC powersource.

340

2-3-2

(1) Noise filter circuit

F1

L1 L2 L3

SQ1

SQ2 SQ3

C1

C2

C5

C3

R1

C4

Figure 2-3-2 Noise filter circuit

The noise filter circuit consists of coils L1, L2 and L3 and capacitors C1, C2, C3, C4 and C5.It prevents high-frequency noise from escaping to the outside through the AC input line. Italso prevents noise from external devices from entering this copier through the AC inputline.

(2) Rectification/surge limiter/smoothing circuit

CR1

C7 R4 D2

R2

AC

AC

D1

L4

C8

T1 1/3

Figure 2-3-3 Rectification/surge limiter/smoothing circuit

The input AC power source is full-wave-rectified by diode bridge D1 on the rectificationcircuit and smoothed by smoothing capacitor C8 to be converted into the DC power sourcefor the switching circuit. Between the rectification and smoothing circuits, there is a surgelimiter circuit to prevent a surge current from damaging the components on the circuit whenthe AC power is switched on; R2 is connected in series between the noise filter andrectification circuits to limit a surge.

340

2-3-3

(3) Pulse width control circuit

U2

3 2 7 5 4

C15D6

T1 2/3

C16

C17

R23

Q4R18

R19 Q3

D7

R17

C14

TP2

R20 R21

R22

C21T1 3/3

D10

+

TP1DCIN+

DCIN–

10 9 8 1

Z9 2/2

Figure 2-3-4 Pulse width control circuit

In the pulse width control circuit, FETs Q3 and Q4 are switched on and off by the pulsesignals from the pulse width control IC U2. The current flowing into the primary side coil oftransformer T from the smoothing circuit is switched, and an e.m.f. is generated in thesecondary coil. U2 changes the duty ratio for the pulse signals switching the FETs on andoff to control the voltage output to the secondary side.When the secondary side output voltage becomes too large, shunt regulator Z6 in the errordetection circuit of the 24 V DC output circuit conducts and photocoupler Z9 turns on. Thesignal from this photocoupler is fed back to U2 which reduces the duty cycle of the pulsesignals, so reducing the output voltage.

340

2-3-4

(4) 24 V DC output/error detection circuit

L11L9

D13

R49

C34

C33 D16

C32C31R48

L8

R46 C27 C28

C29

C30

R47L10

L7

D12

L6

Z9 1/2 R50

L12

R51

R52D14

R53 D15

RV2

L13+

C39

NC

GND

R59C38R57

R55

Z6

C35 R54 +

+

C36

R56

+24 V

+24 V+24 V

GND

+24 V

+24 V

+24 V+24 V+24 V

GNDGNDGND

GND

GNDGND

GND

T1

CN2-1CN2-2CN2-3CN2-4

CN3-1CN3-2CN3-3CN3-4

CN3-5CN3-6CN3-7

CN4-1CN4-2CN4-3CN4-4

CN4-5CN4-6CN4-7

CN3-8CN3-9

U2

Z9 2/2

5 3 2 7 5 4

10 9 8 1

Figure 2-3-5 24 V DC output/error detection circuit

In the 24 V DC output circuit, the voltage generated in the secondary coil of the transformeris rectified by diodes D12 and D13, smoothed by choke coils L10 and L11 and capacitorsC38 and C39, and is output as 24 V DC.The CR elements of the rectification circuit (C27, C28, R46, C29, C30, R47) and (R48, C31,C32, R49, C33, C34) form a CR snapper circuit and absorb a rectification voltage surge.Chokes L6, L7, L8 and L9 connected in series with the diodes form a magnetic spanner andabsorb a rectification current surge. These components reduce the high-frequencyrectification noise.In the error detection circuit, a voltage fluctuation in the 24 V DC output is detected by shuntregulator Z6 and the voltage fluctuation is isolated with photocoupler Z9 and fed back to U2of the pulse width control circuit.

340

2-3-5

(5) 5 V DC output/5 V DC over-current protection circuit

D20

+ +

U3

1 2 3 4 5

6

7

+

R63C43

C41

C42

R60D17

C40C37

L14

R61

Q5L15

R62L13

+5.1 V

+5.1 V

+5.1 V+5.1 V+5.1 V

+5.1 V+5.1 V

+5.1 VGND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

CN5-1CN5-2CN5-3CN5-4

CN5-5CN5-6CN5-7

CN6-1CN6-2CN6-3CN6-4

CN6-5CN6-6CN6-7CN6-8

CN5-8

24 V DC

Figure 2-3-6 5 V DC output/5 V DC over-current protection circuit

The 5 V DC output circuit reduces the smoothed 24 V DC from the 24 V DC output circuitto 5 V DC.The current for the output from the 24 V DC output circuit is stabilized by choke coil L13 andsmoothing capacitors C37 and C40, and is fed to the 5 V DC output circuit. In the 5 V DCoutput circuit, FET Q5 is switched on and off by switching regulator IC U3 so that the outputvoltage becomes 5 V DC. This output voltage is smoothed by choke coil L15 and smoothingcapacitor C43 and is output. U3 also monitors the voltage drop generated across resistorR62 by the current flowing in the 5 V DC output circuit. If the current is too high and thevoltage drop across R62 becomes too large, U3 cuts off the 5 V DC output to protect thepower source PCB.

340

2-3-6

(6) Over-voltage protection circuit

+-

+-

+-

+-

R88R87R86

R83 R84R85 C50 Z12

3/4

Z12 4/4

C52

R89

UV UV

UV UV

R74

R70

R75

C49

Z12 1/4

Z12 2/4

R82

R81 R80

Z11

C51

+R72 R73

D28

R71

R68

R67

R69

D27

Z10 1/2 R76

C53R77 R78

R79

+

C48

D33

+5 V+24 V

D32D31D30D29D26D25

+

C47D23

Z8

Z7

D21

R65

D24+

C46R66L17

D19

D18D20

+

L16 C44 R64 D22 C45

+

+12 V

–12 VGND

C54

U2

R45

Z10 2/2

5 3 2 7 5 4

10 9 8 1

CN7-1CN7-2CN7-3

Figure 2-3-7 Over-voltage protection circuit

24 V DC, 5 V DC and ±12 V DC from the respective output circuits are applied to comparatorZ12. When any output voltage increases to exceed the reference voltage at Z12, photocouplerZ10 turns on, which causes U2 of the pulse width control circuit to turn the FETs off to protectthe circuit from over-voltage.

340

2-3-7

2-3-2 LPH power supply PCB

Noise filter

circuit

FET

Photocoupler

Photocoupler

Pulse width control/ over-current

protection circuit

5 V DC output circuit

Over-voltage detection circuit

Error detection circuit

Transformer 5 V DC output

GND

24 V DC

GND

Figure 2-3-8 LPH power supply PCB block diagram

The LPH power supply PCB consists of noise filter, pulse width control, 5 V DC output, over-voltage and over-current protection circuits and generates stable 5 V DC.

.(1) Noise filter circuit

1

2

3

+

NC

-

CN-AD1 F1

C1

L1

Figure 2-3-9 Noise filter circuit

The noise filter circuit consists of coil L1 and capacitors C1 and C2. It prevents high-frequency noise from escaping to the outside through the AC line. It also prevents noise fromexternal devices from entering this copier through the AC input line.

340

2-3-8

(2) Pulse width control circuit

P4

D2

D3

T1 2/3

C5

DCIN+

DCIN–

C9

C8

R2

R3

P3

R4 R6

R5

R7

Q1

+ +

D4

D5

D8

R9

R10

R15

R16

R17

D7 D6C10 R12

Z3 2/2C11

C12

+

C14

R14

C13R13

Z2 2/2

Z18

1 2 3 4

7 6 5

R11

P1

P2

T1 3/3

C6

R8

C7

T1 1/3

Figure 2-3-10 Pulse width control circuit

In the pulse width control circuit, FET Q1 is switched on and off by the pulse signals fromthe pulse width control IC Z1. The current flowing into the primary side coil of transformerT from the smoothing circuit is switched, and an e.m.f. is generated in the secondary coil.Z1 changes the duty ratio for the pulse signals switching the FET on and off to control thevoltage output to the secondary side.When the secondary side output voltage becomes too large, shunt regulator Z4 in the errordetection circuit on the 5 V DC output circuit conducts and photocoupler Z2 turns on. Thesignal from this photocoupler is fed back to Z1 which reduces the duty cycle of the pulsesignals, so reducing the output voltage.

340

2-3-9

(3) 5 V DC output/error detection circuit

R25R23

R22

C23

R30R28R24

S1

L3

D9

L4

R19

C18 C19

C17

R18 C15 C16

+

C20 C21R20

+ +

L2

Z2 1/2

Z4

R21

RV1

C22

R26

R32

D10

TS1

Z3 1/2

R31R27

Z5

R29

C24

L5

C25

+

CN-B

1234

5678

+5 V

GND

Figure 2-3-11 5 V DC output/error detection circuit

The 5 V DC output circuit rectifies the voltage generated on the transformer secondary coilusing diode D9, smoothes it using choke coil L2 and capacitors C19 and C20 and outputsit as 5 V DC.The CR elements of the rectification circuit (C15, C16, R18, C17, C18, R19) form a CRsnapper circuit and absorb a rectification voltage surge. Chokes L3 and L4 connected inseries with the diode form a magnetic spanner and absorb a rectification current surge.These components reduce the high-frequency rectification noise.In the error detection circuit, a voltage fluctuation in the 5 V DC output is detected by shuntregulator Z4 and the voltage fluctuation is isolated with photocoupler Z2 and fed back to Z1of the pulse width control circuit.

340

2-3-10

2-3-3 Servo motor control 1 PCB

Servo motor control 1 PCB consists of drive motor control circuit, fixing drive motor controlcircuit and drum motor control circuit, all independent from each other.

(1) Drive motor control circuitThe drive motor control circuit is composed of the components as shown in Figure 2-3-12to control the rotation of the drive motor.

CN3- 1 CN1 - 1

CN3 - 2

CN1 - 3

CN1 - 4

CN1 - 2

DM REM

DM CLK

DM FG

DM FG

Q1

24 V24 V

0 V

IC1

DM

1

Figure 2-3-12 Drive motor control circuit

• Signal functionsDM CLK signal (CN3-2): input signalClock pulse which is the reference signal for drive motor control. Output from the main PCB.DM REM signal (CN3-1): input signalWhen low, the drive motor (DM) is on.DM FG signal (CN1-3), (CN1-4): input signalsOutput from the pulse generator in the drive motor, and indicates the speed of the motor.

• Drive motor controlIC1 in Figure 2-3-12 compares the DM CLK signal output from the main PCB with thefrequency of the DM FG signals output from the drive motor, and outputs signal 1.If the speed of the drive motor is too high, the frequency of DM FG is higher than that of DMCLK, and the pulse width of signal 1 decreases. The width of the 0 V DC signal output fromCN1-2 decreases, and the speed of the drive motor drops. If the speed of the drive motoris too low, the frequency of DM FG is less than DM CLK, and the pulse width of signal 1increases. The width of the 0 V DC signal output from CN1-2 increases, and the speed ofthe drive motor increases. This keeps the motor speed constant as the machine load varies.

340

2-3-11

(2) Fixing drive motor control circuitThe fixing drive motor control circuit is composed of the components as shown in Figure2-3-13 to control the rotation of the fixing drive motor.

CN3- 3 CN5 - 1

CN3 - 4

CN5 - 3

CN5 - 4

CN5 - 2

FDM REM

FDM CLK

FDM FG

FDM FG

Q3

24 V24 V

0 V

IC3

FDM

1

Figure 2-3-13 Fixing drive motor control circuit

• Signal functionsFDM CLK signal (CN3-4): input signalClock pulse which is the reference signal for drive motor control. Output from the main PCB.FDM REM signal (CN3-3): input signalWhen low, the fixing drive motor (FDM) is on.FDM FG signal (CN5-3), (CN5-4): input signalsOutput from the pulse generator in the fixing drive motor, and indicates the speed of themotor.

• Fixing drive motor controlIC3 in Figure 2-3-13 compares the FDM CLK signal output from the main PCB with thefrequency of the FDM FG signals output from the fixing drive motor, and outputs signal 1.If the speed of the fixing drive motor is too high, the frequency of FDM FG is higher than thatof FDM CLK, and the pulse width of signal 1 decreases. The width of the 0 V DC signaloutput from CN5-2 decreases, and the speed of the fixing drive motor drops. If the speedof the fixing drive motor is too low, the frequency of FDM FG is less than that of FDM CLK,and the pulse width of signal 1 increases. The width of the 0 V DC signal output from CN5-2increases, and the speed of the fixing drive motor increases. This keeps the motor speedconstant as the machine load varies.

340

2-3-12

(3) Drum motor control circuitThe drum motor control circuit is composed of the components as shown in Figure 2-3-14to control the rotation of the drum motor.

CN3- 5 CN4 - 1

CN3 - 6

CN4 - 3

CN4 - 4

CN4 - 2

DRM REM

DRM CLK

DRM FG

DRM FG

Q2

24 V24 V

0 V

IC2

DRM

1

Figure 2-3-14 Drum motor control circuit

• Signal functionsDRM CLK signal (CN3-6): input signalClock pulse which is the reference signal for drive motor control. Output from the main PCB.DRM REM signal (CN3-5): input signalWhen low, the drum motor (DRM) is on.DRM FG signal (CN4-3), (CN4-4): input signalsOutput from the pulse generator in the drum motor, and indicates the speed of the motor.

• Drum motor controlIC2 in Figure 2-3-14 compares the DRM CLK signal output from the main PCB with thefrequency of the DRM FG signals output from the drum motor, and outputs signal 1.If the speed of the drum motor is too high, the frequency of DRM FG is higher than that ofDRM CLK, and the pulse width of signal 1 decreases. The width of the 0 V DC signal outputfrom CN4-2 decreases, and the speed of the drum motor drops. If the speed of the drummotor is too low, the frequency of DRM FG is less than that of DRM CLK, and the pulse widthof signal 1 increases. The width of the 0 V DC signal output from CN4-2 increases, andthe speed of the drum motor increases. This keeps the motor speed constant as themachine load varies.

340

2-3-13

2-3-4 Servo motor control 2 PCB

Servo motor control 2 PCB communicates serially with the main PCB. It receives commandsfrom the main PCB at input terminal DCM2PCB RXD and emits data at output terminalDCM2PCB TXD.

Main PCB (MPCB)

DCM2PCB RXD

DCM2PCB TXD

Servo motor control 2 PCB (DCM2PCB)

DCM2PCB RXD: signal from main PCB to servo motor control 2 PCB DCM2PCB TXD: signal from servo motor control 2 PCB to main PCB

Figure 2-3-15 Communication between servo motor control 2 PCB andmain PCB

Servo motor control 2 PCB consists of a CPU, external memory (ROM) and an addresslatch. The CPU and ROM are connected by the address bus used to read in data and thedata bus used to transfer data from outside the PCB to the CPU. The arrows in Figure 2-3-16show signal flow.The CPU processes input signals in accordance with the program in ROM and outputscontrol signals.

Output InputCPU IC8

ROM IC14

Address latch IC6

Figure 2-3-16 Servo motor control 2 PCB block diagram

340

2-3-14

(1) Original feed motor control circuitThe original feed motor control circuit consists of CPU IC8 and four FETs. The FETs turnon to operate the original feed motor in response to the on/off signal (PWM0/P34) and thedirection signals (OFM F ON and OFM R ON). The original feed motor turns in the normaldirection to move an original into the direction of exposure. The signals control motor actionas shown below.

CPU signals

OFM F ON OFM R ON PWM0/P34Motor action

H H

L H

H L

H, L Stops.

H Stops.

Turns in normal direction. Current flows from OFM+ to OFM–.

Stops.

Reverses.Current flows from OFM– to OFM+.

L

H

L

s

s

s ss

s

s

+–

+–

+–

s

CN4-1

CN4-2

OFM +

OFM –

R5

OFM ON

OFM ON

1 2

R84

R83

2 1

3

21

1 1

5 6

71

1

22

S G

R85

R86

R712

1

1

1 1

1

1

1

2

2 2

2

2

2

10 9

9

99

R72R70

8

R69

R82

3 4

IC12

IC15

IC15

IC15

IC15

2

2 215

IC5

76

5

3

3

3

33

3

14

4 13

R65

P G

P GP G

P G P G P GP G

1 122

R64

5 12

1

1

1

1

1

11

12

2

22

1

1

1

11

11

1

2

2

2

22

2

2

22

2

2

22

21

2

2

1

11

1 1

11

1

1

1

11

1

1

11

1

11

22

22

22

22

22

22

2

2

22

2

2R

3R

52

C

R50

R51

D11

D10

D D

FT3

D9

D8

D7

D6

D4

R2

DA

2DA

2

DA

3 DA

33

R6

C

FT5

SS

D17

D18

D19

R56

R55

R54

D27

D13

D20

D14

D15

FT4

R4

D26

D12

R53

C2

S G

24 V

R57

DD

G

PWM0/P34

IC8

FT2

D16

Figure 2-3-17 Original feed motor circuit

340

2-3-15

(2) Paper feed motor control circuitThe paper feed motor control circuit consists of CPU IC8 and an FET. When signal PWM1/P35 goes low, the FET turns on to drive the motor. When high, the FET turns off and themotor stops.When the PFM ON signal from the main PCB goes low, the paper feed motor is forced toturn.

CN3-1

CN3-2

P GP GP G

P G

P G

P G

G

CN2-8

S

SS

S

PFM +

PFM –

24 V

+

-

+2

2

2

22

2

2

22

2

2

2

2

2

22

2

2

2

C501

1

2211

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

11

1

1

1

11

1

1

1

3

3

3

3

DA1

DA1

FT1

R37

C1

D

S

R1

D1

D2

D3

D28

R38

R39

R40

IC5 R66 R67

IC15

164

R73

5 6

IC1

S GC21

2121 R35R25

R15

PFM ENA

PWM1/P35

IC8 R68

C51

C52

R32

Figure 2-3-18 Paper feed motor control circuit

(3) Reset circuitWhen reset signal (DCM2PCB RESET) from the main PCB goes low, or when IC3 detectsan abnormal 5 V supply, this circuit resets the CPU to prevent it from malfunctioning oraccepting invalid inputs.

s

s

CN2-5DCM2PCB RESET

1 2R12

1

1

12 2

2

R23 R339 8

IC2

5

4

6

1

2IC7IC7

3RESET

10 11 12 13

IC2 IC2

D21

R412

2

2

2

22

11

1

1

1

S G S G

R43

R42

2.2u

IC3

S GC3

3

+

+

3V cc

Out

GND

Figure 2-3-19 Reset circuit

340

2-3-16

2-3-5 Main PCB

MPCB

Switches

Clutches

Motors

High-voltage transformers

Fluorescent lamp

Original feed motor CPU

ISU PCB

Commu- nication

Commu- nication

ISU PCB

ASIC IC41

ROM

IC 83

RAM

IC 74IC 84IC 93

CPU

IC 111 IC 102

IC110 IC22

Battery backup circuit

RESETReset circuit IC118

ASIC

Operation unit

Roll paper feed switches

LED printhead

LPHROM PCB

Image processing unit

Sensors

Analog signals

Figure 2-3-20 Main PCB block diagram

This circuit centers on the CPU (IC111) and includes the ROM and RAM, I/O control, analoginput/output, output buffer and signal level conversion, reset, communication control andimage processing unit circuits.The CPU controls the entire system based on the data written into the SRAM (IC74, 84)according to the control program in the ROM (IC83, 93). Driving of external electrical partsand input of signals from them are handled by the CPU I/O ports or via the I/O ASICs (IC41,102) connected to the CPU through the address bus and data bus. The CPU also controlsthe digital processor for the image processing unit.

340

2-3-17

(1) Fixing temperature error detection circuit

SG

R84

R85

R81

R159

C27 C26

C38R82 R87

R83

IC 3–

+

S

S

CN2-5

CN2-3

21

6 2 1 7

IC1A

IC20 IC20

1IC111

CPU

FTH1

GND

SG

R455

R454

R382

R383

TR3

SG

DI31S

CN4-17B

CN4-17ACN4-16B

R456

R457

R458S

33

2 12

TR2

MSW

SSW 3,4,5,6

24 V to PRY 1,2

5 V DC

5 V DC

5 V DC

5 V DCDI32

ASIC

IC41

41

42

R453

IC332Z-1

IC22

-26

Figure 2-3-21 Fixing temperature error detection circuit

The voltage from fixing thermistor 1 FTH1, which changes with the temperature, is input toterminal 1 of CPU IC111 and converted from analog to digital. This data is compared withthe conditions for displaying a service call C641 to determine if there is a fixing temperatureerror.The voltage from FTH1 is input to the inverting input terminal of comparator IC3. Thereference voltage formed by dividing 5 V DC across resistors R85 and R87 is input to thenon-inverting input terminal. Normally, the voltage input from fixing unit thermistor 1 ishigher than the reference voltage, so the IC3 output voltage is low. When the temperatureof the fixing section is abnormally high, the voltage from FTH1 drops below the referencevoltage, so the voltage at the output of IC3 goes high. This high level voltage passes througha 2-stage Schmitt trigger IC20 to be shaped. The output from IC20 is input to terminal 2 ofNAND gate IC1A.The main switch on signal (low level) is constantly input to terminal 2 of the NAND gate andwhen pin 3 goes high, the high-level voltage is output at terminal 1. This output voltage isconverted to 24 V DC by driver IC TR3 and input to the base of power relay drive transistorTR2 to force TR2 off. When TR2 turns off, power feed to the power relays PRY1, 2 is cutto turn them off.

340

2-3-18

(2) Reset circuit

SG

WD

TC

ADJVCC

NC

_RES2

_RES1

GND

SG SG

1 2 3 4

S

+

S

S1

2

4

8

7

6

5

3

R362

R361

C137

C136

IC119 IC119

CP93

IC118 5 V DC

5 V DC

5 V DC

2IC102

ASIC

2

70

IC41

ASIC

28

IC111

CPU

RST

WD

IC40-2

RE

SE

T

9 8 11 10 13 12

IC119 IC119 IC119

IC40-1IC132-5IC39-5

3 4

IC119

Figure 2-3-22 Reset circuit

The reset circuit is comprised of system reset IC118 and peripheral circuits. When the CPUoperates abnormally, when the power is switched on, or when the power source voltagedrops, this circuit outputs a reset signal to the CPU to prevent CPU malfunction.

340

2-3-19

• System reset IC operation timing

4.25 V

4 V

2 V

0 V

0 V

0 V

0 VRES1

WD

TC

Vcc

12 3 654

Figure 2-3-23 System reset IC operation timing

1 When the power is switched on and the 5-V-DC power source voltage rises to 4.25 V,the potential of capacitor C137 connected to the TC pin of IC118 rises.

2 As the charging of C137 continues and the potential of the TC pin rises to 2 V, the outputlevel of the RES1 pin goes high. When the potential reaches 4 V, the pin goes low andC137 is discharged.

3 When the potential of the TC pin has dropped to 2 V as C137 discharges, RES1 goeshigh again.

4 Until the clock signal is input to the WD pin from the ASIC IC41, IC118 repeats the aboveoperation. When the clock signal is received, C137 is discharged while C118 clocksignal is high.

5 When the CPU operates normally, the clock signal is always input before the potentialof TC reaches 4 V in step 2, so RES1 remains high and is always kept high while thesystem is operating normally. If the CPU has a problem, and the clock is no longer inputwith the normal timing, the potential of IC137 rises to 4 V and RES1 goes low. This RES1signal goes through the 2-stage or 4-stage inverter IC119 and is input to the CPU andASIC reset pins, resetting the CPU automatically.

6 When the 5-V-DC power source voltage drops to 4.25 V, RES1 goes low and the CPUis reset.

340

2-3-20

(3) Image processing unitThe image processing unit consists of an LSI exclusive for image processing (ASIC IC121,112, 150, 103, 61, 100, 89 and 99). The IPU circuit receives 8-bit image signal (256 tonelevels) digitized in the ISU PCB, edits the data into 5-bit signals (32 levels) and sends themto the LED printhead.Job control and data setting for each ASIC are assigned by the CPU. Auto exposure controland original size detection that were conducted by employing a halogen lamp with variablelight intensity on previous copiers are performed by controlling the digital image signals inthe IPU circuit on this machine.

IC103

IC99

IC112

IC121

IC114

IC61

IC150

IC104

IC105

Zoom processing

Input processing

Line correction

F I F O

ISU PCB

Filter processing

C P UGrayscale correction processing

IC100

IC111

IC89LED printhead

LED printhead

AE processing

SRAM

SRAM1

SRAM2

SRAM

FIF

O

SRAM

IC135.136

IC87.88IC78

IC64.67.79.80

IC42.43.44.60

Expansion interface 1

Expansion interface 2

Timing control

SRAM1-7

IC106.113 IC122.123 IC137.138

IC139

F I F O

control

Figure 2-3-24 Image processing unit (IPU) block diagram

340

2-3-21

• Input processing unitEight-bit image data from the ISU PCB is read into line FIFO memory (C114) line by line.Holding data of a total of 7 lines via SRAMs (IC106, 113, 122, 123, 137, 138 and 139), IC121conducts correction of the current line using the data of three lines on each side of it toeliminate any shift of the image in the sub scanning direction. Eight-bit image data issubjected to γ correction and black-and-while reversal at IC112.After that, the image data is sent to the zoom processing unit.

ISU PCB

MPCBS

PG

T

TC

LOC

K

ISU

D(7

: 0)

RE

SE

T D

SS

O-

ALE

A

(7 :

1)

D(7

: 0)

W

R :

RD

H

SY

NC

IC112

IC121

IC104

IC105

IDR

STR

IDC

LKDifferential IC

FIFO(5KB)

RESET HSYNC SCLK BE MRE CPU control

Input processing ID(7 : 0)

γ correction

MB interface PD

Black-and-white reversal

Address control

SRAM1(8KB)

SRAM2(32KB)

γ correction table

γ table selection, 1-line memory

Zoom processing

SRAM1-7

IC106.113 IC122.123 IC137.138

IC139

Figure 2-3-25 Input processing unit block diagram

340

2-3-22

• γ correction8-kbyte SRAM 1 (IC104) is used for γ correction where a γ table is selected for each pixelout of the 32 tables (8k/256). The γ table data is stored in 32-kbyte SRAM 2 (IC105) to beused for selection of the table to be read out of SRAM 1 (IC104).There are two modes available and can be selected via a register: one where a γ table isselected for every pixel and the other where it is fixed once selected.

• Black-and-white reversalBlack-and-white reversal is carried out by converting each 8-bit pixel data between 0 and1 for each bit.

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

1: Black pixel 0: White pixel

Main scanning direction

Black-and-white reversal

• AE processing unitHistograms of image data output from the input processing unit (IC112) are generated inthe AE processing unit (IC150).Based on sampled image data for the A4R/11" × 81/2" original, a histogram is created byanalyzing the data into 20 levels based on the line memory darkness data. The CPU selectsthe optimum dither matrix data based on this histogram.

340

2-3-23

• Zoom processing unitProcessing for enlargement or reduction in the main scanning direction in zoom mode orprocessing in the main scanning direction in independent zoom mode is conducted at thezoom processing unit (IC103) based on the magnification ratio data computed by the CPU.Then pixel data is added or deleted at certain intervals to determine the actual enlargementor reduction.Enlargement or reduction in the sub scanning direction is controlled by changing the originalfeed motor rotational speed which is done by servo motor control 2 PCB based on themagnification ratio data from the operation unit PCB.

ReductionImage data from the input processing unit (IC112) is sent to the zoom processing unit(IC103) where a clock is generated by extending the image clock by a certain interval. Theimage data at IC103 is written line by line into SRAM using this newly created clock.Because of this, the image data in the SRAM has lost pixels at the certain intervals. Whenthe data is read out of the SRAM sequentially using the image clock, line image data seemsto be reduced.

EnlargementImage data from the input processing unit (IC112) is sent to the zoom processing unit(IC103) where a clock is generated by extending the image clock by a certain interval. IC103then writes this image data into SRAM line by line. The image data is read out of the SRAMin synch with the newly created clock. Because of this clock, some of the pixels of the imagedata stay on the data bus twice (in case of magnification ratio of 200%) as long as with theimage clock.When this data is sampled in synch with the image clock while being read into the filterprocessing unit (IC16), they are sampled twice (in case of magnification ratio of 200%) andthe line image data is now enlarged in the main scanning direction.

• Image shiftingImage is shifted in the main direction by the zoom processing IC103 which changes theimage read-out start address or image read-out timing from the line memory based on theimage shift data from CPU IC111.

• Mirror imageMirror image processing in the main scanning direction is conducted by IC103 whichchanges the image read-out start address from the line memory based on the image shiftdata from CPU IC111 and reversing the read-out order.

340

2-3-24

• Filter processing unitWhen a mode is selected on the operation panel, the CPU sets a value corresponding tothat mode on the register. This starts image differentiation or integration to make a copy asclose to the original as possible by modifying the image continuity in accordance with thetype of the original used. For example, when a photograph is used as original, integrationis conducted at the filter processing unit. Differentiation is performed for originals with text.Integration and differentiation are conducted by IC61 and FIFO (256 kbytes × 4)(IC42, 43,44 and 60).

• Tone processing unitThe tone processing unit consists of IC100 and SRAM (IC87, 88). The unit applies toneprocessing to image data sent from the filter processing unit. It also conducts grayscalemodification from 256 to 32 levels for darkness control.

340

2-3-25

2-3-6 Backup PCB

MPCB

SRAM

BUPCB

Data bus Address bus

Control signals

Lithium battery backup power supply unit

5 V DC

Figure 2-3-26 Backup PCB block diagram

Backup PCB (BUPCB) consists of SRAM, lithium battery BT1 and backup battery powersupply unit and is connected to the main PCB with connectors. SRAM is connected to CPUIC111 on the main PCB via address bus, data bus and control signals. Normally the backupPCB is driven by the 5 V DC supplied from the main PCB. Once the power is shut off, or whenthe backup PCB is disconnected from the main PCB, the lithium battery (BT1) backupsupply unit takes over. The SRAM then enters the data hold mode where memory contentsare kept for extended periods of time at a power consumption rate of as low as a few µA.

Image Processing Overview

The CIS (Contact Image Sensor) reads one line of the original at 400 dpi resolution. The signal fromthe CIS is sent to the ISU board.

The analog signal from the CIS is changed into 8-bit digital data after applying AGC (Auto GainControl) processing and shading correction. The data is edited in the image processing circuit in themain PCB, and finally output as 5-bit data (32 graduations) from the LPH (LED Printing Head).

2-3-25-1

C I S (Contact Image Sensor)

Main PCBImage Processing

I S U PCB

L P H (LED Printing Head)

AGC - Auto Gain Control

Shading Correction

A/D Conversion

Analog Signal

8 - bit

5 - bit

Image Scanning (400 dpi)

Printing (400 dpi)

Image Edit

340

2-3-26

2-3-7 ISU PCB

The ISU PCB consists of analog processing unit where original image data read by thecontact image sensor (CIS) is held for sampling and A-D-converted, shading correction unit,line forming unit where shading-corrected data is turned into line memory and a CPU incharge of data control for the respective ISU blocks.Image data from CIS is sent to the ISU PCB in synch with the ISU start signal. After beingprocessed there, the data is further sent to the image processing unit on the main PCB. TheCPU on the ISU PCB serially communicates with the CPU IC9 on the main PCB via TXDand RXD.

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Analog processing unit

IC 1-4A-D conversion/

AGC processing unit AGCZ10×4

ADCCLKRESET/

RE

SE

T/

AGCCS1-4/ASB/

IOWR/IORD/

SI

AD0-7

ID1–4(7: 0)

FLFD

Main PCB

Txd

Rxd

9.83 MHz

CPU interface

IPU interface

CPU

WR

/RD

D0-7

A0-6

Reset IC

ISU

D0-7

SP

GT

,TC

LOC

K

HS

YN

C

CIS, AGC

interface

IC 11 IC29

IC28

IC31

IC30

Shading correction unit

ASIC

RA

M interface

Black reference value

White reference value

Line memory forming

Line memory forming

ISU

CIS

SI.CCLK. SHOLD.FLS

RAM

WDIC9

Figure 2-3-27 ISU PCB block diagram

340-1

2-3-27

(1) Analog processing unitFour analog signals from the contact image sensor for one-line image data are output to thebuffers of the analog processing unit in synch with start signal SI from the ISU PCB. As eachsensor output has a high impedance, it is converted into a low-impedance signal by thebuffer (IC42, 36, 34, 32) at the first stage. This signal is then held by the sample hold circuitin synch with the sample hold clock (SHOLD) from IC11 to isolate the image data voltage.The output from the sample hold circuit is non-inverting-amplified by IC41, 22, 19 and 16.As the voltage when the fluorescent lamp is on varies from channel to channel, gainadjustment is conducted at 4 V.FLDA (IC38) prepares data for fluorescent lamp light intensity measurement (sensor outputfor the status where the contact glass is covered with white tape). This data is fed to the mainPCB where it is A-D converted and comprared with the reference voltage.

CH1

IC42IC38

IC39

IC41

BufferFLDA

SHCLK

Non-inverting- amplification

Non-inverting- amplification

Non-inverting- amplification

Non-inverting- amplification

To MPCB

V

V

ID 1(7 : 0)AGCCS1

AGCZ10 IC3

AGCZ10 IC4

CH2

IC36

IC37

IC22

Buffer

SHCLK

V

V

ID 2(7 : 0)AGCCS2

AGCZ10 IC2

CH3

IC34

IC35

IC19

Buffer

SHCLK

V

V

ID 3(7 : 0)AGCCS3

Sample hold

AGCZ10 IC1

CH4

IC32

IC33

IC16

Buffer

SHCLK

V

V

ID 4(7 : 0)AGCCS4

Sample hold

Sample hold

Sample hold

Figure 2-3-28

340

2-3-28

(2) A-D conversion/AGC processing unitImage data from the contact image sensor is converted into 8-bit digital data by the A-Dconversion circuit IC1. When reference voltages for A-D conversion are set to 5 V and 0 V,the weight of the digital data (ID0 – ID7) is 5-0/256, i.e. about 19.5 mV. However the dataobtained using the white reference plate is smaller than 5 V for the absolute white. The blackreference data also is larger than 0 V. Therefore the actual range that can be used forgrayscale correction is narrow. AGC processing is conducted to expand this range to 0 to5 V whenever the copier main switch is turned on.

(3) Shading correction circuitDue to the dispersion in sensitivity of the photosensitive elements of the contact imagesensor, uneven fluorescent lamp light distribution and distortion in the lens, there is asignificant difference in the output voltage levels of the elements of the CIS. Shadingcorrection is conducted to eliminate this difference every time an original is fed on the copier(or the first original in multiple-original copying).

Black reference

value

Creation of black reference value

Shading ASIC peripheral devices

Shading ASIC

Creation of white reference value

Single line memory forming

CPU interface

IPU interface

Shading processing

White reference

value

Line memory forming

RAM

RAM0E1-4/

RAMWE1-4/

RAMA1(7:0)

RAMA3(7:0)

AD (7:0)

RAMA4(7:0)

RAMA1(7:0)

RAMA2(7:0)

RAMA3(7:0)

RAMA4(7:0)

RA

M interface

CIS, AGC

interface

SI.CCLK.SHOLD.FLS

ADCCLK

RESET/

AGCCS1-4/

ASB/

IOWR/

IORD/

ID1 (7:0)

ID2 (7:0)

ID3 (7:0)

ID4 (7:0)

D0-7

WR

/,RD

/,RE

SE

T

HS

YN

C

SP

OT

,TC

LOC

K

A0-6

ISU

D0-7

Line memory forming

Figure 2-3-29 Shading correction circuit block diagram

340

2-3-29

2-3-8 Operation unit PCB

The operation unit PCB consists of keyboard input circuit, LED lighting circuit and displaysection, all controlled by one-chip CPU IC1. This four-bit CPU controls the keyboard inputs,display LED on/off and display on the operation panel according to the programs installedon it.Data entered on the keyboard and data displayed on the LEDs and display section areprocessed as serial data and input to CPU IC111 at CN1-2 and output at CN1-4 in synchwith clock signal SCL at CN1-6.

CN1 - 6

CN1 - 2

CN1 - 4

CN8 - 6

CN8 - 2

CN8 - 3

CPU

IC1

Keyboard input circuit

LED lighting circuit

Display section

CPU IC111

Main PCB

Figure 2-3-30 Operation unit PCB block diagram

340-1

2-3-30

2-3-9 Inverter PCB

+24 V

Lighting signal (FL REM)

Intensity control signal (FL CONT)

CN1-4

CN1-3

CN1-2

CN1-1

CN2-1

CN2-2

CN2-5

CN2-6

FL

Figure 2-3-31 Inverter PCB block diagram

The inverter PCB consists of the high-frequency pulse generating circuit from which a high-frequency pulse of 37 kHz is emitted to the fluorescent lamp and the preheat circuit for thefluorescent lamp filaments.

• Functions of signalsFL REM (CN1-2), FL CONT (CN1-1): input signalsFluorescent lamp light intensity is controlled via the light intensity control signal (FL CONT)from the main PCB. When lighting signal FL REM is at low, 37-kHz pulse is generated fromthe high-frequency pulse generating circuit and sent to the fluorescent lamp to turn it on.Then, as the control voltage of the FL CONT is increased, the lamp grows brighter; and asit is decreased, the lamp becomes dimmer (see Figure 2-3-31).

III S

et U

p an

d

Adj

ustm

ent S

ectio

n

III

SET UP ANDADJUSTMENT

SECTION

Rev. 04/2000 340

CONTENTS

3-1 Installation

3-1-1 Unpacking and installing the copier ……………………………. 3-1-1(1) Installation environment …………………………………... 3-1-1(2) Installation procedure ……………………………………… 3-1-2

3-1-2 Copy mode initial settings …………………………………….. 3-1-273-1-3 Installing the key counter (optional) ………………………….. 3-1-283-1-4 Installing the roll unit (optional) ……………………………….. 3-1-31

3-1-1

340-1

3-1-1 Unpacking and installing the copier

(1) Installation environment1. Temperature and humidity: 10°C – 35°C/50°F – 95°F, 15% – 85% RH2. Power source: 120 V AC, 13 A/220 – 240 V AC, 8 A3. Power source frequency stability: 50 Hz ± 0.3%, 60 Hz ± 0.3%4. Installation location

• Avoid locations with direct sunlight or bright areas such as near windows or with brightlighting. Be sure to avoid letting direct sunlight or bright light reach the photoconductorwhen removing jammed paper.

• Avoid locations with high temperature or humidity, low temperature or humidity, andareas with sudden changes in temperature. Also avoid areas with hot or cold draughts.

• Avoid areas with excessive dust or vibration.• Be sure that the platform or floor area can support the weight of the equipment.• Locate on a flat, horizontal surface (maximum inclination of 1°).• Avoid locations containing substances that could cause changes in the equipment or

the photoconductor (mercury, alkali or acid vapors, inorganic gases, gases such asNOx and SOx, and chlorine-based organic solvents).

• Choose a location with adequate ventilation.5. There should be sufficient space for operation and maintenance of the equipment:

800 mm/311/2" at front, 500 mm/1911/16" at right and 300 mm/1113/16" at rear and left.

DC

B

A

Figure 3-1-1 Installation measurements

A: 1590 mm/6219/32"B: 1168 mm/46"C: 1107 mm/4319/32"D: 1563 mm/6117/32"

3-1-2

340-3

(2) Installation procedure

Unpack the copier.

Remove main charger assembly, accessory case and retaining tape.

Attach the main charger assembly to the cleaning assembly.

Remove protection tape from the developing unit assembly and attach the developing unit cover.

Adjust the horizontal level of the unit.

Force the copier to stabilize (simulation 41).

Attach the flywheel assembly.

Attach the accessories.

Pour toner into the toner hopper assembly.

Add the starting developer (simulation 10).

Set the developer (simulation 60).

Adjust the position of the front covers.

Connect the power cord.

Remove spacers from the roll units and remove developing unit cover.

Adjust the fixing pressure.

Make a test copy.

Remove the tape retaining the cleaning unit weight.

Coat the cleaning blade with toner (simulation 40).

Installation of the copier completed.

Start

3-1-3

340-1

Unpack the copier.

1. Top pad 2. Inner case 3. Outer case 4. Main charger assembly 5. Dust cover 6. Machine body 7. Bottom pads 8. Skid 9. Front right pad10. Hinge joint11. Accessory case (see page

3-1-4 and Figure 3-1-3).12. Spacers (between the

upper and lower paperfeed guides of the 1st and2nd roll units).

13. Front cover pads(between each front coverand the copy bin).

14. Developing unit cover(secured with tape insidethe 2nd roll unit).

15. Inner pads16. Top board17. Caster lever

(Item No.: 67802210)18. Flywheel assembly19. Bronze binding screws,

M4 × 8 (3)20. Top case21. Front left pad22. Props

Figure 3-1-2 Unpacking

4

3

¤

¤

¤

1

2

5

6

%

7

8

⁄0

&*(

%

!@

97

#$

)

^

0

3-1-4

340

1. Paper roll shafts2. Original loop guide3. Tray stoppers (2)4. Accessory spacer

Figure 3-1-3 Accessory case

5. Accessory case6. Main unit support plates (2)7. Main unit support covers (2)

1

2

4

5

67

3

3-1-5

340-3

1. Remove the 14 hinge joints. (Packing case retainers), 6 top, 8 bottom.2. Remove the top case, outer case, inner case, top board, top pad, four props, front

right pad, and dust cover (see Figure 3-1-2).3. Remove the tape retaining the front covers and copy bin.4. Open the copy bin and remove the front cover pads (1 each on the right and left side)

between the copy bin and the front covers. Remove the tapes from the front covermagnets.

5. Remove the front cover retainers (1 each on the right and left side: 4 screws).

Front cover retainer

Front cover pad

Tape

Front cover padTape

Figure 3-1-4

3-1-6

340-3

6. Open the front cover.7. Remove the two screws on the stopper support plate attached to each front cover

and remove a screw on the earth wire.8. Lift a front cover, and pull out the pin on the front cover from the hinge on the main

unit to detach the front cover. Remove the other front cover in the same manner.

Hinge

Front cover

Stopper support plate

Earth wire

Hinge

Figure 3-1-5

9. Attach the machine bolts to the holes (2 locations each on the front and rear) in themain unit.• Machine bolts are optional. (Item No.: 67868010).

Machine bolt

Machine bolt

Figure 3-1-6

3-1-7

340-3

10. Pass a rope through the machine bolts attached to the front and rear of the right sideof the main unit.

11. Lift the right side of the main unit with the rope to remove the bottom pad.12. Remove the rope.13. Pass the rope through the machine bolts attached to the front and rear of the left

side of the main unit.14. Lift the left side of the main unit with the rope to remove the bottom pad.15. Lift the left side of the main unit with the rope again and carefully lower the left side

of the main unit from the skid.• When removing the main unit from the skid, check that the nuts for adjusting height

are completely tightened (with no space between each nut and the bottom baseof the main unit). If you attempt to move the main unit when the nuts are notcompletely tightened, it may cause problems such as bending a bolt on the caster.

16. Remove the rope and pass it through the machine bolts attached to the right sideof the unit again. Lift the right side of the main unit and carefully lower the main unitfrom the skid.

17. Remove the rope.18. Detach the machine bolts from the main unit.

Bottom pad

Skid

Rope

Figure 3-1-7

3-1-8

340-3

Remove the main charger assembly, accessory case and retaining tape.

1. Remove the main charger assembly secured to the original holding section withtape.

2. Take out the accessory case placed on the base assembly of the main unit.3. Remove the tape retaining the original guide.4. Remove the tape retaining the left and right paper eject guides.5. Remove the tape retaining the power cord at machine rear.6. Remove the two tapes retaining the original holding section.7. Open the original holding section and remove the two pads at the right and left.

Accessory case

TapeMain charger assembly

Figure 3-1-8

3-1-9

340-1

Remove spacers from the roll units and the developing unit cover.

1. Pull out the 1st roll unit.2. Release the roll paper upper guide in the direction of the arrow by holding the roll

paper insertion knobs.3. Remove the roll unit spacer retained by tape.4. Return the roll paper upper guide to the original position.5. Insert the 1st roll unit back in the original position in the main unit.

Roll paper insertion knob

Roll paper insertion knob

Roll unit spacer

Roll paper upper guide

Figure 3-1-9

6. Pull out the 2nd roll unit.7. Release the roll paper upper guide in the direction of the arrow by holding the roll

paper insertion knobs.8. Remove the roll unit spacer.9. Return the roll paper upper guide to the original position.

10. Remove the developing unit cover attached to the bottom of the 2nd roll unit withtape.

11. Insert the 2nd roll unit back in the original position in the main unit.

Roll paper insertion knob

Roll unit spacer

Developing unit coverRoll paper upper guide

Figure 3-1-10

3-1-10

340

Remove the tape retaining the cleaning unit weight.

1. Open the original holding section.2. Pull the main unit release lever to open the main unit.3. Remove the tape retaining the cleaning unit weight.4. Close the original holding section.

Cleaning unit weight

Figure 3-1-11

Attach the flywheel assembly.

1. Remove the screw from the upper right side cover and open the cover.2. Align the notches in the flywheel assembly with the projections on the flywheel

mount, and push the flywheel assembly into the main unit.3. Align the screw holes in the flywheel assembly and the mount, and insert and

tighten 3 M4 × 8 bronze binding screws.

Flywheel assembly

Flywheel mount

Upper right side cover

M4 × 8

Screw

Figure 3-1-12

3-1-11

340

Attach the main charger assembly.

1. Remove the 9P connector on the cleaning unit assembly.

9P connector

Figure 3-1-13

2. Open the right cover.3. Push the toner collection pipe downward until it is held by the pin and locked in

place.

Toner collection pipe

Pin

Figure 3-1-14

3-1-12

340

4. Remove the M3 × 8 screw holding the cleaning unit retention stopper.5. Slide the cleaning unit retention stopper in the directions of the arrows 1 and 2

to unlock the stopper plate.6. Pull the cleaning assembly toward you and remove the cleaning assembly from the

main unit.

ca

12

Cleaning assembly

Stopper plate

Cleaning unit retention stopper

M3 × 8

Figure 3-1-15

3-1-13

340

7. Loosen the two M4 × 8 screws holding the stopper plate, slide the plate all the wayto the left and retighten the screws.

M4 × 8

Cleaning unit retention stopper

Stopper plate

Figure 3-1-16

8. Fit the main charger assembly to the cleaning assembly by engaging the hinge onthe main charger assembly with the groove in the cleaning unit retention stay. Thenpush the main charger assembly in the direction of the arrow.

Cleaning assembly

Cleaning unit retention stay

Main charger assembly

Figure 3-1-17

3-1-14

340

9. Attach the cleaning assembly to the main unit by inserting the cleaning unit retentionstay in the larger hole in the rear of the left side plate of the main unit. (The smallhole in front side is for shipment).

Hole to be used for shipment

Be sure to use this hole.

Figure 3-1-18

10. Slide the cleaning unit retention stopper to the left until it is held by the notch in thestopper plate. Tighten the stopper with an M3 × 8 screw.

M3 × 8 Stopper plate

Cleaning unit retention stopper

Figure 3-1-19

3-1-15

340-3

11. Refit the 9P connector of the cleaning assembly to its original position.12. Disconnect the 3P connector on the cleaning solenoid.

3P connector

Cleaning solenoid

Figure 3-1-20

13. Release the toner collection pipe.

Caution: Closing the right cover without releasing the toner collection pipe causes amessage to be displayed requesting that the waste toner tank be checked;copying is also disabled.

14. Remove the screw M4 × 6 in position A on the collection pipe guide.15. Remove the waste toner tank sponge assembly taped beside the waste toner tank.

Secure the assembly in position B with the screw M4 × 6 removed in step 14.

Caution: To detach the cleaning assembly for maintenance, remove the screwM4 × 6 and push the toner collection pipe down.

Collection pipe guide

A

M4 × 6

Toner collection pipe

B

Waste toner tank sponge assembly

Figure 3-1-21

16. Close the upper right side cover and fix it with the screw.17. Close the right cover.18. Close the main unit.

3-1-16

340-1

Remove the protection tape from the developing unit assembly.

1. Loosen the two upper rear cover pins and open the upper rear cover.2. Remove the two screws from the upper rear cover and a screw from the earth wire

to remove the upper rear cover from the main unit.

Earth wire

Upper rear cover pins

Upper rear cover

Figure 3-1-22

3. Remove the lower rear cover (four screws).4. Disconnect the 1P connector and the 7P connector on the developing unit

assembly.

1P connector

7P connector

Figure 3-1-23

3-1-17

340-1

5. Loosen the screws of the developing unit retention plates attached on the left andright of the developing unit lower partition and rotate the developing unit retentionplates toward the front.

Screw

Developing unit retention plate

Figure 3-1-24

6. Detach the developing unit assembly from the main unit.7. Disconnect the 3P connector from the toner feed motor.8. Detach the toner hopper assembly from the developing unit assembly.9. Remove the developing unit protection tape from both ends of the magnet roller.

Developing unit protection tape Toner hopper assembly

3P connector

Developing unit protection tape

Figure 3-1-25

3-1-18

340-1

Attach the developing unit cover to the developing unit assembly.

1. Remove the clamp (1 screw) attached to the right side of the developing unit cover.

Developing unit cover

Clamp

Screw

Figure 3-1-26

2. Insert the pin on the left side of the developing unit cover in the hole in the developingunit left plate to attach the cover to the developing unit assembly.

3. Use the clamp removed in step 1 to hold the wires as shown in Figure 3-1-27 andretain with the screw, being careful not to trap the wires. Check that there is no gapbetween the developing unit cover and the developing unit frame.

Pin Developing unit cover

Clamp

Screw

Figure 3-1-27

3-1-19

340

Adjust the horizontal level of the unit.

1. Place a level on the developing unit lower partition and check that the unit ishorizontal in all the directions. If not adjust the adjustment nuts with the caster lever(Item No.: 67802210).

2. Attach the developing unit assembly to the main unit with the assembly pushed allthe way to the machine left and secure with the developing unit retention lever.

3. Return the developing unit retention plates to the original positions and tighten theirscrews to secure. Before tightening the screws, make sure that the developing unitassembly is located all the way to the left of the main unit and the gear of thedeveloping unit assembly meshes well with the gear of the main unit.

4. Connect the 1P connector and 7P connector on the developing unit assembly.

Attach the front covers and adjust the positions.

1. Attach the front covers to the main unit.2. Open and close the front covers and check that there is no problem.

* The front cover top edges and the edge of the bypass table should be on the samelevel.The switch contact plate should be securely inserted in the notch on the bypasstable.

3. In case of abnormalities, adjust the positions of the front covers in the followingprocedure:• If a front cover is misaligned in the left/right direction

Loosen the 2 screws A each on the top and bottom hinges, and move the frontcover to the left or right to adjust, using the calibration marks engraved on thehinge section (long hole between the screws).

• If a front cover is misaligned in the up/down directionLoosen the 2 screws B each on the top and bottom hinges and move the frontcover up or down to adjust, using the calibration marks on the frame.

Screw B

Screw A

Screw A

Screw B

Figure 3-1-28

3-1-20

340

Adjust the fixing pressure.

1. Pull the main unit release lever to open the main unit.2. Open the front covers.3. Detach the front left and right removal covers (1 screw each).4. Tighten the fixing unit pressure adjustment nuts until they are fast.5. Reinstall the front left and right removal covers.6. Remove the left cover (7 screws).7. Close the main unit.8. Close the front covers.

Front left removel cover

Fixing unit pressure adjustment nut

Front right removal cover

Figure 3-1-29

Connect the power cord.

1. Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.

3-1-21

340

Force the copier to stabilize (simulation 41) .

1. Force safety switch 6 on.2. Turn the main switch on.3. Enter 10871087 with the numeric keys to enter the simulation mode.4. Enter 041 with the numeric keys.5. Press the enter key. The copier enters the forced stabilization mode.

Safety switch 6

Figure 3-1-30

3-1-22

340

Add the starting developer (simulation 10).

Caution: Before adding the starting developer, ensure that developing unit assemblyis located all the way to the machine left and the gear of the developing unitassembly meshes well with the gear of the main unit.

1. Shake the bottle of starting developer well to mix the developer.2. Input 010 with the numeric keys.3. Press the enter key. The unit starts operating.4. Evenly pour the contents of 1 bottle of starting developer into the developing unit

assembly.5. After pouring, press the stop/clear key. The unit stops operating.

Developer bottle

Figure 3-1-31

6. Attach the toner hopper assembly to the developing unit assembly. Do not connectthe 3P connector of the toner feed motor yet.

7. Release safety switch 6 to turn it off.8. Refit the rear upper cover.

340

1. Input 060 with the numeric keys.2. Press the enter key.

• The unit starts operating. When 3 minutes have elapsed since the start ofoperation, the toner control voltage is automatically set and the value is shownon the display.

• Do not apply shock or vibration to the main unit while it is operating.• The displayed value should be written on the simulation label.

1. Pull the main unit release lever to open the main unit.2. Refit the left cover (7 screws).3. Connect the 3P connector of the cleaning solenoid and close the main unit.4. Input 040 with the numeric keys.5. Press the enter key.

• After approximately 35 seconds have elapsed, the chime sounds and coating oftoner on the cleaning blade is finished.

6. Turn the main switch off and on to cancel the forced stabilization mode and exitthe simulation mode.

1. Follow the procedure on page 3-1-42.

Set the developer (simulation 60).

Coat the cleaning blade with toner (simulation 40).

3-1-23

Drum Conditioning (simulation 103).

Rev. 01/2001

⇒

3-1-24

340

Pour toner into the toner hopper assembly.

1. Fit the 3P connector of the toner feed motor.2. Shake a toner bottle well from side to side and up and down to mix the contents.3. Remove the seal from the cap of the toner bottle.

Figure 3-1-32

4. Open the hopper lid. Squeeze the tabs on both sides of the toner bottle cap andplace the bottle, upside down, over the cartridge slot in the toner hopper on themachine right (see the figure).

Figure 3-1-33

3-1-25

340-1

5. Hold the bottle at the lower part of it with one hand; slide the bottle to the machinecenter and then back to the original position four or five times while tapping thebottom with the other hand.

Figure 3-1-34

6. Hold the tabs at both ends of the bottle cap and pull the bottle away from themachine.

Figure 3-1-35

7. Pour toner into the toner hopper assembly in the same manner for the left side ofthe machine.

8. Put the hopper lid back in place.9. Close the upper rear cover and retighten the pins.

10. Reinstall the lower rear cover.

3-1-26

340

Attach the accessories.

1. Attach the loop guide to the main unit by engaging the grooves in the loop guide withthe two pins on the upper rear cover.

2. Open the copy bin and attach the tray stoppers to the left and right front covers byhanging the tray stopper claws in the tray stopper holes matching the desired size.

3. Close the copy bin.4. Open the front covers.5. Use the four M4 × 6 binding bronze screws that were used to install the front cover

retainers to attach the 2 support assemblies to the main unit.6. Close the front covers.

Main unit support assembly

Figure 3-1-36

Make a test copy.

Completion of installation of the copier.

3-1-27

340-3

3-1-2 Copy mode initial settings

The factory settings for this machine are as shown below.

• Contents of settings

Sim. No. Contents Setting at factory Settings

84 Exposure steps 13 1: 13STEPS

87 Auto shutoff function Present 1: ON

89 Optional roll unit Not installed 1: NOCON-NECT

94 Maximum copy length for multiple copy 1400 mm 1400mode

95 Maximum copy length for roll/bypass 5000 mm 5000mode

96 Action after paper empty detectionPlain paper 10 s 10 sTracing paper (vellum) 10 s 10 sFilm 1 s 1 s

97 Switching between front and rear ejectionof originals

Single copy Rear ejection 1. EJECTContinuous copy Front ejection 2. RETURN

98 Copy count timing During feeding MODE 1

User Auto clear time 90 s 90setting Auto shutoff function Present 0

Preheat/energy saving mode Energy saving 1mode

Initial size mode A size ———

Initial copy mode Same-size/full-size ———mode

3-1-28

340-3

3-1-3 Installing the key counter (optional)

Note that the following part is required in installing a key counter:Key counter socket assembly (Part No. 41529210)

Procedure1. Open the right cover.2. Detach the right front cover.3. Remove the three screws and detach the main switch assembly.4. Remove the shorting plug from the 4P connector for the main unit key counter.

Shorting plug

4P connector for key counter

Main switch assembly

Figure 3-1-37

3-1-29

340

5. Remove the two screws (the lower one is fastened with a nut from the rear side) anddetach the key counter cover.

6. Using the two screws removed in step 5, attach the key counter socket to the main switchassembly. Secure the lower screw from the rear with the nut.

7. Connect the 4P plug for the key counter socket to the key counter 4P connector on themain unit.

Nut

Key counter cover

Nut

Key counter socket

4P plug

To be connected to the 4P connector from which the shorting plug has been detached

Figure 3-1-38

340

8. Reattach the main switch assembly to the main unit. 9. Refit the right front cover on the main unit. 10. Close the right cover. 11. Plug the power cord to a wall outlet then turn the main switch on. 12. Check that when the key counter is removed, “Insert key counter”is shown on thedisplay.

13. Insert the key counter, make a test copy and check that thenumber of copies is countedcorrectly.

3-1-30

340

3-1-31

3-1-4 Installing the Roll Unit (optional)

ProcedureBe sure to turn the copier main switch off and unplug the power cordfrom the outlet before attaching the optional wall unit.

Caution:Before starting the following procedure, ensure that the unit supportassembly is present on the copier main body since the assemblycannot be attached to the copier after the roll unit is installed.

1. Open the right and left frontcover.

2. Remove the two screws holdingthe stopper center plate [2] to theright front cover [1] and thescrew holding the ground wire[3].

3. Lift the right front cover [1] off thehinges [4] of the copier mainbody.

4. Detach the left front cover in thesame manner.

5. Open the detachable assembly [5]of the copier.

6. Remove the seven screws and liftthe lower cover [6].

7. Close the detachable assembly.

340

3-1-32

11. Remove the four screws and the rearlower cover [7B].

8. Open the right side upper cover andremove the toner disposal tank.

9. Remove the four screws and the rightside lower cover [7A].

10. Close the right side upper cover.

B

A

12. Remove the seven screws and theinner cover [8].

13. Remove the three screws and theroll drive lid [9] from the loweroutside of the left frame.

340

3-1-33

14. Remove one screw and remove thelower lid [10].

15. Fit the roll conveying support plate[P] to the copier rear frame with thethree chromate binding screws [K](M4x6) using the screw holes [11]in the frame.

16. Fit the bearing [Q] to roll conveyingroller [D] with the stop ring [L].

17. Fit roll conveying rear roller [D] tothe copier, inserting the roller’s shaftinto the holes in the left frame androll conveying support plate [P].

NOTE:1. Holding the roller with its long

shaft on the left, insert the endinto the hole in the left frameand insert the other end into thehole in the roll conveyingsupport plate.

2. Ensure that the flat surface ofthe bearing installed in step 16sits snug against the cutout [12]in the roll conveying supportplate.

18. Fit the bearing [H] to the shaft of rollconveying rear roller [D] with thestop ring (E-7) [L] from outside theleft frame.

340

3-1-34

19. Fit the bearing [Q] to the shaft of theroll conveying rear roller [D] with thestop ring (E-7)[D] from outside of theroll conveying support plate [P].

20. Fit the roll drive assembly [C] to theposition where the roll drive lid [9]was until its removal in step 13,using the three screws which wereholding the lid.

NOTE:While tightening the screws, pressthe assembly all the way down inthe direction of the arrow in thediagram.

21. Fit the roll paper feed clutch [E] tothe shaft [13] of the roll conveyingrear roller installed in step 17.

NOTE:1. Ensure stopper [14] of the roll feed

clutch is inserted into bend [15] inthe roll drive assembly.

2. Slide the roll paper feed clutchonto the shaft until it stops, andcheck that the clutch does notcome off when it is pulled.

22. Loosen screw [17] holding the drivetension plate assembly [16] on theroll drive assembly.

340

3-1-35

23. Loop the drive belt [G] over thepulley [18] and the pulley [19] on theroll drive assembly.

24. Press the drive tension assembly[16] in the direction of the arrow inthe diagram until its edge [20]covers half the hole [21] in the rolldrive assembly, and retighten theassembly’s screw [17] loosened instep 22.

25. After connecting the 2-pin connector[22] of the roll paper feed clutch [E],and the 2-pin connector [23] and 3-pin connector [24] of the roll driveassembly [C], insert the cable tie [M]through the opening in the roll driveassembly [C] and fasten the wireswith the tie.

26. Remove the tie [25] holding themain wires. Refasten them with thewires for the 2-pin connector [23]and the 3-pin connector [24].

27. Extend each roll slider [F] to its fulllength

28. While pressing [26] down with ascrewdriver or similar tool, extendthe roll slider until it separates intotwo pieces [27] and [28]. Do thesame on both sliders.

340

3-1-36

29. Fit smaller pieces [27] of the rollsliders to the inside of the rightand left frames using three bindingscrews (M4x6)[K].

NOTE:Orient the smaller pieces [27] withthe portions [29] toward the frontof the machine.

30. Slide one large piece [28] of theslider onto the smaller piece [27]installed inside the left frame.

31. Slide the other larger piece [28] ofthe roll slider onto the smallerpiece [27] installed inside the rightframe.

32. Pull out the roll sliders [F] fully.

340

3-1-37

33. Place the roll unit [A] on the rollslider [F].

NOTE:1. When carrying the roll unit, be

sure to hold the bottoms of theleft and right frames.

2. After installing the roll unit,remove the pads from it.

34. Fasten the roll unit [A] to the rollsliders [F] using two screws(M4x6)[K].

35. Insert the roll unit [A] into the maincopier body.

36. Insert the 4-pin connector [30] ofthe drawer attachment plateassembly [B] into the roll unitconnector at the rear left bottom ofthe copier and fasten the drawerattachment plate assembly [B] withthe two bronze binding screws(M4x6) [K].

37. Insert the 4-pin connector [31] ofthe drawer attachment plateassembly [B] into the main wireconnector and fasten the wire withthe clamp [32].

340

3-1-38

38. Loosen the three screws andremove connector [33], then slidethe power source PCB assembly[34] in the direction of the arrow.

39. Install the empty switch [I] and twosize detection switches [T] with twobronze binding screws [J] and [U](M3x12) respectively.

40. Connect the 3-pin connectors [35]of the wire [V] to the empty switch[I] and insert the 5-pin connector[36] to the main wire connector.

NOTE:Route the wire [V] below the part[37].

41. Fasten the wire [V] with the cabletie [S] and insert the tie clip into thehole in the frame.

42. Refit the power source PCBassembly.

43. Install the roll conveying rear guide[R] with the screw removed in step14.

44. For 120V models, install the“Dehumidifier Switch” decal [O] tothe location shown in theillustration.

45. Refit the left lower cover, right sidecover, right front cover and leftfront cover to the copier.

340

3-1-39

Operation Check

Insert the copier power plug into the wall outlet and turn the mainswitch on. Access SP mode and change the setting of SP89 from 1to 2 to select the Roll Unit. Load paper in the roll unit using the rollshaft and make test copies to check the operation.

Supplied PartsA. Roll Unit 1

B. Drawer B Attachment Ass’y 1

C. Roll Drive B Ass’y 1

D. Roll Conveying Rear Roller 1

E. Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1

340

3-1-40

F. Roll Slider 2

G. Drive Belt 1

H. Bearing 2

I. Empty Switch 1

J. Bronze Binding Screw M3x12 2

K. Bronze Binding Screw M4x6 16

L. Stop Ring (E-7) 3

M. Cable Tie 2

N. Roll Shaft 1

340

3-1-41

O. Roll Heater Label (120V only) 1

P. Roll Conveying Support Plate 1

Q. Bearing 2

R. Roll Conveying Rear Guide 1

S. Cable Tie 1

T. Size Detection Switch 2

U. Bronze Binding Screw M3x12 4

V. Wire 1

3403-1-5 Drum Conditioning

Start

Enter simulat ion mode.

Input "103" with the numeric keys.

Press the Enter key. *

Is the copy image correct

(Test Pattern 1)?

Press the Stop/Clear key.

Input "035" with the numeric keys andpress the Enter key.

Reference "TRGT" is displayed.

Select "LPH ON" using the Left Margin+- keys.

If Test Pattern 2 is printed, decreasethe sett ing by 2 ~ 3 increments. If TestPattern 3 is printed, increase thesett ing by 2 ~ 3 increments.

Change the sett ing with the arrow UP/DOWN mode set keys.

Press the Stop/Clear key.

Exit Simulation Mode.

End.

Yes

N oPress the Stop/Clear key.

The image is visible from around the 6th tonefor Test Pattern 1, from around the 3rd tone forTest Pattern 2 and from around the 9th tonefor Test Pattern 3.

* To abort Test Pattern output,press the Job Stop/Roll Cut key.

3-1-42

Rev. 01/2001

⇒

1-1-19

340-3

CONTENTS

3-2 Simulation

3-2-1 Simulation function .............................................................................. 3-2-1(1) Running a simulation ................................................................... 3-2-1(2) Simulation list .............................................................................. 3-2-2(3) Contents of simulations ............................................................... 3-2-8

3-2-1

340-3

3-2-1 Simulation function

This copier is equipped with a simulation function which can be used to check the operationand allow adjustment of the electrical components.

(1) Running a simulation

Start

Turn the main switch on.

Enter 10871087 with the numeric keys.

Enter the simulation number to be run with the numeric keys.

Press the enter key.

The simulation is run.

Enter 001 and press the enter key or turn the main switch off and back on.

End

- - - - - - Entering the simulation mode.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 000 is shown on the display.

- - - - - - Selecting a simulation number.

- - - - - - Exiting the simulation mode.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The selected simulation No. is displayed.

3-2-2

340-3

SectionSim.

Simulation contents DefaultNo.

(2) Simulation list

All

Paperfeed/conveying

01 Exiting simulation mode

03 Copying with original but no paper

04 Checking paper feed clutch operation

Names of clutches and order of activation:

1. Upper feed clutch

2. Middle feed clutch

3. Lower feed clutch (optional)

05 Checking winding clutch operation

Names of clutches and order of activation:

1. Upper roll winding clutch

2. Middle roll winding clutch

3. Lower roll winding clutch (optional)

06 Checking roll paper conveying/registration clutchoperation

Names of clutches and order of activation:

1. Roll conveying clutch

2. Registration clutch

07 Checking cutter clutch operation

08 Checking bypass clutch operation

Name of clutch:

Bypass registration clutch

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

3-2-3

340-3

SectionSim.

Simulation contents DefaultNo.

Paperfeed/conveying(cont.)

09 Checking switch operation

Display Switch

S0 Bypass registration switch

S1 Bypass timing switch

S2 Upper roll paper leading edge detectionswitch

S3 Middle roll paper leading edge detectionswitch

S4 Lower roll paper leading edge detectionswitch (optional)

S5 Registration switch

S6 Paper conveying switch

S7 Eject switch

PE Fixing unit pulse sensor

P2 Upper pulse sensor

P3 Middle pulse sensor

P4 Lower pulse sensor (optional)

10 Checking drive motor operation

Names of motors:

1. Drive motor

2. Fixing motor

11 Checking paper feed motor operation

12 Checking counter operation

17 Checking the lower roller unit (when the optional 3rdroll unit is installed)

18 Checking fan motor operation

Names of motors:

LPH fan motor 1

LPH fan motor 2

Paper conveying fan motor

Cooling fan motor

Right fixing fan motor

Left fixing fan motor

25 Adjustment for prescan in reduction copy mode

26 Setting delay before original feed start

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

3-2-4

340-3

SectionSim.

Simulation contents DefaultNo.

Paperfeed/conveying(cont.)

Optical

Charging

Cleaning

53 Adjusting 100% magnification

54 Adjusting leading edge registration

55 Adjusting synchrocut length (297 mm)

56 Adjusting synchrocut length (1189 mm)

57 Adjusting the leading edge margin

58 Adjusting the trailing edge margin/displayedsynchrocut length

59 Adjusting the paper cut position for specified lengthcut mode

21 Checking original size detection operation

Display Original size

ORG SIZE L B2/24" or larger

ORG SIZE M B2 – B3/24" – 22"

ORG SIZE S A3/18" or smaller

22 Checking original detection switch operation

Display Switch

S1 Original leading edge detection switch

S2 Original trailing edge detection switch

24 Checking original feed motor operation

31 Ignoring developing control

33 Turning the transfer charger on

34 Turning the separation charger on

35 Entering drum surface potential data for black &white mode

36 Entering drum surface potential data for half-tonemode

39 Displaying the thermistor outputs

40 Coating the cleaning blade with toner

45 Checking cleaning solenoid operation

48 Checking separation claw solenoid operation

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

TRGT: 224LPH_ON:

18

TRGT:191LPH: 9

———

———

———

———

3-2-5

340-3

SectionSim.

Simulation contents DefaultNo.

Chargeerasing

Fixing

Operationpanel

Developing

Memoryinitialize

Counts

Counts

44 Turning the cleaning lamps on

41 Forced stabilization

42 Displaying the fixing unit thermistor detectiontemperatures

46 Setting fixing stabilization at low speed

47 Checking fixing heater operation

50 Turning all the operation unit LEDs on

60 Loading developer

61 Turning developing bias on

63 Checking/changing toner control voltage

64 Checking toner feed motor operation

65 Displaying toner sensor output

Display description:

Toner sensor output value

Toner sensor output value after temperaturecompensation

Temperature detected by the developing unitthermistor

66 Entering toner sensor control level/copy count

67 Selecting operation under the empty toner condition

70 Initializing backup memory 1(Caution: Clears all RAM)

73 Displaying/clearing total paper feed count

75 Entering the service telephone No.

78 Displaying set data

79 Specifying addresses/displaying data

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

3-2-6

340-3

SectionSim.

Simulation contents DefaultNo.

Copymodes

CIS

Imagepositionalignment

80 Switching the counter counting units

81 Selecting the language

83 Selecting between metric/inch

84 Selecting the No. of exposure steps

85 Initializing backup memory 2

86 Switching the fixing temperature

87 Disabling cancellation of the auto shutoff function

89 Setting optional roll unit

92 Setting potential correction intervals

94 Setting the maximum copy length for multiple copymode

95 Setting the maximum copy length for roll/bypassmode

96 Selecting the action after paper empty detectionPlain paperFilmTracing paper

97 Switching between front and rear ejection of originalsSingle copyContinuous copy

98 Selecting the copy count timing

99 Displaying the ROM versions

109 Setting the controller type

110 Checking fluorescent lamp operation

111 Checking shading compensation operation

112 Checking AGC processing operation

113 Setting the shading mode

120 Adjusting γ correction

121 Adjusting gain

132 Adjusting optical axis

133 Adjusting the image width in the main scanningdirection

———

———

———

1: 13STEPS

———

2:OTHERS

1: ON

1: NOCONNECT

3: 20 m

ORGMAX: 1400

PAPERMAX: 5000

10 s1 s10 s

1: EJECT2: RETURN

MODE: 1

———

1. TYPE A

———

———

———

———

———

———

0 mm

0 mm

3-2-7

340-3

SectionSim.

Simulation contents DefaultNo.

Imagequality

LPH

Interfacecontroller

Memoryunit

140 Adjusting exposure amount

141 Adjusting half-tone image quality

142 Adjusting AE optimum level

143 Switching filter modes

144 Adjusting filter gain

145 Setting AE fine adjustment intervals

102 Gray output

103 32-gradation output

104 32-gradation output (without compensation)

153 Selecting current correction value

158 Adjusting focus

159 Solid black test pattern output

115 Selecting the connection to the interface controller

116 Setting the time to return from the offline condition

117 Adjusting the leading edge registration (whenconnected to the interface controller)

160 Adjusting base 4 output density

161 Adjusting thresholds (central exposure level)

162 Adjusting base 4 thresholds simultaneously

163 Adjusting Exp. 1.0 threshold

164 Adjusting Exp. 7.0 threshold

165 Setting the memory unit connection

166 Selecting display of the “Output?” screen afterrestart

167 Setting the AE scan

168 Setting the maximum number of continuous copies

170 Checking the memory unit DRAM

172 Checking the memory unit HDD page managementarea

173 Formatting the memory unit HDD

174 Clearing programs 6 to 10

175 Restoring programs 6 to 10

176 Memory unit problem history

177 Clearing the memory unit problem history

178 Selecting memory output mode

179 Checking the memory unit connection

———

———

———

———

———

3

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

———

3-2-8

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

01 Exiting simulation mode

DescriptionExits simulation mode and returns to normal mode.

PurposeUsed when closing simulation mode.

MethodPress the enter key. The copier returns to the normal mode.

03 Copying with original but no paper

DescriptionMakes copies without feeding paper.

PurposeTo check general machine operation.

Method1. Remove the paper, if any, from the paper source device that was used

before starting this simulation.

2. Press the enter key. The copier waits for an original to be placed inposition.

3. Put an original in place. The machine scans the original and displays theoriginal length. Continuous simulated copying of the original then starts.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key. Copying stops when the original return step iscompleted for the current cycle.

(3) Contents of simulations

3-2-9

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

04 Checking paper feed clutch operation

DescriptionOperates the upper, middle and lower feed clutches individually.

PurposeTo check the operation of the paper feed clutches when the primary paperfeed fails.

MethodPress the enter key. The feed clutches are activated one by one in thefollowing order and each remains on for 4 seconds. The paper feed motoralso turns on.

Upper feed clutchMiddle feed clutchLower feed clutch (optional)

• To interrupt the simulation, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

05 Checking winding clutch operation

DescriptionOperates the upper, middle and lower roll winding clutches individually.

PurposeTo check operation of the roll winding clutches when a problem arises whilewinding roll paper.

MethodPress the enter key. The roll winding clutches are activated one by one inthe following order and each remains on for 4 seconds. The paper feedmotor also turns on.

Upper roll winding clutchMiddle roll winding clutchLower roll winding clutch (optional)

• To interrupt the simulation, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-10

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

06 Checking roll paper conveying/registration clutch operation

DescriptionOperates the roll paper conveying and registration clutches individually.

PurposeTo check the operation of the roll paper conveying clutch and registrationclutch when the secondary paper feed fails.

MethodPress the enter key. The following clutches are activated one by one in thefollowing order and each remains on for 4 seconds. The paper feed motoralso turns on.

Roll conveying clutchRegistration clutch

• To interrupt the simulation, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

07 Checking cutter clutch operation

DescriptionOperates the cutter clutch.

PurposeTo check the cutting operation of rolled paper.

MethodPress the enter key. The cutter clutch is turned on. The paper feed motoralso turns on.

• After the cutter clutch has turned once, the related components turn off.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

08 Checking bypass clutch operation

DescriptionOperates the bypass registration clutch.

PurposeTo check operation of the bypass registration clutch when the bypass feedfails.

MethodPress the enter key. The bypass registration clutch is turned on. The paperfeed motor also turns on.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-11

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

09 Checking switch operation

DescriptionChecks the actions of the switches on the paper path by feeding paper.

PurposeTo check switches when paper jams.

Method1. Press the enter key.

2. Select the paper source by pressing the paper source key.

3. Press the enter key. Paper feed starts and the actions of the switchescan be checked. “∗” is shown, starting at the extreme left; it movestoward the right as each switch is turned on.

Bypass mode: S0 S1 S6 S7 PE1st roll unit (LED1): S2 S5 S6 S7 P2 PE2nd roll unit (LED2): S3 S5 S6 S7 P3 PE3rd roll unit (LED3): S4 S5 S6 S7 P4 PE

The actions of the following switches are checked.S0: Bypass registration switchS1: Bypass timing switchS2: Upper roll paper leading edge detection switchS3: Middle roll paper leading edge detection switchS4: Lower roll paper leading edge detection switch (optional)S5: Registration switchS6: Paper conveying switchS7: Eject switchPE: Fixing unit pulse sensorP2: Upper pulse sensorP3: Middle pulse sensorP4: Lower pulse sensor (optional)

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

10 Checking drive motor operation

DescriptionOperates the drive motor. This simulation can be run after machine stabiliza-tion. To run this simulation before machine stabilization, run simulation 41 first.

PurposeUsed when loading the developer to drive the developing section.

MethodPress the enter key. The drive motor, the fixing motor, developing bias andpre-charging lamp turn on.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key to stop the components.

3-2-12

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

11 Checking paper feed motor operation

DescriptionOperates the paper feed motor.

PurposeTo check the drive in the paper feed section.

MethodPress the enter key. The paper feed motor starts to rotate.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key to stop the motor.

12 Checking counter operation

DescriptionIncrements the counts on the total counter and the key counter withoutmaking copies.

PurposeTo check the operation of the total counter and the optional key counter.

MethodPress the enter key. Each time the enter key is pressed, the counts on thetotal counter and the key counter are incremented and the values areshown on the display.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

17 Checking the lower roller unit

DescriptionChecks the installation of the optional 3rd roll unit.

PurposeUsed when installing the 3rd roll unit.

MethodPress the enter key. The correct installation of the 3rd roll unit can bechecked as “PULSE ∗” is displayed.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key to stop the unit.

3-2-13

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

18 Checking fan motor operation

DescriptionOperates the fan motors individually.

PurposeTo check operation of the fan motors.

MethodPress the enter key. A step number is shown on the display.

SelectionPress the leading edge margin key to change the step number.

STEP1: LPH fan motors 1, 2 onSTEP2: LPH fan motors 1, 2 half-speedSTEP3: Cooling fan motor full-speedSTEP4: Cooling fan motor half-speed, Right/left fixing fan motors half-

speedSTEP5: Right/left fixing fan motors full-speedSTEP6: Right/left fixing fan motors off, paper conveying fan motor half-

speedSTEP7: Paper conveying fan motor full-speedSTEP8: Paper conveying fan motor off

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

21 Checking original size detection operation

DescriptionDisplays original size detection action.

PurposeTo check operation of original size switches 1 and 2 when the original sizeis not detected correctly.

Method1. Press the enter key.

2. Slide the original guides according to the original size. Check that theindication on the display is correct by referring to the table below.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Original size Display

B2/24" or larger ORG SIZE L

B2 – B3/24" – 22" ORG SIZE M

A3/18" or smaller ORG SIZE S

3-2-14

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

22 Checking original detection switch operation

DescriptionDisplays the actions of the original leading/trailing edge detection switches.

PurposeTo check the original leading/trailing edge detection switches when theoriginal feed fails.

Method1. Open the original holding section.

2. Press the enter key. “S1 S2” is shown on the display.

3. Turn the original leading edge detection switch on. An asterisk is shownagainst S1 on the display.

4. Turn the original trailing edge detection switch on. An asterisk is shownagainst S2 on the display.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

24 Checking original feed motor operation

DescriptionOperates the original feed motor.

PurposeTo check the operation of the original conveying system.

MethodPress the enter key. The following operations take place every 4 seconds.

Original feed motor rotates forwardOriginal feed motor reversesOriginal feed motor off

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

25 Adjustment for prescan in reduction copy mode

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-30-11.

3-2-15

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

26 Setting delay before original feed start

DescriptionSets the time to turn the original feed clutch on after the original leadingedge detection switch is turned on.

PurposeTo facilitate copying for unaccustomed users by extending the time to startprimary original feed after the insertion of original.

MethodPress the enter key.

SettingSelect the setting with the mode set keys.

Setting description: time from original leading edge detection switch ‘on’ tooriginal feed clutch ‘on’

1: 0.64 sec2: 2 sec3: 3 sec4: 4 sec5: 5 sec

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-16

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

31 Ignoring developing control

DescriptionSets whether developing control is ignored or not.

PurposeTo operate the machine with the developing section removed.

MethodPress the enter key.

SettingChoose a setting with the mode set keys.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

33 Turning the transfer charger on

DescriptionPerforms transfer charging.

PurposeTo check if transfer charging is performed correctly when a transfer problemoccurs.

MethodPress the enter key. Transfer charging starts.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key. Transfer charging ends.

34 Turning the separation charger on

DescriptionPerforms separation charging.

PurposeTo check if separation charging is performed correctly when a separationproblem occurs.

MethodPress the enter key. Separation charging starts.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key. Separation charging ends.

Display Setting description

1: CANCEL OFF Developing control used

2: CANCEL ON Developing control ignored

3-2-17

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

35 Entering drum surface potential data for black & white mode

DescriptionSets the drum surface potential in black & white (character) mode.

PurposeTo enter the value written on the simulation label after replacing the backupPCB or simulation 70 has been run.

MethodPress the enter key.

SelectionSelect the setting with the leading edge margin key or left margin key. Thecurrent setting value is shown on the display.

SettingChange the setting value with the mode set or numeric keys.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Setting description Setting range Default

TRGT Drum surface potential inblack & white (character) 0 – 255 224mode

LPH ON LPH output in black & white(character) mode 0 – 255 18

3-2-18

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

36 Entering drum surface potential data for half-tone mode

DescriptionSets the drum surface potential in half-tone mode.

PurposeTo enter the value written on the simulation label after replacing the backupPCB or simulation 70 has been run.

MethodPress the enter key.

SelectionSelect the setting with the leading edge margin key or left margin key. Thecurrent setting value is shown on the display.

SettingChange the setting value with the mode set or numeric keys.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Setting description Setting range Default

TRGT HLF Drum surface potential inhalf-tone mode 0 – 255 191

LPH ON HLF LPH output in half-tonemode 0 – 255 9

3-2-19

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

39 Displaying the thermistor outputs

DescriptionDisplays the detected temperatures of the thermistors.

PurposeTo check the temperatures inside and outside the machine and near thefluorescent lamp.

MethodPress the enter key. The detected temperatures (°C) of the followingthermistors are shown on the display.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Description

DTH Dehumidifier thermistor (temperatureinside the machine)

ATMO External temperature thermistor(temperature outside the machine)

LTH Fluorescent lamp thermistor(temperature near the fluorescent lamp)

3-2-20

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

40 Coating the cleaning blade with toner

DescriptionApplies toner to the cleaning blade by coating the drum with toner. Thissimulation can be run after machine stabilization. To run this simulationbefore machine stabilization, run simulation 41 first.

PurposeUsed when replacing the cleaning blade or drum or installing the copier.

MethodPress the enter key. The following operations take place:

Cleaning solenoid turns off.0.1 s later ↓

Developing bias (600 V DC) and drive motor turn on.(Toner is applied to the drum.)

4.5 s later ↓Drive motor turns off

0.5 s later ↓Cleaning solenoid turns on

0.5 s later ↓Drive motor turns on(The blade cleans the toner off the drum, so coating the blade.)

29.5 s later ↓Drive motor, developing bias and cleaning solenoid turn off.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

41 Forced stabilization

DescriptionThe copier enters the forced stabilization mode before the fixing section isheated to the stabilization temperature level.

PurposeUsed when setting the initial value of the developer.

MethodPress the enter key. The copier enters the forced stabilization mode and theready lamp lights.

CompletionTurn the main switch off and on to exit the forced stabilization mode.

3-2-21

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

42 Displaying the fixing unit thermistor detection temperatures

DescriptionDisplays detected temperatures of fixing unit thermistors 1 to 4 and theexternal temperature thermistor.

PurposeTo check the fixing temperature when a fixing problem occurs.

Method1. Press the enter key. The current temperatures detected by fixing unit

thermistors 1 to 4 and the external temperature thermistor are shown onthe display in °C.

2. Press the special paper select key to choose the paper type. The fixingtemperature control changes according to the paper type and the currentthermistor detection temperatures are displayed.

Display example

157 157 081 079 025

1 2 3 4 5

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Data No. Detection temperature

1 Temperature detected by fixing unit thermistor 1(the temperature around the center of the heat roller)

2 Temperature detected by fixing unit thermistor 2(the temperature at the end of the heat roller)

3 Temperature detected by fixing unit thermistor 3(the temperature around the center of the press roller)

4 Temperature detected by fixing unit thermistor 4(the temperature at the end of the press roller)

5 Temperature detected by external thermistor(temperature outside the machine)

3-2-22

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

44 Turning the cleaning lamps on

DescriptionTurns the pre-charging and post-transfer lamps on.

PurposeTo check the operation of the lamps when an offset occurs.

MethodPress the enter key. The pre-charging and post-transfer lamps turn on.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key. All the components are turned off.

45 Checking cleaning solenoid operation

DescriptionOperates the cleaning solenoid.

PurposeTo check cleaning solenoid operation when an offset occurs.

MethodPress the enter key. The cleaning solenoid turns on.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The cleaning solenoid turns off.

46 Setting fixing stabilization at low speed

DescriptionSets the fixing motor control when the fixing temperature falls to 80°C/176°For below.

PurposeTo heat the press roller evenly when copy paper is wrinkled.

MethodPress the enter key. The current temperature is shown on the display.

SettingChange the setting with the mode set keys.

Caution: When 1 is selected, copying is possible even if the surface tem-perature is not correct. However, copying in this condition maylead to image problems. We cannot guarantee the performancesince problems may be caused by such operation.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Setting description

1 OFF The fixing motor does not start rotating at low speed.

2 ON The fixing motor rotates at low speed when thefixing temperature falls to 80°C/176°F or below.

3-2-23

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

47 Checking fixing heater operation

DescriptionTurns fixing heaters M and S on.

PurposeTo check the operation of fixing heaters M and S.

MethodPress the enter key. Fixing heaters M and S turn off.

SelectionSelect a heater to be turned on with the leading edge margin key or leftmargin key and then press the enter key. The selected heater turns on.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key to turn the heater off.

48 Checking separation claw solenoid operation

DescriptionOperates the separation claw solenoid.

PurposeTo check the operation of the separation claw solenoid when a separationproblem occurs.

MethodPress the enter key. The separation claw solenoid turns on.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The separation claw solenoid turns off.

Display Operation description

HEAT1 DARK Fixing heater M on

HEAT1 LIGHT Fixing heater M on

HEAT2 DARK Fixing heater S on

HEAT2 LIGHT Fixing heater S on

Sim.No.

Description

49 Turning the drum heater on

Description Turns on the drum heater.

PurposeTo check drum heater operation

MethodPress the enter Key, Fixing heater turns off and drum heater turns on for 20 seconds.

CompletionThis mode automatically stops after 20 seconds.

3-2-23-1

3-2-24

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

50 Turning all the operation unit LEDs on

DescriptionTurns LEDs on the operation panel on.

PurposeTo check the indicators and ready-lamp on the operation panel.

MethodPress the enter key. All the indicators and the ready lamp on the operationpanel turn on.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key. All the indicators and the ready lamp turn off.

53 Adjusting 100% magnification

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-22.

54 Adjusting leading edge registration

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-23.

55 Adjusting synchrocut length (297 mm)

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-6.

56 Adjusting synchrocut length (1189 mm)

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-3.

57 Adjusting the leading edge margin

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-5.

58 Adjusting the trailing edge margin/displayed synchrocut length

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-9, 17.

59 Adjusting the paper cut position for specified length cut mode

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-7.

3-2-25

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

60 Loading developer

DescriptionDetermines the toner control voltage automatically.

PurposeUsed at machine setup and after replacing the developing assembly ordeveloper.

MethodPress the enter key. The drive motor turns on to conduct aging for threeminutes. After the completion of aging, the toner control voltage isautomatically determined and shown on the display. The toner controlvoltage adjusted value set in simulation 63 is reset to zero.

Display example

177 176

1 2

• Pressing the stop/clear key during aging stops the drive motor andinterrupts developer setting.

• Write down the value on the simulation label.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Data No. Display description

1 Toner sensor output value

2 Toner control voltage

3-2-26

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

61 Turning developing bias on

DescriptionOutputs the developing bias.

PurposeTo check if the developing bias is output correctly when image contrast ispoor.

MethodPress the enter key.

SelectionSelect the bias mode with the mode set keys. The developing bias turns onat the value corresponding to the selected bias mode.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key to turn the developing bias off.

Bias mode Developing bias value

BIAS1 –100 V DC

BIAS2 0 V DC

BIAS3 150 V DC

BIAS4 300 V DC

BIAS5 450 V DC

BIAS6 600 V DC

BIAS7 650 V DC

3-2-27

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

63 Checking/changing toner control voltage

DescriptionChecks/sets the toner control voltage value determined automatically insimulation 60.

PurposeUsed after replacing the backup PCB.

MethodPress the enter key.

SelectionChange the setting by pressing leading edge margin key or left margin key.

Indication 1S: Toner control voltage value (the same value as simulation 60)ON: Level where the toner feed motor is turned onOFF: Level where the toner feed motor is turned off

Indication 2TE: Toner empty levelTEHI: Copying impossible level

Indication 3Adjusted value of the toner control voltage(The toner control voltage set in simulation 60 can be changed.)

SettingChange the value of indication 3 using the mode set keys.

• Setting range: ±128 (as long as the data remains above 0)Default: 0

• The values for indications 1 and 2 automatically change corresponding tothe value for indication 3. However, the value for S in indication 1 does notchange.

• The value for indication 3 is reset to zero after simulation 60 is run.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-28

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

64 Checking toner feed motor operation

DescriptionCarries out toner replenishment.

PurposeTo check the toner feed motor operation when a toner replenishmentproblem occurs.

MethodPress the enter key. The toner feed motor turns on for 5 s and toner is fed.

• To interrupt the toner feed motor, press the stop/clear key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

65 Displaying toner sensor output

DescriptionDisplays the toner sensor output and temperature detected by thedeveloping unit thermistor.

PurposeTo check the temperature compensation of the toner sensor output.

MethodPress the enter key. The following data is shown on the display.

Display example

167 171 026

1 2 3

Note: The toner sensor output value is displayed as a decimal. Multiplying itby 0.02 gives the toner sensor output voltage.

e.g. Toner sensor output value is displayed as 185:Toner sensor output voltage = 185 × 0.02 = 3.7 (V)

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Data No. Display description

1 Toner sensor output value

2 Toner sensor output value after temperature compensation

3 Temperature detected by the developing unit thermistor (°C)

3-2-29

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

66 Entering toner sensor control level/copy count

DescriptionChecks/sets the toner control voltage and copy count which are determinedautomatically in simulation 60.

PurposeTo set the toner sensor control level and copy count to the values setautomatically in simulation 60 after the backup PCB has been replaced andsimulation 70 has been run.

MethodPress the enter key.

SelectionSelect the setting with the leading edge margin key or left margin key. Thecurrent setting value is shown on the display.

SettingChange the setting value with the mode set keys or numeric keys.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

67 Selecting operation under the empty toner condition

DescriptionSets whether to enable continuous copying after toner empty is detected.

PurposeSet according to user request.

MethodPress the enter key. The current setting value is shown on the display.

SelectionSelect the setting value with the mode set keys.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Setting description

1: SINGLE Single copying only

2: CONTINUATION Continuous copying available

Display Setting Setting range

1: START Toner control voltage 0 – 255

2: COUNTER Copy count 0 – 12000 (m)

3-2-30

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

70 Initializing backup memory 1 Caution: Clears all RAM Memory

DescriptionInitializes the contents of the backup memory.

PurposeUsed after replacing the backup PCB.

Method1. Press the enter key. The display changes from “INITIALIZING ON” to

“INITIALIZING OK”.

2. Turn the main switch off and on. The contents of the following itemshave now been initialized.

Sim No. Contents Default

25 Adjustment for prescan in reduction copy mode 026 Setting delay before original feed start 1: 0.64 sec31 Ignoring developing control 1: CANCEL

OFF35 Entering drum surface potential data for

black & white modeTRGT 224LPH ON 18

36 Entering drum surface potential data forhalf-tone mode

TRGT HLF 191LPH ON HLF 9

46 Setting fixing stabilization at low speed 2: ON53 Adjusting 100% magnification 054 Adjusting leading edge registration 055 Adjusting synchrocut length (297 mm) 056 Adjusting synchrocut length (1189 mm)

Conveying speed at the 1st roll unit(plain paper) 0Conveying speed at the 1st roll unit(tracing paper) 0Conveying speed at the 1st roll unit (film) 0Conveying speed at the 3rd roll unit(plain paper) 0Conveying speed at the 3rd roll unit(tracing paper) 0Conveying speed at the 3rd roll unit (film) 0

57 Adjusting the leading edge marginRoll unit 0Bypass table 0

3-2-31

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

58 Adjusting the trailing edge margin/displayedsynchrocut length

Trailing edge margin 0Displayed synchrocut length 0

59 Adjusting the paper cut position for specifiedlength cut mode

Short, 1st roll unit (plain paper) 0Short, 1st roll unit (tracing paper) 0Short, 1st roll unit (film) 0Short, 3rd roll unit (plain paper) 0Short, 3rd roll unit (tracing paper) 0Short, 3rd roll unit (film) 0Long, 1st roll unit (plain paper) 0Long, 1st roll unit (tracing paper) 0Long, 1st roll unit (film) 0Long, 3rd roll unit (plain paper) 0Long, 3rd roll unit (tracing paper) 0Long, 3rd roll unit (film) 0

63 Checking/changing toner control voltageAdjusted value of the toner control voltage 0

66 Entering toner sensor control level/copy countSTART 155COUNTER 0

67 Selecting operations under empty toner condition 1: SINGLE71 Selecting the maintenance cycle 1: OFF75 Entering the service telephone No. Cleared80 Switching the counter counting units 2: 1 m81 Selecting the language 1: JAPANESE82 Selecting between key counter/card KEY-CARD: 083 Selecting between metric/inch 1: CENCH84 Selecting the No. of exposure steps 1: 13 STEPS86 Switching the fixing temperature 1: JPN87 Disabling cancellation of auto shutoff function 1: ON89 Setting optional roll unit 1: NO CON-

NECT92 Setting potential correction intervals 3: ON (20 m)94 Setting the maximum copy length for multiple ORG MAX:

copy mode 140095 Setting the maximum copy length for roll/ PAPER MAX:

bypass mode 5000

Sim No. Contents Default70(cont.)

3-2-32

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

Sim No. Contents Default

96 Selecting the action after paper empty detectionPlain paper 10 sTracing paper 10 sFilm 1 s

97 Switching between front and rear ejection oforiginals

ORG PSTN (S) 1: EJECTORG PSTN (C) 2: RETURN

98 Selecting the copy count timing MODE 1115 Selecting the connection to the interface

controller 1116 Setting the time to return from the offline

condition 5117 Adjusting the leading edge registration

(when connected to the interface controller) 0132 Adjusting optical axis 0133 Adjusting the image width in the main scanning

direction 0140 Adjusting exposure amount

EXP (PLAIN) 4EXP (DARK) 4EXP (LIGHT) 4EXP (HALF PLAIN) 4EXP (HALF DARK) 4EXP (HALF LIGHT BD) 4EXP (HALF LIGHT BL) 5

141 Half-tone image quality (dark/light)HALF D 0HALF L BD 3

142 Adjusting AE optimum levelPOINT (PLAIN) 4POINT (DARK) 1POINT (LIGHT) 8MAX (PLAIN) 12MAX (DARK) 12MAX (LIGHT) 18

143 Switching filter modes MODE 1

70(cont.)

3-2-33

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

ImportantDo NOT forget to run simulation 120 after simulation 70.

70(cont.)

Sim No. Contents Default

144 Adjusting filter gainCHARACTER 1.0HALF LIGHT BD 0.5HALF LIGHT BL 0.6

145 Setting AE fine adjustment intervals 3153 Selecting current correction value MODE: 00160 Adjusting base 4 output density

DENSITY 2 0DENSITY 3 0

161 Adjusting thresholds (central exposure level)THLD BW 0THLD HLF 1 0THLD HLF 2 0THLD HLF 3 0

163 Adjusting Exp. 1.0 thresholdTHLD BW (1.0) 0THLD HLF (1.0) 0

164 Adjusting Exp. 7.0 thresholdTHLD BW (7.0) 0THLD HLF (7.0) 0

165 Setting the memory unit connection 1: NO CON-NECT

166 Selecting display of the “Output?” screen after 1: DISP ONrestart

167 Setting the AE scan 0168 Setting the maximum number of continuous

copies 1178 Selecting memory output mode 2

3-2-34

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

Intentionally Left Blank

Intentionally Left Blank

3-2-35

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

73 Displaying/clearing total paper feed count

DescriptionChecks/resets the total paper feed count.

PurposeTo check the replacement time of the maintenance parts.

MethodPress the enter key. The number of copies made since the last countsetting to the present is shown on the display.

Display example

TOTAL 1580

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-36

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

Intentionally Left Blank

3-2-37

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

75 Entering the service telephone No.

DescriptionSets the telephone number to be shown on the service call code display.

PurposeUsed after replacing the backup PCB.

MethodPress the enter key.

Setting1. Enter the telephone number with the following keys.

2. Press the enter key.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Keys to be pressedCharacters and

symbols

Numeric keys 0 – 9

Special paper select key —

Image process select key /

Original contrast key (

Auto/manual contrast select key )

Copy contrast key (dark) ∗

Copy contrast key (light) #

Decimal point Space

3-2-38

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

Intentionally Left Blank

3-2-39

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

Intentionally Left Blank

3-2-40

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

78 Displaying set data

DescriptionDisplays data settings of the simulation items.

PurposeTo check data settings.

MethodPress the enter key.

Selection1. Select the simulation No. to be checked with the leading edge margin

key and left margin key.

2. Select the type of data to be checked with the mode set keys.

The following data can be checked by this simulation.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Sim. No. Data

30* Setting drum surface potential 132* Setting drum surface potential 253 Adjusting 100% magnification54 Adjusting leading edge registration55 Adjusting synchrocut length (297 mm)56 Adjusting synchrocut length (1189 mm)57 Adjusting the leading edge margin58 Adjusting the trailing edge margin/displayed synchrocut length59 Adjusting the paper cut position for specified length cut mode60 Loading developer140 Adjusting exposure amount141 Half-tone image quality (dark/light)142 Adjusting AE optimum level153 Selecting current correction value

*Simulations 30 and 32 are for line use only.

3-2-41

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

79 Specifying addresses/displaying data

DescriptionDisplaying internal data.

PurposeNo need to run this simulation during maintenance.

MethodPress the enter key. The address No. for internal data is shown as sixbinary digits and the contents are displayed in hexadecimal.

Display example

000000 00C0

Specifying addressEnter the address by pressing numeric keys 1 to 6.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

80 Switching the counter counting units

DescriptionChanges the units used by the total counter and key counter.

PurposeTo change the counter counting units according to the paper consumption.

MethodPress the enter key.

SettingChange the counting units with the mode set keys.

1: 0.1 m2: 1 m

With the setting at 1, the total counter and key counter count up every 0.1 mof paper; with the setting at 2, they count up every 1 m.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-42

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

81 Selecting the language

DescriptionChanges the language of the messages.

PurposeTo be set according to user request.

MethodPress the enter key. The current language is shown on the display.

SelectionSelect one of the following languages with the mode set keys:

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

1 Japanese

2 English (UK)

3 German

4 French

5 Spanish

6 Dutch

7 Italian

8 English (USA)

3-2-43

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

83 Selecting between metric/inch

DescriptionSets the specification of the copier to metric or inch.

PurposeUsed after replacing the backup PCB.

MethodPress the enter key. The current setting is shown on the display.

SettingChange the setting with the mode set keys.

Setting description1: CENCH2: INCH

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

84 Selecting the No. of exposure steps

DescriptionSets the number of exposure steps.

PurposeTo be set according to user request.

MethodPress the enter key. The current setting is shown on the display.

SettingChange the setting with the mode set keys.

Setting description1: 13 STEPS2: 7 STEPS

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-44

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

85 Initializing backup memory 2

DescriptionInitializes the backup memory according to the destination.

PurposeUsed after replacing the backup PCB.

MethodPress the enter key.

SelectionSelect the destination with the mode set keys.

Initialization1. Press the enter key. The display changes from “INITIALIZING ON” to

“INITIALIZING OK”.

2. Turn the main switch off and on. The following items and the user-setcontents are initialized to the values corresponding to the destination:

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Destination

1. JPN Specification for Japan

2. OTHERS Specifications for other countries

Sim. No. ContentsDefaults

JPN OTHERS

94 Setting the maximum copy length formultiple copy mode

1400 mm 1400 mm

95 Setting the maximum copy length forroll/bypass mode

5000 mm 5000 mm

96 Selecting the action after paper empty 10 s for 1 s fordetection plain paper plain paper

3-2-45

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

86 Switching the fixing temperature

DescriptionSets the secondary fixing temperature according to the destination.

PurposeUsed after replacing the backup PCB.

MethodPress the enter key. The current setting is shown on the display.

SettingChange the setting with the mode set keys.

Setting description1: JPN (100 V areas)2: OTHERS (120 V, 200 V areas)

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

87 Disabling cancellation of auto shutoff function

DescriptionSets whether the auto shutoff function is used.

PurposeTo be set according to user request.

MethodPress the enter key. The current setting is shown on the display.

SettingChange the setting with the mode set keys.

Default 1: ON

To cancel the auto shutoff function, change the setting to OFF and select“– – –” for the time setting.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Setting description

1: ON Auto shutoff function used

2: OFF Auto shutoff function not used

3-2-46

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

89 Setting optional roll unit

DescriptionSets the installation of the 3rd roll unit.

PurposeTo be set after the optional 3rd roll unit is installed.

MethodPress the enter key. The current setting is shown on the display.

SettingChange the setting with the mode set keys.

Default 1: NO CONNECT

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

92 Setting potential correction intervals

DescriptionSets the interval for the drum potential correction.

PurposeTo set the intervals so that the drum potential is corrected whenever thebackground becomes visible due to the decline in drum quality.

MethodPress the enter key. The current setting is shown on the display.

SettingChange the setting with the mode set keys.

Default 3: ON (20 m)

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Setting description

1: NO CONNECT 3rd roll unit not installed

2: CONNECT 3rd roll unit installed

Display Setting description

1: OFF Correct potential during stabilization only

2: ON Correct potential every copy

3: ON (20 m) Correct potential every 20 m

3-2-47

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

94 Setting the maximum copy length for multiple copy mode

DescriptionSets the maximum copy length for multiple copy mode.

PurposeTo be set according to user request.

MethodPress the enter key. The maximum copy length for multiple copy mode isshown on the display.

Display example

ORG MAX: 1500

SettingChange the setting with the mode set keys. The setting can be changed insteps of 100 mm between 1400 and 5000 mm.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

95 Setting the maximum copy length for roll/bypass mode

DescriptionSets the maximum copy length for roll/bypass mode.

PurposeTo be set according to user request.

MethodPress the enter key. The maximum copy length for roll/bypass mode isshown on the display.

Display example

PAPER MAX: 1500

SettingChange the setting with the mode set keys. The setting can be changed insteps of 100 mm between 5000 and 9900 mm.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-48

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

96 Selecting the action after paper empty detection

DescriptionSets the time before the paper empty detection function is activated.

PurposeTo be set depending on the type of roll paper in each paper source.

MethodPress the enter key.

SelectionSelect the type of paper to be set with the leading edge margin key or leftmargin key. The setting value for the selected paper is shown on thedisplay.

SettingChange the setting value with the mode set keys.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Type of roll paper

1: NORMAL Plain paper

2: VELLUM Tracing paper

3: FILM Film

Settingvalue

Setting description

10 s With roll paper whose end is glued to the core

1 s With roll paper whose end is not glued to the core

3-2-49

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

97 Switching between front and rear ejection of originals

DescriptionSwitches the ejection direction of originals after copying.

PurposeTo be set according to user request.

MethodPress the enter key.

SelectionSelect the copy mode to be set with the leading edge margin key and leftmargin key. The setting value of the selected mode is shown on the display.

ORG PSTN (S): Single copy modeORG PSTN (C): Continuous copy mode

SettingChange the settings with the mode set keys.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

98 Selecting the copy count timing

DescriptionChanges the counting timing of the total counter.

PurposeSet to MODE 1 if paper jams should be included in the total count.

MethodPress the enter key. The current counting timing mode is shown on thedisplay.

SettingChange the setting with the mode set keys.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Setting Setting description

1: EJECT The original is ejected to the rear

2: RETURN The original returns to the front

Display Setting description

MODE 1 During paper feed

MODE 2 After paper ejection

3-2-50

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

99 Displaying the ROM versions

DescriptionDisplays the versions of the currently installed ROMs.

PurposeTo check the ROM versions.

MethodPress the enter key. The ROM versions are shown on the display.

SelectionChange the display of the ROM versions with the mode set keys.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

102 Gray output

DescriptionOutputs a gray test pattern.

PurposeTo check for a main PCB or LPH problem, dirty main charger wire, grid orhousing or drum problem.

MethodPress the enter key. A test pattern copy 594 mm long is ejected at graylevel 8.

Figure 3-2-1

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Type of ROM

MR1 Main control ROM 1

MR2 Main control ROM 2

ISU ISU CPU

MEM Memory unit

3-2-51

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

103 32-gradation output

DescriptionOutputs a 32-gradation test pattern with the LPH current corrected.

PurposeTo check for an LPH problem, dirty main charger wire, grid or housing ordrum problem.

See page 3-3-18.

MethodPress the enter key. A test pattern copy in 32 gradation levels is ejected.

Figure 3-2-2

InterruptionPress the job stop/roll cut key. The paper being printed is cut at themidpoint, ending the operation.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-52

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

104 32-gradation output (without compensation)

DescriptionOutputs a 32-gradation test pattern without correcting the LPH current.

PurposeTo check if the LPH current correction ROM is correctly installed to the mainPCB.

MethodPress the enter key. A test pattern copy in 32 gradation levels is ejected asin simulation 103.

Figure 3-2-3

• When white stripes appear at 8-mm intervals in simulation 104 as shownabove while the correct image is obtained during simulation 103, the LPHcurrent correction ROM is judged to be correctly installed.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-53

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

109 Setting the controller type

DescriptionSets the type of CAD controller to be used.

PurposeTo be set after installation of the interface controller.

MethodPress the enter key.

SelectionSelect the type of CAD controller with the mode set keys.

Default 1. TYPE A

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Display Setting description

1. TYPE A A controller other than OEM 1 is used with the copier.(The copier automatically enters on-line mode when theauto clear time passes after the completion of copying.)

2. TYPE B1 An OEM 1 controller is used with the copier. (The copierautomatically enters on-line mode when the auto cleartime minus 10 s passes after the completion of copying.)

3. TYPE B2 An OEM 1 controller is used with an OEM 1 copier(The copier automatically enters on-line mode 5 s afterthe completion of copying.)

3-2-54

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

110 Checking fluorescent lamp operation

DescriptionLights the fluorescent lamp.

PurposeTo check the fluorescent lamp operation.

MethodPress the enter key. The fluorescent lamp lights and the display shows thefollowing data.

Display example

1: 90 120

1 2

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Data No. Contents

1 Standard fluorescent lamp light amount

2 Current fluorescent lamp light amount

3-2-55

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

111 Checking shading compensation operation

DescriptionPerforms shading compensation and shows CIS channel data.

PurposeTo check respective channel data when solid black areas are too thin orwhite stripes appear on the copy image.

MethodPress the enter key. After shading compensation is completed, channeldata is shown on the display.

SelectionChannel data is displayed three channels at a time. To see the next three,press the leading edge margin key or the left margin key.

Display example

1: 0 2: 1 3: 1

↓ ↑

4: 0 5: 200 6: 199

↓ ↑

7: 204 8: 203

The following contents are shown:

• When the data with the lamp off is around 0 and that with the lamp on isaround 200, shading compensation is judged to be normal.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Data for sensors ch1 to ch4 with lamp off 1: 2: 3: 4:

Data for sensors ch1 to ch4 with lamp on 5: 6: 7: 8:

3-2-56

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

Data for sensors ch1 to ch4 with lamp off 1: 3: 5: 7:

Data for sensors ch1 to ch4 with lamp on 2: 4: 6: 8:

112 Checking AGC processing operation

DescriptionPerforms AGC processing and shows data of the CIS channels.

PurposeTo check for an AGC error during A-D conversion.

MethodPress the enter key. After AGC processing is completed, the display showsthe mean values for individual channels.

SelectionChannel data is displayed three channels at a time. To see the next three,press the leading edge margin key or the left margin key.

Display example

1: 0 2: 1 3: 1

↓ ↑

4: 0 5: 200 6: 199

↓ ↑

7: 204 8: 203

The following contents are shown:

• When the data with the lamp off is around 0 and that with the lamp on isaround 200, AGC processing is judged to be normal.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

113 Setting the shading mode

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-30-12.

3-2-57

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

115 Selecting the connection to the interface controller

DescriptionSelects the connection to the interface controller.

PurposeTo be run after an interface controller is installed.

MethodPress the enter key. The current setting is shown on the display.

SelectionChange the setting with the mode set keys.

1: Interface controller not connected2: Interface controller connected

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

116 Setting the time to return from the offline condition

DescriptionSets the time to automatically return to on-line mode after the completion ofcopying (completion of key operation on the operation panel).

PurposeTo be set according to user request.

MethodPress the enter key. The current setting is shown on the display.

SelectionChange the setting with the mode set keys.

1: 5 s2: 10 s3: 30 s

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

117 Adjusting the leading edge registration (when connected to theinterface controller)

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-30-13.

3-2-58

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

120 Adjusting γ correction

DescriptionPerforms γ correction.

PurposeUsed after replacing the backup PCB, ISU PCB or CIS, or after runningsimulation 70 or 121. Be sure to clean the contact glass and the middleupper original rollers before running this simulation.

MethodPress the enter key. The following operations are carried out.

DATA TRANSFERING: data transferAGC ON: AGC processingSHADING: shading compensationDATA PROCESSING: data processing

121 Adjusting gain

DescriptionAdjusts the analog voltage for A-D conversion during original scanning.

PurposeUsed after replacing the ISU PCB. Always run simulation 120 after thissimulation.

MethodPress enter key. The mean gain after shading compensation is shown foreach channel.

Display example

1: 187 2: 211 3: 196 4: 200

After replacing the ISU PCB, adjust VR1, VR3, VR4 and VR5 on the newISU PCB to set the values to 205 ± 20, ensuring that the difference betweenthe maximum and minimum values is 20 or less.

• Setting examples

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Channel ch1 (VR3) ch2 (VR1) ch3 (VR5) ch4 (VR4)

Good example 200 205 210 215

Bad example 190 200 230 220

3-2-59

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

132 Adjusting optical axis

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-30-9.

133 Adjusting the image width in the main scanning direction

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-30-10.

140 Adjusting exposure amount

DescriptionSets the exposure amounts for the respective original modes.

PurposeUsed after cleaning or replacing the fluorescent lamp or contact glass.

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-24.

MethodPress the enter key. The current exposure setting is shown on the display.

• The following data (data No., original and exposure setting) can be shownby pressing the original contrast key or auto/manual contrast select key.

SettingChange the exposure setting with the mode set keys.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

Data No. Original Exposure setting

1 EXP (PLAIN) For a normal original

2 EXP (DARK) For a dark original

3 EXP (LIGHT) For a light original

4 EXP (HALF PLAIN) For a normal original in half-tone mode

5 EXP (HALF DARK) For a dark original in half-tone mode

6 EXP (HALF LIGHT BD) For a light original (making backgrounddarker)

EXP (HALF LIGHT BL) For a light original (making backgroundlighter)

3-2-60

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

141 Adjusting half-tone image quality

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-26.

142 Adjusting AE optimum level

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-25.

143 Switching filter modes

DescriptionSwitches the contrast for copying letters.

PurposeTo be set according to user request.

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-27.

MethodPress the enter key. The current filter mode is shown on the display.

SelectionChange the setting with the mode set keys. The following modes areavailable.

MODE 1: Normal original (to decrease moiré)

MODE 2: Map original (to copy letters clearly)

Figure 3-2-4

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-61

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

144 Adjusting filter gain

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-27.

145 Setting AE fine adjustment intervals

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-25-2.

153 Selecting current correction value

DescriptionPerforms current correction so that the currents of individual LEDsconstituting the LPH are uniform and the gray output during simulation 102is even.

PurposeTo be used after the LPH has been replaced.

MethodPress the enter key. The current LPH current correction mode No. is shownon the display.

Setting1. Change the setting with the mode set keys in the range 00 to 07.

2. Press the enter key. Current correction is conducted.

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

158 Adjusting focus

AdjustmentSee page 3-3-28.

3-2-62

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

159 Solid black test pattern output

DescriptionOutputs a solid black test pattern.

PurposeTo check for a problem on the main PCB when an image problem occurs.

MethodPress the enter key. A 594-mm-long test pattern for solid black adjustmentis produced.

Figure 3-2-5

• If the correct image is output during simulations 102 and 158 but is notoutput during simulation 159, the main PCB is judged to have a problem.

Figure 3-2-6 Problem-detecting simulations

CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

160 Adjusting base 4 output density

See the memory unit service manual.

161 Adjusting thresholds (central exposure level)

See the memory unit service manual.

162 Adjusting base 4 thresholds simultaneously

See the memory unit service manual.

163 Adjusting Exp. 1.0 threshold

See the memory unit service manual.

CIS

ISUPCB MPCB LPH

Data flow

Sim 159 Sim 102 Sim 158

3-2-63

340-3

Sim.No.

Description

164 Adjusting Exp. 7.0 threshold

See the memory unit service manual.

165 Setting the memory unit connection

See the memory unit service manual.

166 Selecting display of the “Output?” screen after restart

See the memory unit service manual.

167 Setting the AE scan

See the memory unit service manual.

168 Setting the maximum number of continuous copies

See the memory unit service manual.

170 Checking the memory unit DRAM

See the memory unit service manual.

172 Checking the memory unit HDD page management area

See the memory unit service manual.

173 Formatting the memory unit HDD

See the memory unit service manual.

174 Cleaning programs 6 to 10

See the memory unit service manual.

175 Restoring programs 6 to 10

See the memory unit service manual.

176 Memory unit problem history

See the memory unit service manual.

177 Clearing the memory unit problem history

See the memory unit service manual.

178 Selecting memory output mode

See the memory unit service manual.

179 Checking the memory unit connection

See the memory unit service manual.

Sim.No.

Description

194 PM Cycle copy counterDescriptionDisplays copy count between preventive maintenance cycles.

195 Displaying/Clearing Jam/SC countersDescription Displays and clears counters for paper jams, original jams and SC’sPurposeTo check or reset the counters for paper/original jams and SC’s.MethodPress the enter key. The number of paper jams (total) is displayed.Each counter for jam location (1st roll, 2nd roll, 3rd roll or exit) can be selected using mode set keys. U: 1st roll M: 2nd roll L: 3rd rollOriginal jam counter (total) or SC counter (total) can be selected using the Image Shift Keys.Each counter can be cleared if the enter key is pressed after selecting a counter.CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

196 Clearing all countersDescriptionClears all the counters.MethodPress the enter key. Then press the enter key again to clear all the counters.CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

197 Displaying/Clearing counters by sizeDescriptionsChecks/resets the total count value of the paper feed for each paper size.MethodPress the enter key. The paper feed count for currently selected paper size is shown on the display.Select the mode (Size Magnification, Edit, or Other Modes) to be checked by pressing the image shiftkeys. Each mode has several counters which can be selected using mode set keys.Size Magnification: Enlarge/ Reduce/Full/Independence (Directional Mag.)Edit: Image Mirror/Image Inverse/Image Frame (Erase Border)Other Modes: STD-Size (Preset_/AMS/APS/Synchro-cutResetting3. Enter "0" with the numeric key.4. Press the enter key.Completion Press the stop/clear key.

198 Displaying/Clearing mode countersDescriptionsChecks/reset the total count value of each mode.MethodPress the enter key. The count for currently selected mode is shown on the display.Select the mode (Size Magnification, Edit, or Other Modes) to be checked by pressing the image shiftkeys. Each mode has several counters which can be selected using mode set keys.Size Magnification: Enlarge/Reduce/Full/Independence (Directional Mag.)Edit: Image Mirror/Image Inverse/Image Frame (Erase Border)Resetting3. Enter"0" with the numeric key.4. Press the enter key.CompletionPress the stop/clear key.

3-2-63-1

1-1-21

340-3

CONTENTS

3-3 Assembly and Disassembly

3-3-1 Cautions during disassembly and assembly ....................................... 3-3-1(1) Caution ........................................................................................ 3-3-1(2) Method of executing simulation ................................................... 3-3-2

3-3-2 Paper feed section .............................................................................. 3-3-3(1) Adjustment of 1189 mm synchro cut (adjustment of

paper feed motor speed) ............................................................. 3-3-3(2) Leading edge margin adjustment ................................................ 3-3-5(3) Adjustment of 297 mm synchro cut ............................................. 3-3-6(4) Adjustment of paper cutting position when the paper length

is specified ................................................................................... 3-3-7(5) Adjustment of displayed synchro cut length ................................ 3-3-9(6) Attachment and removal of the roll paper feed lower roller A .... 3-3-9-1(7) Attachment and removal of the roll paper conveying rear

roller B (for 2nd roll unit) ........................................................... 3-3-9-3(8) Attachment and removal of the roll paper conveying rear

roller B (for optional 3rd roll unit) .............................................. 3-3-9-5(9) Attachment and removal of the bypass feed roller ................... 3-3-9-6

(10) Attachment and removal of the roll paper conveying rearroller A ...................................................................................... 3-3-9-8

3-3-3 Main charger section ......................................................................... 3-3-10(1) Replacing the drum ................................................................... 3-3-10

(1-1) Cleaning the drum electrodes ...................................... 3-3-12-1(2) Cleaning the drum ..................................................................... 3-3-13(3) Changing the charger wire ........................................................ 3-3-14(4) Adjustment of trailing edge margin ............................................ 3-3-17(5) Checking drum surface potential ............................................... 3-3-18

3-3-4 Exposure and original feed section ................................................... 3-3-19(1) Attachment and removal of fluorescent lamp ............................ 3-3-19(2) Adjustment of 100% magnification ............................................ 3-3-22(3) Adjustment of leading edge registration .................................... 3-3-23(4) Adjustment of exposure amount ................................................ 3-3-24(5) Half tone mode image quality adjustment ................................. 3-3-26(6) Image contrast adjustment (adjustment of filter gain) ............... 3-3-27(7) Image focus adjustment (LPH height adjustment) .................... 3-3-28(8) Replacement of the ISU PCB .................................................... 3-3-30(9) Replacing the LED printhead and LPHROM PCB.................. 3-3-30-1

(10) Cleaning the LED printhead ................................................... 3-3-30-4(11) Replacement of the contact image sensor ............................. 3-3-30-5(12) Adjustment of optical axis ....................................................... 3-3-30-9(13) Adjustment of the image width in the main scanning

direction ................................................................................ 3-3-30-10(14) Adjustment for prescan in reduction copy mode .................. 3-3-30-11(15) Setting the shading mode ..................................................... 3-3-30-12(16) Adjustment of leading edge registration (when connected

to the interface controller) ..................................................... 3-3-30-13

1-1-22

340-3

3-3-5 Developing section ............................................................................ 3-3-31(1) Changing developer .................................................................. 3-3-31(2) Adjustment of doctor blade: reference ...................................... 3-3-33(3) Adjustment of position for magnetic brush: reference ............... 3-3-35(4) Replacement of the lower developing seal ................................ 3-3-36

3-3-6 Transfer/separation section .............................................................. 3-3-37(1) Replacement of charger wire .................................................... 3-3-37(2) Replacement of transfer wire .................................................... 3-3-40

3-3-7 Cleaning section ............................................................................... 3-3-42(1) Attachment and removal of the cleaning blade ......................... 3-3-42(2) Attachment and removal of lower cleaning blade ...................... 3-3-45(3) Attachment and removal of cleaning fur brush .......................... 3-3-46(4) Attachment and removal of separation claw ............................. 3-3-47

3-3-8 Fixing section .................................................................................... 3-3-48(1) Attachment and removal of fixing heaters M and S ................... 3-3-48(2) Attachment and removal of heat roller ...................................... 3-3-49(3) Attachment and removal of the press roller ............................... 3-3-52(4) Attachment and removal of oil roller .......................................... 3-3-53(5) Attachment and removal of fixing unit thermistors 1 and 2 ....... 3-3-56(6) Attachment and removal of fixing unit thermal switches

1 and 2 ...................................................................................... 3-3-57(7) Attachment and removal of fixing unit thermistors 3 and 4 ....... 3-3-58(8) Attachment and removal of the external temperature

thermistor .................................................................................. 3-3-593-3-9 Other sections ................................................................................... 3-3-60

(1) Adjusting the tension of paper feed section drive belt 1 ............ 3-3-60(2) Adjusting the tension of paper feed section drive belt 2 ............ 3-3-61(3) Adjusting the tension of the cutter drive belt ............................. 3-3-62(4) Adjusting the tension of original feed drive belt 1 ...................... 3-3-63

(4-1) Adjusting the tension of the developing drive belt ....... 3-3-63-1(5) Attachment and removal of ozone filter ..................................... 3-3-64

340

3-3-1

3-3-1 Cautions during disassembly and assembly

(1) Caution• When carrying out disassembly, be sure to turn the main switch off and pull out the power

cord before starting.• When handling PCBs avoid touching PCB connectors with the bare hands or scratching

equipment.• When ICs are used on PCBs, do not touch the board with the bare hands or with objects

charged with static electricity.• When replacing the fixing unit thermal switches (thermostats), be sure to use the specified

part. If a simple wire is used instead, damage to the machine may occur.• Use one of the testers shown below when measuring voltage:

• HIOKI 3200• SANWA MD-180C• SANWA YX-360TR• BECKMAN TECH300• BECKMAN 3030: Possible to measure RMS values• BECKMAN 330: Possible to measure RMS values• BECKMAN DM45• BECKMAN DM850: Possible to measure RMS values• FLUKE 8060A: Possible to measure RMS values• ARLEC DMM1050• ARLEC YF1030C

• Originals used.1. NTC (new test chart)2. NPTC (newspaper test chart)3. Blue graph paper

340

3-3-2

(2) Method of executing simulation

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

Input “10871087” with the numeric keys.

Input the number of simulation to be executed with the numeric keys.

Press the enter key.

The simulation is executed.

Press the stop/clear key.

Input “001” with the numeric keys and press the enter key.

Start

End

Enters simulation mode.

A simulation is selected.

Stops the simulation.

“000” is shown on the display.

The selected simulation number is shown on the display.

Exits simulation mode.

3-3-3

340-3

3-3-2 Paper feed section

Note: Follow the running order of simulations for image adjustment where indicated,otherwise the contents of the simulations may be affected and the correct copy imagemay not be obtained.

(1) Adjustment of 1189 mm synchro cut (adjustment of paper feed motor speed)Perform when the paper is not cut to the proper length when paper is A0 (1189 mm) or largeror when the cutting length differs according to the paper used (normal paper, film, tracingpaper).

Caution:• Before starting this adjustment, ensure that all the adjustments in the above simulations

are completed.• Use paper with a length of 1189 mm and draw a line 10 mm from the trailing edge of the

document.• Carry out adjustment for all the types of paper inserted in the copier.• Select the 2nd roll unit to carry out test copying. The settings for the 1st and 3rd roll units

are corrected automatically by adjusting with the 2nd roll unit selected (as standardselection).

• We recommend using paper whose width is 841 mm.

ProcedureStart.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “056” with the numeric keys.

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Select the type of paper inserted in the 2nd roll unit with the special paper select key*. ROLL L P: normal paper ROLL L V: tracing paper (vellum) ROLL L F: film

Select the 2nd roll unit (ROLL L) with the paper source key.

Insert paper in the 2nd roll unit.

A B

* Paper type selection is possible only after the machine has stabilized.

Figure 3-3-1

Original Copy example

Line

10 mm A

A: Standard value = 10 mm + 6 (to 7) mm

Sim. 53 (p. 3-3-22)

Sim. 55 (p. 3-3-6)

Sim. 56

340

3-3-4

End.

No

Yes

Yes

No

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Is length A from the line to the trailing

edge shorter than 16 mm?

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: –128 to +128 Reference: 0 Change for 1 step: 0.1 mm The larger the value, the longer the cutting length; the smaller the value, the shorter the cutting length.

Is length A from the line to the trailing

edge longer than 17 mm?

A B

3-3-5

340-3

(2) Leading edge margin adjustmentPerform when the leading edge margin of the copy image is not within the specified range.

Caution:• Before starting this adjustment, ensure that the adjustment in the above simulation is

completed.• Select the 2nd roll unit to carry out test copying for roll paper feed adjustment. The

difference in leading edge margin in normal copy operation for each roll unit is minimizedby adjusting with the 2nd roll unit selected (as standard selection).

Procedure

Figure 3-3-2

Start.

End.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “057” with the numeric keys.

No

Yes

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

- - - - - The test pattern is output.

Exit simulation mode.

Is leading edge margin A

5 ± 1 mm?

Change the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: –128 to +128 Reference: 0 Change for 1 step: 0.3 mm The larger the value, the wider the leading edge margin of the copy image; the smaller the value, the narrower the leading edge margin.

Select the paper feed position to which the paper is set with the paper source key. 1. ROLL: 2nd roll unit 2. BYPASS: bypass table

Insert the paper in the 2nd roll unit or the bypass table.

A = 5 ± 1 mm

Test pattern

Sim. 53 (p. 3-3-22)

Sim. 57

3-3-6

340-3

(3) Adjustment of 297 mm synchro cutPerform when the paper is not cut to the proper length when carrying out synchro cut copywith a paper less than A0 (1189 mm) size.

Caution:• Before starting this adjustment, ensure that all the adjustments in the above simulations

are completed.• Use paper with a length of 297 mm and draw a line 10 mm from the trailing edge of the

document.• Select the 2nd roll unit to carry out test copying. The difference in cutting length in normal

copy operation for each roll unit is minimized by adjusting with the 2nd roll unit selected(as standard selection).

Procedure Start.

End.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “055” with the numeric keys.

Yes

Yes

No

No

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Exit simulation mode.

Is length A from the line to the trailing edge shorter

than 14 mm?

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: –128 to +78 Reference: 0 Change for 1 step: 0.922 mm The larger the value, the longer the cutting length; the smaller the value, the shorter the cutting length.

Select the 2nd roll unit with the paper source key.

Insert the paper in the 2nd roll unit.

Is length A from the line to the trailing edge longer

than 15 mm?

Figure 3-3-3

Original Copy example

Line

10 mm A

A: Standard value = 10 mm + 4 (to 5) mm

Sim. 53 (p. 3-3-22)

Sim. 55

3-3-7

340-3

(4) Adjustment of paper cutting position when the paper length is specifiedPerform when the paper is not cut to the proper length when executing fixed length copiesor when the cutting length differs according to the paper used (normal paper, film, tracingpaper).

Caution:• Before starting this adjustment, ensure that all the adjustments in the above simulations

are completed.• Carry out adjustment for all the types of paper inserted in the copier.• Select the 1st roll unit to carry out test copying. The settings for the 2nd and 3rd roll units

are corrected automatically by adjusting with the 1st roll unit selected (as standardselection).

Procedure

Start.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “059” with the numeric keys.

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Select the type of paper inserted in the 1st roll unit (normal paper, tracing paper, film) with the special paper select key. P: normal paper V: tracing paper (vellum) F: film

Select the 1st roll unit with the paper source key.

Insert the paper in the 1st roll unit.

Select the size to be adjusted with the leading edge margin key. SHORT: small size (specified length: 297 mm) LONG: large size (specified length: 1189 mm)

A B C

The paper is cut and ejected automatically.

Figure 3-3-4

Paper cut length: A

A

A: Standard value =

297 ± 1 mm (for specified length: 297 mm)1189 ± 1 mm (for specified length: 1189 mm)

Sim. 53 (p. 3-3-22)

Sim. 59

Sim. 55 (p. 3-3-6)

Sim. 56 (p. 3-3-3)

340

3-3-8

End.

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the paper cut shorter than specified

length A?

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: –128 to +128 Reference: 0 Change for 1 step: 0.922 mm The larger the value, the longer the cutting length; the smaller the value, the shorter the cutting length.

Is the paper cut longer than specified

length A?

No

A B C

Adjust for the other size?

Cutter Unit Removal

1. Remove the lower rear cover and the lower left cover. Secure the cutter home position sensor disk using 1 screw.2. Remove the developer collection box, and remove the stepped screw.3. Remove the 4 screws securing the paper guide. Then turn the paper guide to remove it (1 connector).4. Remove the two cutter stoppers (4 screws each). Then remove the guide plate (2 screws).5. Remove the cutter unit (4 screws).

Caution: Be careful that the cutter blade does not damage your hand.

Note: When reinstalling the cutterunit, ensure that the cutter is in thehome position as shown.

3-3-8-1

Developer Collection Box

Stepped Screw

Paper Guide

Guide Plate

Cutter Unit

Cutter Stopper

Cutting Ready Position

Cutter Blade

Home Position

Cutting Ready Position

Interrupted

Not Interrupted

Cutter Home Position

3-3-9

340-3

(5) Adjustment of displayed synchro cut lengthPerform when the synchro cut length shown on the display is different from the actual cutlength.

Procedure

Start.

End.

Enter simulation mode.

Select “SYNCHRO ADJ” with the leading edge margin key.

Input “058” with the numeric keys.

Yes

Yes

No

No

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Check the synchro cut length shown on the display.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the displayed value

smaller than the actual cut length?

Is the displayed value

larger than the actual cut length?

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: –128 to +128 Change for 1 step: 1 mm The larger the setting, the larger the displayed value; the smaller the setting, the smaller the displayed value.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Press the stop/clear key.

Press the stop/clear key.

3-3-10

340-2

3-3-9-1

(6) Attachment and removal of the roll paper feed lower roller AFollow the procedure below when cleaning or replacing the roll paper feed lower roller A.

Procedure1. Remove the front covers.2. Remove the 1st roll unit from the main unit (two screws on each side).

Figure 3-3-4(a)

3. Remove the four screws and the roll paper feed lower guide A.

Roll unit Roll unit

Figure 3-3-4(b)

3-3-11

340-2

3-3-9-2

4. Remove the six screws and spring then the slider right attachment plate.

Figure 3-3-4(c)

5. Remove the E-ring, drive gear 20T and pin.6. Remove the E-ring and bearing.

Figure 3-3-4(d)

3-3-12

340-2

3-3-9-3

7. Remove the E-ring on the right side of the roll paper feed lower roller A and removethe bearing.

8. Remove the E-ring and bearing from the hinge section by moving it in the direction ofthe arrow. Remove the roll paper feed lower roller A from the roll unit.

9. Remove the bearing from the roll paper feed lower roller A.10. After cleaning or replacement, refit the removed parts to their original positions.

Figure 3-3-4(e)

(7) Attachment and removal of the roll paper conveying rear roller B (for 2nd rollunit)

Procedure1. Remove the front covers, lower left cover and lower right side cover.2. Remove the 2nd roll unit from the main unit (two screws on each side: see Figure

3-3-4(a), page 3-3-9-1).3. Remove the middle feed clutch.4. Remove the E-ring and the bearing retaining the roll paper conveying rear roller B from

the outside of the left side plate.

Figure 3-3-4(f)

3-3-13

340-2

3-3-9-4

5. Remove the main PCB (lower right side of equipment).6. Remove the E-ring and the bearing retaining the roll paper conveying rear roller B from

the outside of the right side plate.

Figure 3-3-4(g)

7. Remove the roll paper conveying rear roller B from the main unit.• When attaching, make sure that the longer of the two thin ends of the shaft is

positioned on the left as shown in the figure.8. After cleaning or replacement, refit the removed parts to their original positions.

Figure 3-3-4(h)

3-3-14

340-2

3-3-9-5

(8) Attachment and removal of the roll paper conveying rear roller B (for optional3rd roll unit)

Follow the procedure below when cleaning or replacing roll paper conveying rear roller B(for optional 3rd roll unit).

Procedure1. Remove the front covers, lower left cover and lower right side cover.2. Remove the 3rd roll unit from the main unit (two screws on each side: see Figure

3-3-4(a), page 3-3-9-1).3. Remove the lower feed clutch4. Remove the E-ring and the bearing retaining the roll paper conveying rear roller B form

the outside of the left side plate.

Figure 3-3-4(i)

5. Remove the power source PCB (lower right side of the equipment).6. Remove the E-ring and the bearing retaining the roll paper conveying rear roller B from

the outside of the right side plate.

Figure 3-3-4(j)

3-3-15

340-2

3-3-9-6

7. Remove the roll paper conveying rear roller B from the main unit.• When attaching, make sure that the longer of the two thin ends of the shaft is

positioned on the left as shown in the figure.8. After cleaning or replacement, refit the removed parts to their original positions.

Figure 3-3-4(k)

(9) Attachment and removal of the bypass feed rollerFollow the procedure below when cleaning or replacing the bypass feed roller.

Procedure1. Remove the front covers and the lower left cover.2. Remove the 1st roll unit from the main unit (two screws each on the left and right: see

Figure 3-3-4(a), page 3-3-9-1).3. Remove the bypass feed clutch.4. Remove the bearing retaining the bypass feed roller from the outside of the left side

plate.

Figure 3-3-4(l)

3-3-16

340-2

3-3-9-7

5. Open the upper right side cover and remove the waste toner tank.6. Remove the E-ring and the bearing retaining the bypass feed roller from the outside of

the right side plate.

Figure 3-3-4(m)

7. Remove the bypass feed roller from the main unit.• When attaching, make sure that the longer of the two thin ends of the shaft is

positioned on the left as shown in the figure.8. After cleaning or replacement, refit the removed parts to their original positions.

Figure 3-3-4(n)

3-3-17

340-2

3-3-9-8

(10) Attachment and removal of the roll paper conveying rear roller AFollow the procedure below when cleaning or replacing roll paper conveying rear roller A.

Procedure1. Remove the lower rear cover and lower left cover.2. Remove the roller paper conveying clutch.3. Remove the E-ring and the bearing retaining the roll paper conveying rear roller A from

the outside of the left plate.

Figure 3-3-4(o)

4. Open the upper right side cover and remove the waste toner tank.5. Remove the E-ring and the bearing retaining the roll paper conveying rear roller A from

the outside of the right side plate.

Figure 3-3-4(p)

3-3-18

340-2

3-3-9-9

6. Remove the roll paper conveying rear roller A from the main unit.• When attaching, make sure that the longer of the two thin ends of the shaft is

positioned on the left as shown in the figure.7. After cleaning or replacement, refit the removed parts to their original positions.

Figure 3-3-4(q)

3-3-19

340-2

This page is intentionally left blank.

340

3-3-10

3-3-3 Main charger section

(1) Replacing the drumReplace the drum as follows.

Caution :After replacing the drum be sure to clean the main charger assembly and check the drumsurface potential (see page 3-3-18) after coating the cleaning blade with toner (simulationNo. 40).

Procedure1. Detach the cleaning assembly.2. Turn the flywheel clockwise to disengage the flywheel joint from the drum flange.

• When pulling the flywheel, align the screw head on the flywheel shaft with the cutoutin the flywheel stopper.

• When refitting the drum, turn the flywheel clockwise until it clicks to engage the drumflange with the flywheel joint.

Flywheel

Screw headCutout

Flywheel shaft

Flywheel stopper

Figure 3-3-5

340

3-3-11

3. Remove the screw on the drum left rail guide.4. While holding the drum release plate toward the drum, slide the drum left rail guide

toward the machine rear. The drum release plate is locked and the drum flange isunlocked from the drive joint.

Drum release plate

Drum left rail guide

Figure 3-3-6

5. Loosen the two screws of the drum right and left stoppers holding both ends of the drumand unlock the stoppers.

Screws

Drum left stopper Drum right stopper

Figure 3-3-7

340-1

340

3-3-12

6. Remove the screw and raise the drum right rail guide.7. Attach the screw removed in step 6 to part A so that the main unit is kept open.8. Roll the drum toward you along the drum right rail guide.9. Detach the drum from the main unit.

Drum right rail guide

Drum

A

Figure 3-3-8

10. After replacement, return the parts to their original positions.• When the drum has been replaced, fit the drum right flange to the end with the label

inside of the drum.

Drum

Drum right flange

Label

Electrode

Figure 3-3-8 (a)

340-1

340

3-3-13

(1-1) Cleaning the drum electrodes

Procedure• Cleaning the electrode on the drum right flange1. Detach the cleaning assembly.2. Remove the screw on the drum left rail guide (see page 3-3-11).3. While pressing the drum release plate toward the drum, slide the drum left rail guide

toward the machine rear. The drum release plate is locked and the drum flange isunlocked from the drive joint (see page 3-3-11).

4. Remove the screw and open the right upper side cover.5. While turning the flywheel, clean the outer periphery of the electrode on the drum right

flange with alcohol.

Electrode FlywheelDrum right flange

Figure 3-3-8 (b)

• Cleaning the electrode on the drum right holder1. Detach the drum from the main unit.2. Clean the drum electrode, the part in contact with the electrode on the drum right flange,

using alcohol.

Drum right holderDrum electrode

Figure 3-3-8 (c)

340-1

3-3-12-1

340

3-3-14

340-1

This page is intentionally left blank.

340

3-3-13

(2) Cleaning the drumFollow the procedure below when image errors occur.

Caution:• Avoid direct sunlight and strong light when cleaning the drum.• Dust in the air and from the cleaning pad may damage the drum during operation. Avoid

working in dusty place.• Clean the drum entirely even if it is only dirty locally.• Do not clean the drum with alcohol, thinner or other organic solvent.

Required supplies• Toner• Polishing cloth: specified synthetic cotton

Procedure1. Detach the drum from the main unit.2. Apply a polishing cloth to the drum and gently wipe the drum taking care not to damage

the surface.3. Apply toner to another cloth and wipe the drum surface with it in the same manner.4. Refit the drum and all the removed parts, and let the copier stand for about 30 minutes.5. Make a test copy and check the image.

Polishing clothDrum

Figure 3-3-9

340

3-3-14

(3) Changing the charger wireFollow the procedure below when the charger wire is broken or when replacing the chargerwire.

Caution:• Use the specified tungsten wire for the charger wire. (Item No. 74716280, Anodized

tungsten wire, 0.08 mm)• The section wound around the charger spring should not protrude from the main charger

housing.• The end of the charger wire should not protrude from under the screw.• Be sure to use tungsten wire that is free of soiling or damage.• Keep the charger wire taut by stretching the charger spring.• When changing the charger wire, be sure to clean the individual sections of the main

charger assembly (inside of charger housing, etc).• Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol and thinner to clean the main charger

shied.

Procedure1. Detach the cleaning assembly.2. Rotate the main charger assembly in the direction shown by the arrow and detach the

main charger assembly from the cleaning assembly.

Main charger assembly

Cleaning assembly

Figure 3-3-10

340-1

340

3-3-15

3. Remove the right and left main charger lids.4. Remove the charger spring from the main charger terminal and loosen the screw to

remove the charger wire.

Main charger terminal

Charger spring

Main charger left lid

Main charger right lid

Washer

Screw

Tungsten wire

Figure 3-3-11

5. Wind the tungsten wire five turns around one end of the charger spring, and trim the endof the wire.• The length of the cut wire must be less than 1 mm.

1 Fold over the end of the tungsten wire.

3 Wind five turns.

2 Pass the folded end through the end of the charger spring.

Figure 3-3-11 (a)

340-1

340

3-3-16

6. Hook the charger spring to the main charger terminal and pass the tungsten wire throughthe opening in the wire adjustment plate.

7. Pass the tungsten wire under the washer and fasten it with the screw keeping thecharger wire stretched so that the charger spring is at least 16 mm long.

8. Cut off the excess wire under the washer so less than 2 mm protrudes.

Screw

Washer

Trim

2 mm or less

Tungsten wire

1 mm or less

Wire adjuster

16 mm or longer

Main charger terminal

Wind (5 mm or less)

Figure 3-3-12

9. Turn the adjustment screw of the wire adjustment plate until 1.0 ± 0.5 mm of its tipprotrudes to adjust the height of the wire adjustment plate.

Wire adjustment plate

Adjustment screw

1.0 ± 0.5 mm

Figure 3-3-13

340-1

3-3-17

340-3

(4) Adjustment of trailing edge marginFollow the procedure below when the correct trailing edge margin (border erase width)cannot be obtained in border erase mode.

Caution:• Before starting this adjustment, ensure that all the adjustments in the above simulations

are completed.• Select the 2nd roll unit to carry out test copying for roll paper feed adjustment. The

difference in trailing edge margin in normal copy operation for each roll unit is minimizedby adjusting with the 2nd roll unit selected (as standard selection).

Procedure

Start.

End.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “058” with the numeric keys.

No

Yes

Press the enter key.

Select “REAR BLANK ADJ” with the leading edge margin key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the trailing edge margin equal to the initial border erase width

setting?

Change the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: –128 to +128 Reference: 0 Change for 1 step: 0.3 mm The larger the value, the longer the trailing edge margin; the smaller the value, the shorter the trailing edge margin.

Select the paper feed position in which the paper is inserted (2nd roll unit, bypass table) with the paper source key.

Insert the paper in the 2nd roll unit or bypass table.

Press the stop/clear key.

Select “Paper Length” with the paper length key.

Select “Border Erase” with the image process select key.

Figure 3-3-14

Original Copy example

Trailing edge margin

Sim. 53 (p. 3-3-22)

Sim. 59 (p. 3-3-7)

Sim. 58

Sim. 55 (p. 3-3-6)

Sim. 56 (p. 3-3-3)

3-3-18

340-3

(5) Checking drum surface potentialFollow the procedure below after replacing the drum, LPH and drum potential sensor.

Procedure

Test pattern 1

Approx. 3 cm

Test pattern 2 Test pattern 3

The image is visible from around the 6th tone for test pattern 1, from around the 3rd tone for test pattern 2, and from around the 9th tone for test pattern 3.

63

9

Start.

End.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “103” with the numeric keys.

No

Yes

Press the enter key.*

Input “035” with the numeric keys and press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the copy image correct

(test pattern 1)?

Select “TRGT” with the leading edge margin or left margin key.

Change the setting with the mode set keys.

The test pattern is output.

Press the stop/clear key.

*To abort test pattern output, press the job stop/roll cut key.

Figure 3-3-15

3-3-19

340-3

3-3-4 Exposure and original feed section

(1) Attachment and removal of fluorescent lampFollow the procedure below when cleaning or replacing the fluorescent lamp.

Caution :After cleaning or replacing the fluorescent lamp, select copy contrast indicator 4 and makea test copy to check the image in each original mode.If an exposure error occurs in the test copy, adjust the exposure amount (see page 3-3-24).

Procedure1. Open the original holding section.2. Remove the operation section.3. Remove the two screws and remove the left and right center original covers.

Figure 3-3-16

Screw

Left center original cover

Right center original cover

Screw

3-3-20

340-3

4. Remove the four screws and the right and left contact glass retainers.5. Remove the contact glass.6. Remove the hinge left cover and upper left cover.

Figure 3-3-17

Screws

Hinge left cover

Contact glass

Contact glass retainer

Upper left cover

Screws

Contact glass

Contact glass retainer

3-3-21

340-3

7. Remove the two screws securing the fluorescent lamp socket mount at the machineleft.

8. Remove the fluorescent lamp by pulling it out of the fluorescent lamp heater.• When reattaching the fluorescent lamp, be sure to orient it with the manufacturer's

mark on the right side of the copier.9. After cleaning or replacing, return the parts to their original positions.

Manufacturer’s mark

Fluorescent lamp

Fluorescent lamp socket mount Fluorescent lamp

Screws

Figure 3-3-18

3-3-22

340-3

(2) Adjustment of 100% magnificationFollow the procedure below when the magnification is not obtained.

Caution:• Select the 2nd roll unit to carry out test copying for roll paper feed adjustment. The

difference in magnification in normal copy operation for each roll unit is minimized byadjusting with the 2nd roll unit selected (as standard selection).

Procedure

Start.

End.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “053” with the numeric keys.

No

No

Yes

Yes

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the magnification correct in

the main scanning direction?

Select the mode to be adjusted with the leading edge margin key. SIZE ADJ M P: normal paper SIZE ADJ M V: tracing paper (vellum) SIZE ADJ M F: film

Change the value with the mode set keys.

Select the mode to be adjusted with the leading edge margin key. SIZE ADJ S P: normal paper SIZE ADJ S V: tracing paper (vellum) SIZE ADJ S F: film

Setting range: –3.0% to +3.0% Reference: 0 Change for 1 step: 0.1% The larger the value, the longer the copy image; the smaller the value, the shorter the copy image.

Select the 2nd roll unit with the paper source key.

Select the type of paper inserted in the 2nd roll unit with the special paper select key. SIZE ADJ M P: normal paper SIZE ADJ M V: tracing paper (vellum) SIZE ADJ M F: film

Is the magnification correct in

the sub scanning direction?

Insert the paper in the 2nd roll unit.

Figure 3-3-19

Main scanning direction

Sub scanning direction

3-3-23

340-3

(3) Adjustment of leading edge registrationFollow the procedure below when there is a regular error between the leading edges of theoriginal and the copy image.

Caution:• Before starting this adjustment, ensure that all the adjustments in the above simulations

are completed.• Draw a line 10 mm from the leading edge of the document.

Procedure

Figure 3-3-20

Start.

End.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “054” with the numeric keys.

Yes

Yes

No

No

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Exit simulation mode.

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: –128 to +128 Reference: 0 Change for 1 step: 4 ms The larger the value, the earlier the original image read-in timing; the smaller the value, the later the original image read-in timing.

Is length A from the line to the

leading edge shorter than 10 mm (copy example 1)?

Is length A from the line to the

leading edge longer than 10 mm (copy example 2)?

Sim. 53 (p. 3-3-22)

Sim. 57 (p. 3-3-5)

Sim. 54

10 mm

Line

Original Copy example 1

Copy example2

A A

340-3

(4) Adjustment of exposure amountFollow the procedure below when cleaning or replacing the fluorescent lamp and contactglass, or when an image error occurs on test copies.Also, perform when it is not possible to obtain a good copy image when a correct mode isselected for the original.

• Adjustment for black & white (character) modeRequired originals• When adjusting in the normal original mode: Test chart• When adjusting in the dark original mode: Newspaper test chart (NPTC)• When adjusting in the light original mode: Blue graph paper

Procedure

Enter simulation mode.

Input “140” with the numeric keys.

Yes

Yes

No

No

Start.

End.

Press the enter key.

Select the original mode to be adjusted with the original contrast or auto/manual contrast select key. EXP(PLAIN): normal original mode EXP(DARK): dark original mode EXP(LIGHT): light original mode

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Is the image too light? (Copy example 1)

Is the image too dark? (Copy example 2)

Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: 0 to 8 Reference: 4 The larger the value, the lighter the copy image; the smaller the value, the darker the copy image.

Original Copy example 1

Copy example 2

AA A

A AA

A A

A AA

A A

A A

Figure 3-3-20(a)

3-3-24

340-3

• Adjustment for half tone modeRequired originals• When adjusting in the normal original mode: Test chart• When adjusting in the dark original mode: Dark poster• When adjusting in the light original mode (dark background): Map• When adjusting in the light original mode (light background): Test chart

Procedure

Enter simulation mode.

Input “140” with the numeric keys.

Yes

Yes

No

No

Start.

End.

Press the enter key.

Select the original mode to be adjusted with the original contrast or auto/manual contrast select key. EXP (HALF-PLAIN): normal original mode EXP (HALF-DARK): dark original mode EXP (HALF-LIGHT-BD): light original mode (dark background) EXP (HALF-LIGHT-BL): light original mode (light background)

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit the simulation mode.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Is the image too light? (Copy example 1)

Is the image too dark? (Copy example 2)

Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: 0 to 8 Reference: EXP (HALF-PLAIN): 4 EXP (HALF-DARK): 4 EXP (HALF-LIGHT-BD): 4 EXP (HALF-LIGHT-BL): 5 The larger the value, the lighter the copy image; the smaller the value, the darker the copy image.

Original Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 3-3-20(b)

3-3-24-1

340-3

This page is intentionally left blank.

340-3

Enter simulation mode.

Input “142” with the numeric keys.

No

Yes

Start.

End.

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Is the image too dark?

Decrease the value with the mode set keys. Setting ranges POINT mode: 0 to 15 MAX mode: 0 to 24 References POINT(PLAIN): 4 MAX(PLAIN): 12 POINT(DARK): 1 MAX(DARK): 12 POINT(LIGHT): 8 MAX(LIGHT): 18 Caution: The POINT mode settings should be smaller than their corresponding MAX mode values. The larger the value, the darker the image; the smaller the value, the lighter the image.

Select the original mode to be adjusted with the leading edge margin or left margin key. POINT (PLAIN): normal original mode POINT (DARK): dark original mode POINT (LIGHT): light original mode

No

Is the image too light?

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Yes

• Adjustment of AE optimum level

Caution:Do not change the MAX mode settings.

Procedure

3-3-25

340-3

3-3-25-1

Examples of required originals and correct images

POINT (PLAIN)

AAAA

AAAA

AAAA

MAX (PLAIN)

AAAA

AAAA

AAAA

MAX (DARK)

AAAA

AAAA

AAAA

MAX (LIGHT)POINT (LIGHT)

POINT (DARK)

• Few black solid areas • Clear high contrast black lines or

characters Example: Plotter prints

• Comparatively many black solid areas • High contrast solid black lines or

characters Example: Posters

• Comparatively many black solid areas • Solid black lines or characters • Visible background Example: Posters with a

photograph/colored background

• Few black solid areas • Clear high contrast black lines or

characters • Visible background Example: Diazo prints

• Characters are not solid black • Visible background Example: Posters with a

photograph/colored background

• Few black solid areas • Lower contrast and less solid black

lines or characters Example: Pencil drawings

POINT

MAX

POINT

MAX

POINT

MAX

Ajustment for normal original mode:

Ajustment for dark original mode:

Ajustment for light original mode:

Figure 3-3-20(c)

340-3

3-3-25-2

• Setting AE fine adjustment intervalsFollow the procedure below when the copy density range is too narrow after the copy densityhas been adjusted with the copy contrast keys in auto contrast mode.

Required original• Test chart

Procedure

Enter simulation mode.

Input “145” with the numeric keys.

Yes

No

No

Start.

End.

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Make test copies at Exp. 4 and Exp. 5 in auto contrast mode and compare the copy density.

Is the copy density range too narrow? (Copy example 1)

Is the copy density range too wide?

(Copy example 2)

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Yes Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: 0 to 8 Reference value: 3 The larger the value, the wider the range of copy density; the smaller the value, the narrower the range of copy density.

EXP.4 Copy example 1 (EXP.5)

Copy example 2 (EXP.5)

Figure 3-3-20(d)

The setting in simulation 142 shifts asthe value in simulation 145 changes.The copy image becomes lighter ordarker based on the LPH output datacorresponding to the scanned imagedata in auto contrast mode.

Scanned image data

LPH

out

put d

ata

0

0 33

0

32

255

Dark

light

Setting value in simulation 145

Setting in simulation 142

88

Figure 3-3-20(e)

340-3

(5) Half tone mode image quality adjustmentFollow the procedure below to adjust the image density to make clear copies of originals withcharacters and photographs or dark posters in half tone mode.

• Adjusting for half tone light original modeRequired original• Original with characters and photographs

Procedure

Enter simulation mode.

Input “141” with the numeric keys.

No

Start.

End.

Press the enter key.

Select “HALF L BL” with the leading edge margin or left margin key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Is the solid black area too thick?

Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: –6 to +14 Reference: 3 The larger the value, the thicker the image; the smaller the value, the thinner the image.

Yes

No

Is the solid black area too thin?

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Yes

3-3-26

ABCDEFG HIJKLMNO PQRSTUV

ABCDEFG HIJKLMNO PQRSTUV

Correct image Incorrect image

Figure 3-3-20(f)

340-3

• Adjusting for half tone dark original modeRequired original• Dark poster

Procedure

Enter simulation mode.

Input “141” with the numeric keys.

No

Start.

End.

Press the enter key.

Select “HALF D” with the leading edge margin or left margin key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Is the solid black area too thin?

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: –6 to +14 Reference: 0 The larger the value, the thicker the image; the smaller the value, the thinner the image.

YesIs the solid black area too thick?

Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

Yes

No

Correct image

Incorrect image

Figure 3-3-20(g)

3-3-26-1

340-3

This page is intentionally left blank.

340-3

(6) Image contrast adjustment (adjustment of filter gain)Follow the procedure below to make characters clear.

• Adjustment for black & white (character) modeRequired original• Test chart

Procedure

Input “144” with the numeric keys.

No

Yes

End.

Press the enter key.

Select “CHARACTER” with the leading edge margin or left margin key.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “143” with the numeric keys.

Start.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Select “MODE 2” with the enter key.

Change the value with the mode set keys.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Is the image contrast correct?

Setting range: 0.1 to 1.9 Reference: 1.0 The larger the value, the stronger the image contrast; the smaller the value, the weaker the image contrast.

Correct image Incorrect image

A AAA AAA AA

A AAA AAA AA

Figure 3-3-20(h)

3-3-27

340-3

• Adjustment for half tone light original mode (dark background)Required original• Map

Procedure

Input “144” with the numeric keys.

No

Yes

End.

Press the enter key.

Select “HALF LIGHT BD” with the leading edge margin or left margin key.

Enter simulation mode.

Start.

Change the value with the mode set keys.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Is the image contrast correct?

Setting range: 0.1 to 1.9 Reference: 0.5 The larger the value, the stronger the image contrast; the smaller the value, the weaker the image contrast.

Correct image

Incorrect image

Figure 3-3-20(i)

3-3-27-1

340-3

• Adjusting for half tone light original mode (light background)Required original• Test chart

Procedure

Input “144” with the numeric keys.

No

Yes

End.

Press the enter key.

Select “HALF LIGHT BL” with the leading edge margin or left margin key.

Enter simulation mode.

Start.

Change the value with the mode set keys.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Setting range: 0.1 to 1.9 Reference 0.6 The larger the value, the stronger the contrast; the smaller the value, the weaker the contrast.

Is the tone grada-tion clear?

Correct image

Incorrect image

Figure 3-3-20(j)

3-3-27-2

340

3-3-28

(7) Image focus adjustment (LPH height adjustment)Perform after replacing the LPH.

Procedure1. Enter simulation mode.2. Input “158” with the numeric keys.3. Press the enter key. A test pattern is printed out.

Figure 3-3-21 Test pattern

4. Using a magnifier, check if the lines of the smaller pattern are clearly printed.5. Detach the developing assembly from the main unit.6. Remove the three screws and the LPH lower partition.7. Loosen the six screws holding the LPH.

LPH screws

LPH lower partition

Figure 3-3-22

340

3-3-29

8. Close the LPH lower partition and retighten the three screws.9. Refit the developing assembly to the main unit.

10. Press the enter key and check the test pattern printout.11. Adjust the height of the LPH by turning the adjustment pins on the machine right and

left.• Turn the adjustment pins clockwise (e) to raise the LPH. Turn them counterclockwise

(b) to lower the LPH.

LPH height adjustment pins LPH lower partition

Figure 3-3-23

12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 until the correct test pattern is obtained.13. Press the stop/clear key.14. Exit simulation mode.15. Detach the developing assembly from the main unit.16. Open the LPH lower partition and tighten the six screws for the LPH.

• Fasten one of the two LPH retainers with the lower edges of the pins in contact withthe lower edges of the slots, using the two screws. Fasten the other retainer with theupper edges of the pins in contact with the upper edges of the slots.

17. Close the LPH lower partition and tighten the three screws.18. Refit the developing assembly to the main unit.

Screws

Pins

LPH retainers

Figure 3-3-23 (a)

340-1

340

3-3-30

(8) Replacement of the ISU PCB

Procedure1. Open the main unit.2. Remove the three screws and pull out the ISU mount.3. Remove all the connectors inserted into the ISU PCB.4. Remove the four screws and the ISU PCB.

ISU PCB

ISU mount

Figure 3-3-24

5. Adjust controls VR1, VR3, VR4 and VR5 on the new ISU PCB to their original positionson the old ISU PCB.

ISU PCB

VR3VR1 VR5

VR4

Figure 3-3-25

6. Fit the new ISU PCB to the ISU mount with the four screws.7. Insert the ISU mount and tighten the three screws.8. Close the main unit.9. Execute simulation No. 121 “Adjusting gain” (see page 3-2-30-1).

10. Execute simulation No. 120 “Adjusting γ correction” (see page 3-2-30-1).

340-1

340-1

3-3-30-1

(9) Replacing the LED printhead and LPHROM PCBReplace the LED printhead as follows.

Caution:Always replace the LED printhead and LPHROM PCB as a set. After replacing the LEDprinthead, be sure to adjust the image focus (simulation No. 158: see page 3-3-28).

Procedure1. Remove the lower left cover, lower rear cover, developing assembly, cleaning assembly

and drum.2. Remove the 5P connector of the drum potential sensor and pull it out via the opening

in the left frame.

5P connector

Figure 3-3-25 (a)

3. Remove the three screws and the LPH lower partition.4. Remove the two screws and the two LPH retainers.

Screws

Screw

Screw

Screw

LPH lower partition

LPH retainer LPH retainer

Figure 3-3-25 (b)

340-1

3-3-30-2

5. Remove the two pins.6. Remove the 8P and 60P connectors.7. Take out the LED printhead.

Pin Pin

LED printhead

8P connector 60P connector

Figure 3-3-25 (c)

8. Remove the seven screws and the main PCB cover.9. Remove the two screws, and remove the LPHROM PCB connectors from the main PCB.

Screws

Screws

Main PCB cover

Screws

Main PCB

LPHROM PCB

Figure 3-3-25 (d)

340-1

3-3-30-3

10. Remove the four screws and then the LPH right and left positioning plates & LPHcleaning spring plate.

11. Remove the LPH cleaning lever.

Screws

LPH left positioning plate

LPH right positioning plate

Screw

Screw

LPH cleaning lever

LPH cleaning spring plate

LED printhead

Figure 3-3-25 (e)

12. Refit all the removed parts.

340-1

3-3-30-4

(10) Cleaning the LED printheadPerform the following cleaning when the copy image is faint or a white line appearslongitudinally.

Procedure1. Detach the cleaning assembly, drum and developing assembly.2. Remove the three screws and open the LPH lower partition.3. Slide the LPH cleaning lever back and forth once.

LPH lower partition

Screw

Screw

Screw

LPH cleaning lever

Figure 3-3-25 (f)

4. Refit all the removed parts.

340-1

3-3-30-5

(11) Replacement of the contact image sensorReplace the contact image sensor as follows.

Procedure1. Detach the cleaning assembly and drum.2. Open the upper right side cover (one screw) and detach the lower left cover, operation

unit, left center original cover, right center original cover, hinge left cover, hinge rightcover, upper left cover and upper right cover.

3. Remove the 4P connectors of the fluorescent lamp and fluorescent lamp heater.

Fluorescent lamp heater 4P connector

Fluorescent lamp 4P connector

Figure 3-3-25 (g)

4. Remove the three screws and pull out the ISU mount.5. Remove all the connectors connected to the ISU PCB.

ISU PCB ISU mount

Screw

Screw

Screw

Figure 3-3-25 (h)

340-1

3-3-30-6

6. Remove the two pins and the ISU mount.

Pin

Pin

ISU mount

Figure 3-3-25 (i)

7. Remove the four bundles of contact image sensor wires from the five wire retainers.

Wire retainers

Figure 3-3-25 (j)

340-1

3-3-30-7

8. Remove the seven screws from the original front guide.

Original front guide

Screws

Screws

Screw

Screw

Screw

Figure 3-3-25 (k)

9. Remove the two screws holding the contact image sensor.

Screw Screw

Contact image sensor

Figure 3-3-25 (l)

340-1

3-3-30-8

10. Detach the contact image sensor from the main unit.

Contact image sensor

Figure 3-3-25 (m)

11. Refit all the removed parts.

Caution:Refit the four bundles of contact image sensor wires so that numbers 1 to 4 indicated onthe connectors match the connector numbers CN1 to CN4 on the ISU PCB.

ISU PCB

CN11 2 3 4

CN2 CN3 CN4

Figure 3-3-25 (n)

12. After replacing the contact image sensor, execute simulation No. 121 “Adjusting gain”(see page 3-2-30-1) and then simulation No. 120 “Adjusting γ correction” (see page3-2-30-1).

340-3

3-3-30-9

(12) Adjustment of optical axisFollow the procedure below if there is a regular error between the centers of the original andthe copy image on the paper.

Procedure

Start.

End.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “132” with the numeric keys.

Yes

No

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Exit simulation mode.

Does the center line of the copy

image align with that of original?

Change the value with the mode set keys.• When the test copy looks like copy example 1, increase the value.• When the test copy looks like copy example 2, decrease the value.

Setting range: –3.0 to +3.0 mmChange for 1 step: 0.5 mmReference: 0

The image moves to the left as the value increases, and to the right as the value decreases.

Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2

Figure 3-3-25(o)

340-3

3-3-30-10

(13) Adjustment of the image width in the main scanning directionFollow the procedure below to widen the maximum print width of LPH when the right or leftedge of the copy image is not printed after the optical axis has been adjusted in simulation132.

Caution:• Make a test copy on paper of A1 width (841 mm) using an original of A1 width (841 mm)

or larger with a lateral line drawn from one end to the other.

Procedure

Start.

End.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “133” with the numeric keys.

No

Yes

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Exit simulation mode.

Is right edge or left edge of the copy image missing?

(Copy examples 1 & 2)

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: 0.0 to 3.0 mmChange for 1 step: 1.0 mmReference: 0.0 mm

The larger the value, the wider the print width of the image; the smaller the value, the narrower the print width of the image.

Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2

841 mm or larger

Figure 3-3-25(p)

340-3

3-3-30-11

(14) Adjustment for prescan in reduction copy modeFollow the procedure below if a trailing edge margin appears when carrying out synchro cutcopy in reduction copy mode.

Procedure

Start.

End.

Enter simulation mode.

Input “025” with the numeric keys.

No

Yes

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Set the magnification to 99%.

Insert the original (A1 lateral) and make a test copy.

Select synchro cut copy mode.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the trailing edge margin 0 mm?

Change the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: –20 to +20Reference: 0Change for one step: 0.99 mm

(the value differs depending on the magnification set)

The larger the value, the longer the trailing edge margin; the smaller the value, the shorter the trailing edge margin.

Original Copy example

Trailing edge margin

Figure 3-3-25(q)

340-3

3-3-30-12

(15) Setting the shading modeFollow the procedure below to set the exposure lamp light intensity for shading if soil on thecontact glass causes longitudinal lines on the copy image.

Required original• Test chart

Procedure

Enter simulation mode.

Input “113” with the numeric keys.

Yes

Yes

No

Start.

End.

Press the enter key.

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Exit simulation mode.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Are there any longitudinal lines on the image?

(Copy example 1)Decrease the value with the mode set keys.

No

Is the entire image light? (Copy example 2)

Increase the value with the mode set keys.

Setting range: 30 to 99 (the lamp light intensity for shading)

Reference: 55

The larger the value, the darker the image; the smaller the value, the lighter the image.If the value is too small, a shading problem is detected and copying is disabled even if the original is inserted.

*The lamp light intensity for shading is set to 55 (reference value) when “1: SHADING MODE1” is selected.

Select “2: SHADING MODE2” with the leading edge margin key or left margin key.*

Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2

Figure 3-3-25(r)

340

3-3-31

3-3-5 Developing section

(1) Changing developerFollow the procedure below when replacing the developer.

Procedure1. Remove the lower rear cover.2. Put the plastic bag in the developer collection box.

Plastic bag

Developer collection box

Figure 3-3-26

3. Open the upper right side cover.4. Remove the screw and remove the developing shutter.

Developing shutter

Figure 3-3-27

340-3

3-3-32

5. Close the upper right side cover.6. Remove the 3P connector of the toner feed motor.7. Enter simulation mode.8. Perform simulation “41” (forced stabilization).9. Perform simulation “10” (drive motor operational check).

• The main unit starts operation and the developer is ejected from the developingassembly into the plastic bag in the developer collection box.

10. If no more developer is ejected into the plastic bag after 12 to 15 minutes have elapsed,press the stop/clear key.• The main unit stops operating.

11. Attach the developing shutter to the developing assembly.12. Detach the upper rear cover.13. Remove the developing assembly from the main unit.14. Detach the toner hopper assembly from the developing assembly.15. Remove the developer remaining on the developing roller.16. Attach the developing assembly to the main unit.

• Make sure that the developing assembly is attached at very left-end position so thegears of the developing assembly mesh with the gears of the main unit.

17. Set safety switch 6 to the forced ON position.18. Shake the developer bottle well to mix the developer.19. Perform simulation “10” (drive motor operational check) and pour the developer evenly

into the developing assembly.20. Press the stop/clear key.21. Attach the toner hopper assembly to the developing assembly.

• The 3P connector of the toner feed motor must not be connected.22. Attach the upper rear cover.23. Perform simulation “60” (developer setting).

• After about 3 minutes, the toner control voltage is set automatically and the setting isdisplayed. Be sure to write the displayed value on the simulation label.

24. Turn the main switch off and back on to reset forced stabilization. The copier exits thesimulation mode.

25. Connect the 3P connector of the toner feed motor.26. Remove the plastic bag inserted in the developer collection box.27. Attach the lower rear cover.

340

3-3-33

(2) Adjustment of doctor blade: referencePerform when carrier or dark background appears on copies, or when attaching or removingthe doctor blade.

Procedure1. Remove the developer from the developing assembly. (Follow steps 1 to 14 of changing

developer on page 3-3-31.)2. Detach the screw and the developing unit cover.

Pin

Developing unit cover

Clamp

Screw

Figure 3-3-28

3. Loosen the four screws (two each on the right and left sides) on the doctor blade.

Screws

Figure 3-3-29

340

3-3-34

4. Loosen the six doctor blade adjustment screws on the upper developing unit stay.

Figure 3-3-30

5. Insert a thickness gauge into the five points indicated in the diagram and adjust the gapbetween the doctor blade and the developing roller to the individually specifieddistances by turning adjustment screws 1 and 2.

20 mm 20 mm

1 2 3 4 5

Developing roller

Doctor bladeDoctor blade

Upper developing unit stay

Distances between the doctor blade and the developing roller: 1 5: A 0.7 mm thickness gauge should enter smoothly and a 0.75 mm one should not. 2 4: A 0.65 mm thickness gauge should enter smoothly and a 0.7 mm one should not. 3: A 0.6 mm thickness gauge should enter smoothly and a 0.65 mm one should not.

Screw 1Screw 2

To increase the gap, loosen screw 2 and tighten screw 1. To decrease the gap, loosen screw 1 and tighten screw 2.

Figure 3-3-31

6. Insert developer in the developing assembly and carry out initial setting of the developer(follow steps 15 to 26 of changing developer on page 3-3-32).

7. Make a test copy to check the copy image.

Doctor blade adjustment screws

340

3-3-35

(3) Adjustment of position for magnetic brush: referenceCheck or adjust when the image is faint.

Caution:Before adjusting, check that the position of the doctor blade is correct and that there is theright amount of developer.

Procedure1. Detach the toner hopper assembly from the developing assembly.2. Loosen the two hex screws on the developing roller shaft and adjust the developer roller

bearing so that the distance from the peak of the magnetic brush to the valley of thedeveloping unit housing is 45.2 mm (reference value).• If the position of the magnetic brush is smaller than the specified measurement, carrier

can stick to copies. If the position is larger, dark background can appear on copies.

A

A

Developing roller bearing

A: 45.2 mm

Figure 3-3-32

3. After finishing adjustments, reattach the parts and make a test copy to check the image.

340

3-3-36

(4) Replacement of the lower developing sealReplace the lower developing seal as follows.

Procedure1. Peel the lower developing seal off the developing assembly.2. Attach the new lower developing seal to the developing assembly using double-sided

tape.• Ensure the ends of the seal are aligned with the inner edges A and B of the right and

left developing unit frames so the seal does not crease.

Left developing unit frame

Right developing unit frame

Lower developing seal

Double-sided tapeA

B

Figure 3-3-33

340

3-3-37

3-3-6 Transfer/separation section

(1) Replacement of charger wireFollow the procedure below when the charger wire is broken or when replacing the wire.

Caution:• Use the specified tungsten wire for the charger wire. (Item No. 74716280, Anodized

tungsten wire, 0.08 mm)• The section wound around the charger spring should not protrude from the left transfer

charger housing.• The end of the charger wire should not protrude from under the washer.• Be sure to use tungsten wire that is free of soiling or damage.• Keep the charger wire taut by stretching the charger spring.• When replacing the charger wire be sure to clean the individual sections of the transfer

charger assembly (inside of charger housing, etc).

Procedure1. Open the main unit.2. Remove the screw and then the transfer charger assembly from the main unit by pulling

up in the direction shown by the arrow.

Transfer charger assemblyScrew

Figure 3-3-34

340-1

340

3-3-38

3. Remove the transfer inner shield from the transfer outer shield.

Transfer outer shield

Transfer inner shield

Figure 3-3-35

4. Remove the right and left transfer charger lids and the left and right transfer seals.5. Remove the charger spring from the pin inside the transfer charger left housing and

loosen the screw to remove the charger wire.

Left transfer charger lid

Left transfer seal

Charger spring

Tungsten wire

Right transfer charger lid

Right transfer seal

Screw

Washer

Figure 3-3-36

340

3-3-39

6. Wind the tungsten wire 4-5 times around one end of the charger spring and hang thecharger spring on the protrusion inside the transfer charger left housing.

7. Pass the tungsten wire under the washer and tighten with the screw keeping the chargerwire stretched so that the charger spring is at least 16 mm long.

Figure 3-3-37

8. After wiring, return the parts to their original positions.

Tungsten wire

Greater than 16 mmCharger spring

Twist wire

Cut here

Screw Tungsten wire

340

3-3-40

(2) Replacement of transfer wireFollow the procedure below when the transfer wire is broken or when replacing the wire.

Caution:• Approximately 3.0 m of wire is required to replace the transfer wire.• Use the specified wire (Item No. 74716290).

Procedure1. Loosen the two screws on the bottom of the transfer outer shield and remove the transfer

wire.2. Remove the insulating tube from the transfer wire.

Insulating tube

Figure 3-3-38

3. Wind one end of the transfer wire once around the screw on the right side of the bottomof the transfer outer shield and tighten the screw.• The transfer wire should be passed under the washer. The end should not protrude

more than 5 mm from the washer.

Washer

Screw

5 mm

Figure 3-3-39

340

3-3-41

4. Hook the transfer wire onto the claw and thread it through the grooves of the transferouter shield. Cross the wire at the 16th pin as shown below and continue to thread thewire.• When wiring at the last claw, pass the transfer wire through the insulating tube so that

the insulating tube is in the position shown in the figure.

1216

Insulating tube

Cross the wire

Figure 3-3-40

5. Tighten the transfer wire to remove any slack and wind one end of the transfer wirearound the screw once on the left side of the bottom of the transfer outer shield and thentighten the screw.• The transfer wire should be passed under the washer. The end of the transfer wire

should not protrude more than 5 mm from the washer.

Screw

Washer

5 mm

Be sure to wind in the direction of the arrow

Figure 3-3-41

6. After wiring, return the parts to their original positions.

340

3-3-42

3-3-7 Cleaning section

(1) Attachment and removal of the cleaning bladeFollow the procedure below when replacing the cleaning blade.

Caution:Coat the cleaning blade with toner (simulation No. 40) after replacing it.

Procedure1. Remove the main charger assembly from the cleaning assembly.2. Loosen the screw and remove the cleaning unit weight.

Cleaning unit weight

Figure 3-3-42

3. Remove the five screws (2 each on right and left, 1 in the center) and the grid assembly.

Screws

Grid assembly

Figure 3-3-43

340

3-3-43

4. Remove the stop rings on the left and right side and remove the bearings.5. Remove the screw on the cleaning seal left and right attachment plates.

Figure 3-3-44

6. Release the cleaning seal left and right attachment plates in the direction shown by thearrow.

7. Remove the cleaning blade.8. Remove the cleaning seal left and right attachment plates from the cleaning blade.

Cleaning blade

Cleaning seal attachment plate

Figure 3-3-45

Stop ring

Bearing

Cleaning seal right attach- ment plate

Cleaning blade

Cleaning blade

Cleaning seal left attachment plate

Bearing

Stop ring

340-1

340

3-3-44

9. Remove the weight mount (two screws) from the cleaning blade and fit it to the newblade.

Cleaning bladeWeight mount

Figure 3-3-46

10. After replacement, return the parts to their original positions.Caution:When refitting the cleaning seal right and left attachment plates, ensure the right and leftcleaning seals (red) are not overriding the seal parts of the lower cleaning blade.

Lower cleaning blade

The lower cleaning blade should be above the cleaning seal.

Left cleaning seal

Cleaning seal left attachment plate

Figure 3-3-47

340

3-3-45

(2) Attachment and removal of lower cleaning bladeFollow the procedure below when replacing the lower cleaning blade.

Procedure1. Loosen the four screws (1 each on right and left, 2 in the center) and remove the lower

cleaning blade.

Lower cleaning blade

Figure 3-3-48

2. After replacement, return the parts to their original positions.• Ensure that the lower cleaning blade is installed all the way toward the machine left.

340-1

340

3-3-46

(3) Attachment and removal of cleaning fur brushFollow the procedure below when cleaning or replacing the cleaning fur brush.

Procedure1. Remove the cleaning blade.2. Remove the stop ring and then remove fur brush gear 17, the shim, pin and the bearing.

PinBearing

Shim

Stop ring

Fur brush gear 17

Figure 3-3-49

3. Remove the stop ring and the bearing.4. Remove the cleaning fur brush.

Cleaning fur brush

Bearing

Stop ring

Figure 3-3-50

5. After cleaning or replacement, return the parts to their original positions.

340-1

340

3-3-47

(4) Attachment and removal of separation clawFollow the procedure below when replacing the separation claw.

Procedure1. Remove the screws on the separation spring.

Separation spring Separation shaft

Figure 3-3-51

2. Remove the separation claw guide.3. Move the separation claw to the D-cut section of the separation shaft and remove the

separation claw from the separation shaft.

Figure 3-3-52

4. After replacement, return the parts to their original positions.• Check that the separation claws move smoothly.

Separation claw guide

Separation claw

D-cut section

340

3-3-48

3-3-8 Fixing section

(1) Attachment and removal of fixing heaters M and SFollow the procedure below when inspecting or replacing fixing heaters M and/or S.

Procedure1. Detach the upper right removal cover, upper left removal cover, lower right removal

cover, and lower left removal cover.2. Disconnect the 1P connectors from both ends of the fixing heaters.3. Remove a screw on each side and remove the left and right heater support plates.4. Remove the fixing heaters by pulling them out of the heat roller.

• When reattaching the fixing heaters, be sure that the blue 1P connector (for fixingheater S) is on the front of the copier and the white one (for fixing heater M) is on therear.

Figure 3-3-53

5. After inspecting or replacing, return the parts to their original positions.

Left heater support plate1P connectors

Fixing heater S

Fixing heater M

B W

Fixing heater S

Fixing heater M

White 1P connector

Blue 1P connector

Right heater support plate

340-1

340

3-3-49

(2) Attachment and removal of heat rollerFollow the procedure below when cleaning or replacing the heat roller.

Procedure1. Remove fixing heaters M and S (see page 3-3-48).2. Press the fixing section release lever to open the fixing section.3. While holding up the fixing section, remove the left and right fixing release sliders from

the upper release pivot pin.4. Open the fixing section all the way.

Upper release pivot pin

Fixing release slider

Figure 3-3-54

5. Fasten the right fixing unit frame with the screw to keep the fixing unit open.

Right fixing unit frame

Screw

Figure 3-3-55

340

3-3-50

6. Remove the middle removal cover.7. Remove the 2P connector of the eject switch, the 3P connector of the fixing unit pulse

sensor, the two screws and the upper eject guide.

Upper eject guide

3P connector

2P connector

Figure 3-3-56

8. Remove the C-ring, the heat roller gear, the bearing retainer (two screws), and the heatroller bearing on the heat roller left side.

Heat roller

Bearing retainerC-ring

Heat roller gear

Heat roller bearing

Screws

Figure 3-3-57

340-1

340-3

3-3-51

9. Remove the C-ring, the bearing retainer (two screws) and the heat roller bearing on theheat roller right side.

10. Remove the heat roller.

Heat roller

Heat roller bearing

Bearing retainer

C-ring

Figure 3-3-58

11. After cleaning or replacement, return the parts to their original positions.

Important: After replacement of the heat roller, the separation claws may leave lines onsolid black copies if sufficient silicon oil is not applied on the roller surface. Topreempt this problem, perform simulation 10 for 10 minutes or more after heatroller replacement.

340-3

3-3-52

(3) Attachment and removal of the press rollerFollow the procedure below when cleaning or replacing the press roller.

Procedure1. Remove the left and right fixing unit release sliders from the upper release pivot pin and

open the fixing section all the way (see page 3-3-49).2. Fasten the right fixing unit frame with the screw to keep the fixing unit open (see page

3-3-49).3. Remove the screw and pin, and remove the lower eject guide.

Screw

Pin

Lower eject guide

Figure 3-3-59

4. Release the fixing unit front guide by lifting it up in the direction shown by the arrow.5. Remove the press roller from the main unit.6. Remove the press roller shaft from the press roller by pulling it out.

Fixing unit front guide

Press roller

Press roller shaft

Press roller

Figure 3-3-60

7. After cleaning or replacement, return the parts to their original positions.• Apply a small amount of silicon oil (Item No. 49925515-silicon oil SH200) to the

surface of the temperature detection sections of fixing unit thermistors 3 and 4.8. Make test copies until the silicon oil applied to fixing unit thermistors 3 and 4 no longer

shows.

Important: After replacement of the press roller, the separation claws may leave lines onsolid black copies if sufficient silicon oil is not applied on the roller surface. Topreempt this problem, perform simulation 10 for 10 minutes or more after pressroller replacement.

340

3-3-53

(4) Attachment and removal of oil rollerFollow the procedure below when replacing the oil roller.

Procedure1. Detach the upper right removal cover, upper left removal cover, lower right removal

cover, and lower left removal cover.2. Remove the four screws and the 4P and 5P connectors and then detach the original

table assembly.

4P connector

Original table assembly

5P connector

Figure 3-3-61

3. Remove the two screws and detach the fixing unit cover.

Fixing unit cover

Figure 3-3-62

340

3-3-54

4. Remove the crimp springs on the right and left of the oil roller.

Crimp spring

Figure 3-3-63

5. Loosen the hex-socket-head screw and remove gear 27T from the left of the oil roller.6. Remove the E-rings on the left and right of the oil roller and remove the bearings.

E-rings

Bearing

Hex-socket-head screw

Gear 27T

Bearing

Figure 3-3-64

340

3-3-55

7. Remove the oil roller.

Oil roller

Figure 3-3-65

8. After replacement, return the parts to their original positions.

340

3-3-56

(5) Attachment and removal of fixing unit thermistors 1 and 2Follow the procedure below when inspecting or replacing fixing unit thermistors 1 or 2.

Procedure1. Remove the upper right removal cover, upper left removal cover, lower right removal

cover, and lower left removal cover.2. Remove the original table assembly and the fixing unit cover (see page 3-3-53).3. Remove the screw and the 2P connector (right side of main unit). Remove fixing unit

thermistor 1 or 2.• When reattaching fixing unit thermistor 1 or 2, be sure that the surface of the thermistor

is in contact with the heat roller. Insert the black 2P connector of fixing unit thermistor1 into the black 2P plug of the thermistor relay wire, and the white 2P connector of fixingunit thermistor 2 into the white 2P plug.

Fixing unit thermistor 2

White 2P connector

Black 2P connector

Fixing unit thermistor 1

Figure 3-3-66

4. After inspection or replacement, return the parts to their original positions.

340

3-3-57

(6) Attachment and removal of fixing unit thermal switches 1 and 2Follow the procedure below when inspecting or replacing fixing unit thermal switches 1 or2.

Caution:• When replacing the fixing unit thermal switches (thermostats), be sure to use the specified

parts.• If wires are used instead of the specified fixing unit thermal switches (thermostats), the

copier may be seriously damaged.

Procedure1. Remove the upper right removal cover, upper left removal cover, lower right removal

cover, and lower left removal cover.2. Remove the original table assembly and the fixing unit cover (see page 3-3-53).3. Remove the two screws and 1P connector of each fixing thermal switch and then the

thermal switch relay wire. Detach fixing thermal switch 1 or 2.

Thermal switch relay wire

1P connector

1P connector

Fixing unit thermal switch 1

Fixing unit thermal switch 2

Figure 3-3-67

4. After inspection or replacement, return the parts to their original positions.

340

3-3-58

(7) Attachment and removal of fixing unit thermistors 3 and 4Follow the procedure below when inspecting or replacing fixing unit thermistors 3 or 4.

Procedure1. Remove the left and right fixing unit release sliders from the upper release pivot pin and

open the fixing section all the way (see page 3-3-49).2. Fasten the right fixing unit frame with the screw to keep the fixing unit open (see page

3-3-49).3. Remove the two screws and remove the lower eject guide. (see page 3-3-52).4. Remove the screw, the 2P connector and fixing unit thermistor 3 or 4.

• When reattaching fixing unit thermistor 3 or 4, be sure that the surface of the thermistoris in contact with the press roller while closing the fixing section.

Fixing unit thermistor 4

Fixing unit thermistor 3

Figure 3-3-68

5. After inspection or replacement, return the parts to their original positions.

340

3-3-59

(8) Attachment and removal of the external temperature thermistorFollow the procedure below when inspecting or replacing the external temperaturethermistor.

Procedure1. Remove the lower left cover.2. Remove the screw and the 2P connector and remove the external temperature

thermistor.

External temperature thermistor

2P connector

Figure 3-3-69

3. After inspection or replacement, return the parts to their original positions.

340

3-3-60

3-3-9 Other sections

(1) Adjusting the tension of paper feed section drive belt 1Follow the procedure below when attaching or removing the paper feed motor or whenreplacing paper feed section drive belt 1.

Procedure1. Remove the lower left cover.2. Loosen the screw on paper feed drive tension plate 1.3. Tighten the screw so that the edge of the protrusion on paper feed drive tension plate

1 and the center of the screw align.

Paper feed section drive belt 1

Screw

Protrusion

Paper feed drive tension plate 1

Figure 3-3-70

4. After adjustment, return the parts to their original positions.

340

3-3-61

(2) Adjusting the tension of paper feed section drive belt 2 [when installing 3rdroll unit (optional) only.]

Follow the procedure below when replacing paper feed section drive belt 2.

Procedure1. Remove the lower left cover.2. Loosen the screw on paper feed drive tension plate 2.3. Tighten the screw so that the end of paper feed drive tension plate 2 is in the center of

the hole of roll drive assembly B.

Paper feed section drive belt 2

Edge

Paper feed drive tension plate 2

Roll drive assembly B

Hole

Figure 3-3-71

4. After adjustment, return the parts to their original positions.

340

3-3-62

(3) Adjusting the tension of the cutter drive beltFollow the procedure below when attaching or removing the cutter unit or when replacingthe cutter drive belt.

Procedure1. Remove the lower left cover.2. Loosen the screw on the cutter drive tension plate.3. Tighten the screw so that the screw is in the center of the long hole of the cutter drive

tension plate.

Cutter drive tension plate

Cutter drive belt

Screw

Figure 3-3-72

4. After adjustment, return the parts to their original positions.

340-3

3-3-63

(4) Adjusting the tension of original feed drive belt 1Follow the procedure below when attaching or removing the original feed clutch or whenreplacing original feed drive belt 1.

Procedure1. Open the upper right side cover.2. Loosen the two screws on the original drive tension plate.3. Tighten the two screws while the original drive tension plate is pulled by the tension

spring.Note: Do not stretch the tension spring excessively.

Origianl feed drive belt 1

Screws

Original drive tension plate

Tension spring

Figure 3-3-73

4. After adjustment, return the parts to their original positions.

340

3-3-64

(4-1) Adjusting the tension of the developing drive beltFollow the procedure below when replacing the developing drive belt.

Procedure1. Remove the lower left cover.2. Loosen the screw holding the developing drive tension plate.3. Retighten the screw with the edge of the developing drive tension plate aligned with the

center of the hole in the developing drive mount.

Hole

Developing drive mount

Developing drive belt

Screw

Developing drive tension plate

Figure 3-3-73 (a)

340-1

3-3-63-1

340

3-3-65

340-1

This page is intentionally left blank.

340

3-3-66

(5) Attachment and removal of ozone filterFollow the procedure below when replacing the ozone filter.

Procedure1. Open the main unit.2. Remove the lower left cover.3. Remove the screw and then the ozone filter retainer.4. Remove the screw and the ozone filter.

Ozone filter

Ozone filter retainer

Figure 3-3-74

5. After replacement, return the parts to their original positions.

3-3-64

1-1-25

340

CONTENTS

3-4 PCB Initial Settings

3-4-1 Main PCB ............................................................................................ 3-4-13-4-2 Non-field-adjustable volume controls .................................................. 3-4-3

340

3-4-1

3-4-1 Main PCB

When replacing the main PCB, simply fit the backup PCB that was attached to the old mainPCB to the new main PCB. However, if the backup PCB is going to be replaced, it isnecessary to take the following procedure.

Procedure• With the backup PCB that has been used 1. Record the following data of user-set items.

• Settings used in program copy mode• Initial copy settings

2. Enter the simulation mode. 3. Run the following simulations and record the counts.

4. Exit the simulation mode. 5. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug. 6. Replace the backup PCB.

Sim. No. Counts to be recorded

73 Total counter count195 Dispaly/Clear Jam/SC count197 Display/Clear Size counters198 Display/Clear Mode counters

340-3

3-4-2

Sim. No. Contents

25 Adjustment for prescan in reduction copy mode26 Setting delay before original feed start31 Ignoring developing control35 Entering drum surface potential data for black & white mode36 Entering drum surface potential data for half-tone mode46 Setting fixing stabilization at low speed53 Adjusting 100% magnification54 Adjusting leading edge registration55 Adjusting synchrocut length (297 mm)56 Adjusting synchrocut length (1189 mm)57 Adjusting the leading edge margin58 Adjusting trailing edge margin/displayed synchrocut length59 Adjusting the paper cut position for specified length cut mode63 Checking/changing toner control voltage66 Entering toner sensor control level/copy count67 Selecting operation under the empty toner condition71 Selecting the maintenance cycle (metric models only)75 Entering the service telephone No.80 Switching the counter counting units81 Selecting the language82 Selecting between key counter/card84 Selecting the No. of exposure steps86 Switching the fixing temperature87 Disabling cancellation of auto shutoff function89 Setting optional roll unit92 Setting potential correction intervals94 Setting the maximum copy length for multiple copy mode95 Setting the maximum copy length for roll/bypass mode96 Selecting the action after paper empty detection97 Switching between front and rear ejection of originals98 Selecting the copy count timing

109 Setting the controller type113 Setting the shading mode115 Selecting the connection to the interface controller116 Setting the time to return from the offline condition117 Adjusting the leading edge registration (when connected to the interface

controller)132 Adjusting optical axis

• With the new backup PCB 7. Connect the power plug and turn the copier main switch on. 8. Enter the simulation mode. 9. Run simulations 70 and 85.10. Clean the contact glass and middle upper original roller.11. Run simulation 120 to conduct γ correction.12. Run simulation 83 to select between inch and metric specifications.13. Run the following simulations and enter the data recorded on the simulation label.

340-3

3-4-3

14. Exit the simulation mode.15. Enter the data of user-set functions recorded in step 1.

3-4-2 Non-field-adjustable volume controls

Some of the volume controls that have been adjusted at the factory before shipment cannotbe readjusted in the field. Handle these controls carefully.Keep hands away from the non-field-adjustable controls shown below:• Main high-voltage transformer: VRG, VRMC• ST high-voltage transformer: VR1, VR11, VR21• Developing bias high-voltage transformer: VR1• Drum potential sensor PCB: VR1, VR3• Power source PCB: RV1, RV2• LPH power source PCB: RV1

133 Adjusting the image width in the main scanning direction140 Adjusting exposure amount141 Adjusting half-tone image quality (dark/light)142 Adjusting AE optimum level143 Switching filter modes144 Adjusting filter gain145 Setting AE fine adjustment intervals153 Selecting current correction value160 Adjusting base 4 output density161 Adjusting thresholds (central exposure level)163 Adjusting Exp. 1.0 threshold164 Adjusting Exp. 7.0 threshold165 Setting the memory unit connection166 Selecting display of the “Output?” screen after restart167 Setting the AE scan168 Setting the maximum number of continuous copies178 Selecting memory output mode

Sim. No. Contents

1-1-26

1-1-27

340

CONTENTS

3-5 Self Diagnostics

3-5-1 Self-diagnostic function ....................................................................... 3-5-1(1) Self-diagnostic display ................................................................. 3-5-1

340

3-5-1

3-5-1 Self-diagnostic function

(1) Self-diagnostic displayThis unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When it detects a problem with itself,it disables copying and displays a self-diagnostic code (SC-xxx) indicating the nature of theproblem together with the message requesting to call for service on the display.To reset SC302, 340, 355, 401, 601, 690, 900, 921,990 or 991turn the main switch off then on.To reset SC307, 308, 344, 542-547, 920 turn main switch off then on & holding Syn, IS,C/S keys.

Metric

Inch

Figure 3-5-1 Service call code display

Call for service TEL

SC-XXX

CALL FOR SERVICE TEL

SC-XXX

340-3

3-5-2

920

921

601

Self diagnostic codes

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Backup RAM problemCollapse in data pattern ofthe specified area of theRAM has been found dur-ing 20-s-interval detectionright after power on.

Wrong main ROM ver-sionIt has been found rightafter power on that ver-sions of the two ROMs(IC83 and IC93) on themain PCB are differentfrom each other.

Communication problemon servo PCBResponse to the mainPCB from servo motorcontrol 2 PCB has notbeen made within 160 msafter communication start.

A checksum error hasoccurred.

The SRAM(IC1, IC3) onthe backupPCB has aproblem.

The backupPCB or mainPCB is defec-tive.

Two ROMsthat havedifferent ver-sions to eachother are in-stalled.

Servo motorcontrol 2 PCBis defective.

The mainPCB is defec-tive.

Run simulation 70 and resetthe memory contents.

If C-10 persists after reset-ting the memory contents,replace the backup PCB ormain PCB.

Check the versions and in-stall ROMs of the same ver-sion.

Replace servo motor control2 PCB and check operation.

Replace the main PCB andcheck operation.

340-3

3-5-3

Check the connection ofCON3 on the interface PCBand continuity across theconnector terminals. If thereis any abnormality, remedyor replace.

Check the connection andcontinuity of the interfacecable. If there is any abnor-mality, replace the cable.

Replace the PROM (IC54)on the interface PCB andcheck operation.

Check the connection ofCN20 on the copier mainPCB and continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Ifthere is any abnormality,remedy or replace.

Replace the copier mainPCB and check operation.

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

C-33 Interface controller com-munication problemCommunication betweenthe copier and interfacecontroller is interrupted for2 s or more in printermode or scanner mode.

Poor contactin the connec-tor terminalsof CON3 onthe interfacePCB.

The interfacecable is de-fective.

The PROM(IC54) on theinterface PCBis defective.

Poor contactin the connec-tor terminalsof CN20 onthe copiermain PCB.

The copiermain PCB isdefective.

603 Communication problemwith the ISUResponse to the mainPCB from the ISU PCBhas not been made within64 ms during operation.

Six checksum errors haveoccurred in succession.

The ISU PCBis defective.

The mainPCB is defec-tive.

Replace the ISU PCB andcheck operation.

Replace the main PCB andcheck operation.

3-5-2-1

340-3

3-5-4

This page is intentionally left blank.

340-1

3-5-5

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

690

691

990

991

302

IPC1 problemProcessing request givento communication CPUIC22 fails to be processedwithin 512 ms.

IPC2 problemProcessing request givento communication CPUIC110 fails to be proc-essed within 512 ms.

ISU sequence problemNecessary response failsto be emitted from ISUPCB within 2 s after a re-quest.

Jam indication "P"is dis-played each time an origi-nal is inserted, six times insuccession.

Servo PCB hardwareerrorAn error signal has beenemitted from servo motorcontrol 2 PCB.

Main charger leakageShorting alarm signal (MCALARM) is detected forfive times in succession at200-ms intervals whilemain charger output isbeing generated.

The mainPCB is defec-tive.

The mainPCB is defec-tive.

The fluores-cent lamp hasa break.

The fluores-cent lampconnectorterminalsmake poorcontact.

The ISU PCBis defective.

Servo motorcontrol 2 PCBis defective.

The maincharger leaks.

The maincharger wireis broken.

The mainhigh-voltagetransformer isdefective.

Replace the main PCB andcheck operation.

Replace the main PCB andcheck operation.

Check for continuity acrossthe fluorescent lamp fila-ments. If none, replace thelamp.

Check the connector termi-nals and repair if necessary.

Replace the ISU PCB andcheck operation.

Replace servo motor control2 PCB and check operation.

Check the main charger as-sembly and clean if dirty.

Check if the main chargerwire is broken and replace ifnecessary.

Remove the main chargerassembly from the machineand check if SC302 is dis-played. If it is, replace themain high-voltage trans-former.

3-5-3

340-1

3-5-6

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

401

307

Transfer charger leakageThe shorting alarm signal(ST ALARM) is detectedsix times in successionwhile the transfer chargeroutput is generated.

Dark potential correctionproblem: out of rangeThe drum potential sensoroutput remains at lessthan A0h (650 V) when thegrid potential is increasedto larger than A0h (650 V)during potential correction.

The transfercharger leaks.

The transfercharger wireis broken.

Leak occursto the transfercharger hous-ing.

The drumpotential sen-sor connectorterminalsmake poorcontact.

The drumpotential sen-sor is defec-tive.

The drumpotential sen-sor PCB isdefective.

The mainPCB is defec-tive.

Check the transfer chargerassembly and clean if neces-sary.

Check if the transfer chargerwire is broken. If it is, replaceit.

Remove the transfer chargerassembly from the machineand check if SC401 is dis-played. If it is, replace the SThigh-voltage transformer.

Check the connector termi-nals and repair them if nec-essary.

Replace the drum potentialsensor and check operation.

Replace the drum potentialsensor PCB and check op-eration.

Replace the main PCB andcheck operation.

3-5-4

340

3-5-7

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

308

547

Dark potential correctionproblem: No. of correc-tions expiredTen corrections cannotachieve normal correction.

Abnormally low tempera-ture at fixing heater SFixing temperature dropsto less than 100°C/212°Fafter reaching thestabilization level once.

The drumpotential sen-sor connectorterminalsmake poorcontact.

The drumpotential sen-sor is defec-tive.

The drumpotential sen-sor PCB isdefective.

The mainPCB is defec-tive.

Fixing heaterS has abreak.

Fixing heaterS connectorterminalsmake poorcontact.

Fixing unitthermistor 2 isinstalled in-correctly.

Fixing unitthermalswitch 1 or 2has tripped.

Solid staterelay 2 is de-fective.

Check the connector termi-nals and repair if necessary.

Replace the drum potentialsensor and check operation.

Replace the drum potentialsensor PCB and check op-eration.

Replace the main PCB andcheck operation.

Check for continuity. If none,replace fixing heater S.

Check the connector termi-nals and repair if necessary.

Check and reinstall if neces-sary.

Check for continuity. If none,find and remove the cause ofthe problem and replaceswitch 1 or 2.

Measure the resistance andcheck for continuity. Replacesolid state relay 2 if not asfollows:Across 1 and 2: ∞ ΩAcross 3 and 4: one-way

continuity.

3-5-5

340

3-5-8

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

544

546

Abnormally low tempera-ture at fixing heater MFixing temperature dropsto less than 100°C/212°Fafter reaching thestabilization level once.

Abnormally high tempera-ture at fixing heater SFixing temperature ex-ceeds 195°C/385°F afterreaching the stabilizationlevel once.

Fixing heaterM has abreak.

Fixing heaterM connectorterminalsmake poorcontact.

Fixing unitthermistor 1 isinstalled in-correctly.

Fixing unitthermalswitch 1 or 2has tripped.

Solid staterelay 1 is de-fective.

Fixing unitthermistor 2has shorted.

Solid staterelay 2 is de-fective.

Check for continuity. If none,replace fixing heater M.

Check the connectors andrepair if necessary.

Check and reinstall if neces-sary.

Check for continuity. If none,find and remove the cause ofthe problem and replace fix-ing unit thermal switch 1 or2.

Measure the resistance andcheck for continuity. Replacesolid state relay 1 if not asfollows:Across 1 and 2: ∞ ΩAcross 3 and 4: one-way

continuity.

Measure the resistance andif 0 Ω, replace the thermistor.

Measure the resistance andcheck for continuity. Replacesolid state relay 2 if not asfollows:Across 1 and 2: ∞ ΩAcross 3 and 4: one-way

continuity.

3-5-6

340-1

3-5-9

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

543

545

Abnormally high tempera-ture at fixing heater MFixing temperature ex-ceeds 195°C/385°F afterreaching the stabilizationlevel once.

Abnormally low fixingtemperatureFixing temperature doesnot reach the stabilizationlevel after 20 minutes.

Fixing unitthermistor 1has shorted.

Solid staterelay 1 is de-fective.

Fixing heaterM or S has abreak.

The fixingheater M or Sconnectorterminalsmake poorcontact.

Fixing unitthermistor 1or 2 is in-stalled incor-rectly.

Fixing unitthermalswitch 1 or 2has a break.

Solid staterelay 1 or 2 isdefective.

Measure the resistance andif 0 Ω, replace the thermistor.

Measure the resistance andcheck for continuity. Replacesolid state relay 1 if not asfollows:Across 1 and 2: ∞ ΩAcross 3 and 4: one-way

continuity.

Check for continuity. If none,replace fixing heater M or S.

Check the connector termi-nals and repair if necessary.

Check and reinstall if neces-sary.

Check for continuity. If none,replace switch 1 or 2.

Measure the resistance andcheck for continuity. Replacesolid state relay 1 or 2 if notas follows:Across 1 and 2: ∞ ΩAcross 3 and 4: one-way

continuity.

3-5-7

340-1

3-5-10

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

542

355

Abnormally low fixingtemperatureBoth fixing heaters M andS remain at less than80°C/176°F after 6 min-utes.

Loose toner sensor con-nectionAbnormally low value (10hor less) has been detectedduring 0.5-s sampling oftoner sensor output that isstarted 5 s after the startof developer agitation.

Fixing heaterM or S has abreak.

Fixing heaterM or S con-nector termi-nals makepoor contact.

Fixing unitthermistor 1or 2 is in-stalled incor-rectly.

Fixing unitthermalswitch 1 or 2has a break.

Solid staterelay 1 or 2 isdefective.

A toner sen-sor connectoris off or theconnectorterminalsmake poorcontact.

Check for continuity. If none,replace fixing heater M or S.

Check the connector termi-nals and repair if necessary.

Check and reinstall if neces-sary.

Check for continuity. If none,replace switch 1 or 2.

Measure the resistance andcheck for continuity. Replacesolid state relay 1 or 2 if notas follows:Across 1 and 2: ∞ ΩAcross 3 and 4: one-way

continuity.

Check the connectors of thetoner sensor and developingassembly wiring, and remedythe connection if necessary.

3-5-8

340-3

3-5-11

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

356

340

C-910

Abnormally high tonersensor outputAbnormally high value(F9h or greater) has beendetected five times in suc-cession during 0.5-s sam-pling of toner sensor out-put that is started 5 s afterthe start of developer agi-tation.

Loose developing unitthermistor connectionAn abnormal developingthermistor value (2°C/35.6°F or less, 55°C/131°For greater) has been de-tected for five times in suc-cession during 200-msinterval detection.

Controller problemInterface controllermemory problemInterface controller SCSIcontroller problem

The tonersensor is de-fective.

The mainPCB is defec-tive.

The develop-ing unit ther-mistor con-nectors areoff or connec-tor terminalsmake poorcontact.

The interfacePCB is defec-tive.

Replace the toner sensorand check operation.

Replace the main PCB andcheck operation.

Check the connectors of thedeveloping unit thermistorand developing assemblywiring, and remedy the con-nection if necessary.

Turn the power on again.

Replace the interface PCBand check operation.

3-5-9

Code Cont entsRemarks

CausesCheck proc edur es/

corrective measures900 Total Counter Problems The total counter

connectors areOFF or connectorterminals makepoor contact.

Check the connectors of the total counter and remedy the connection if necessary.

3-5-9-1

1-1-29

340

CONTENTS

3-6 Troubleshooting

3-6-1 Image formation problems .................................................................. 3-6-1(1) No image (entirely white). ............................................................ 3-6-4(2) No image (entirely black). ............................................................ 3-6-5(3) Image is too light. ........................................................................ 3-6-6(4) Background is visible. .................................................................. 3-6-7(5) A white line appears longitudinally. ............................................. 3-6-8(6) A black line appears longitudinally. ............................................. 3-6-8(7) A black line appears laterally. ...................................................... 3-6-9(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. ................ 3-6-10(9) Black dots appear on the image. ............................................... 3-6-10

(10) Image is blurred. ........................................................................ 3-6-11(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with

the original. ................................................................................ 3-6-11(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with

the original. ................................................................................ 3-6-12(13) Paper creases. .......................................................................... 3-6-12(14) Offset occurs. ............................................................................ 3-6-13(15) Image is partly missing. ............................................................. 3-6-13(16) Fixing is poor. ............................................................................ 3-6-14(17) Image is out of focus. ................................................................ 3-6-14(18) The center of the image is misaligned with the original. ............ 3-6-15(19) One forth the A0 width of the image is white. ............................ 3-6-15(18) One forth the A0 width of the image is black. ............................ 3-6-16

3-6-2 Paper misfeeds.. ............................................................................... 3-6-17(1) J-04 appears as soon as the main switch is turned on. ............ 3-6-17(2) J-05 appears as soon as the main switch is turned on. ............ 3-6-17(3) J-06 appears as soon as the main switch is turned on. ............ 3-6-17(4) Paper jam in the 1st roll unit (J-01) occurs during copying

frequently. .................................................................................. 3-6-18(5) Paper jam in the 2nd roll unit (J-02) occurs during copying

frequently. .................................................................................. 3-6-19(6) Paper jam in the 3rd roll unit (optional) (J-03) occurs during

copying frequently. .................................................................... 3-6-19(7) Paper jam in the original feed section (J-05) occurs during

copying frequently. .................................................................... 3-6-20(8) Paper jam inside the main unit (J-06) occurs during copying

frequently. .................................................................................. 3-6-213-6-3 PCB terminal voltages ...................................................................... 3-6-23

(1) Power source PCB .................................................................... 3-6-23(2) LPH power source PCB ............................................................ 3-6-25(3) Main PCB .................................................................................. 3-6-26(4) Servo motor control 1 PCB ........................................................ 3-6-31(5) Servo motor control 2 PCB ........................................................ 3-6-32(6) Output PCB ............................................................................... 3-6-33

1-1-30

340-3

(7) Operation unit PCB ................................................................... 3-6-35(8) Inverter PCB .............................................................................. 3-6-36(9) ISU PCB .................................................................................... 3-6-37

3-6-4 Electrical problems ............................................................................ 3-6-38(1) The machine does not operate at all when the main switch is

turned on. .................................................................................. 3-6-38(2) The drive motor does not operate. ............................................ 3-6-39(3) The drum motor does not operate. ............................................ 3-6-39(4) The fixing drive motor does not operate. ................................... 3-6-39(5) The paper feed motor does not operate. ................................... 3-6-40(6) The original feed motor does not operate. ................................ 3-6-40(7) The toner feed motor does not operate. .................................... 3-6-40(8) The paper conveying fan motor does not operate. .................... 3-6-41(9) The cooling fan motor does not operate. ................................... 3-6-41

(10) The right or left fixing unit fan motor does not operate. ............. 3-6-41(11) LPH fan motor 1 does not operate. ........................................... 3-6-41(12) The upper roll winding clutch does not operate. ........................ 3-6-41(13) The middle roll winding clutch does not operate. ...................... 3-6-42(14) The lower roll winding clutch does not operate. ........................ 3-6-42(15) The upper feed clutch does not operate. ................................... 3-6-42(16) The middle feed clutch does not operate. ................................. 3-6-42(17) The lower feed clutch does not operate. ................................... 3-6-43(18) The roll paper conveying clutch does not operate. .................... 3-6-43(19) The registration clutch does not operate. .................................. 3-6-43(20) The cutter clutch does not operate. ........................................... 3-6-43(21) The bypass registration clutch does not operate. ...................... 3-6-44(22) The original feed clutch does not operate. ................................ 3-6-44(23) The cleaning solenoid does not operate. .................................. 3-6-44(24) The separation claw solenoid does not operate. ....................... 3-6-44(25) The fluorescent lamp does not light. ......................................... 3-6-45(26) The fluorescent lamp does not go off. ....................................... 3-6-45(27) The pre-charging lamp does not light. ....................................... 3-6-45(28) The post-transfer lamp does not light. ....................................... 3-6-45(29) Fixing heater M or S does not turn on (C-630, C-631,

C-640, C-641, C-650, C-660). ................................................... 3-6-46(30) Fixing heater M or S fails to turn off (C-630, C-641,

C-650, C-660). ........................................................................... 3-6-46(31) No main charging. ..................................................................... 3-6-47(32) No transfer charging. ................................................................. 3-6-47(33) No separation charging. ............................................................ 3-6-48(34) No developing bias. ................................................................... 3-6-48(35) The job stop/roll cut key does not operate. ............................... 3-6-48(36) The fluorescent lamp heater does not operate. ......................... 3-6-49(37) The dehumidifier does not operate. ........................................... 3-6-49(38) The upper roll unit heater does not operate. ............................. 3-6-49(39) The middle roll unit heater does not operate. ............................ 3-6-49(40) The lower roller unit heater does not operate. ........................... 3-6-50(41) LPH fan motor 2 does not operate. ............................................ 3-6-50

3-6-5 Mechanical problems ........................................................................ 3-6-51(1) No primary paper feed. .............................................................. 3-6-51(2) No secondary paper feed. ......................................................... 3-6-52

1-1-31

340

(3) No original conveying. ............................................................... 3-6-52(4) Original jam. .............................................................................. 3-6-53(5) Paper jam. ................................................................................. 3-6-53(6) Toner falls onto the paper conveying section. ........................... 3-6-54(7) Abnormal noise. ........................................................................ 3-6-54

3-6-1

340

See page 3-6-4. See page 3-6-5. See page 3-6-6.

(1) No image (entirely white).

(2) No image (entirely black).

(3) Image is too light.

See page 3-6-7. See page 3-6-8. See page 3-6-8.

(4) Background is visible. (5) A white line appears longitudinally.

(6) A black line appears longitudinally.

See page 3-6-9. See page 3-6-10. See page 3-6-10.

(7) A black line appears laterally.

(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other.

(9) Black dots appear on the image.

3-6-1 Image formation problems

3-6-2

340

See page 3-6-11. See page 3-6-11. See page 3-6-12.

(10) Image is blurred. (11) The leading edge of the image is consist-ently misaligned with the original.

(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadi-cally misaligned with the original.

See page 3-6-12. See page 3-6-13. See page 3-6-13.

(13) Paper creases. (14) Offset occurs. (15) Image is partly missing.

See page 3-6-14. See page 3-6-14. See page 3-6-15.

(16) Fixing is poor. (17) Image is out of focus.

(18) The center of the image is misaligned with the original.

3-6-3

340

See page 3-6-15. See page 3-6-16.

(19) One forth the A0 width of the image is white.

(20) One forth the A0 width of the image is black.

3-6-4

340

(1) No image (entirely white).

Causes 1. No transfer charging. 2. LPH fails to turn on.

1. No transfer charging.

A. Broken transfer charger wire.

B. Leaking transfer charger housing.

C. The connector termi-nals of the ST high-voltage transformer make poor contact.

D. Defective main PCB.

E. Defective ST high-voltage trans-former.

2. LPH fails to turn on.

A. Blown fuse on the LPH power supply PCB.

B. Defective LPH power supply PCB.

C. Poor contact in the LPH data or power wire connectors.

D. Defective main PCB or LPH.

Replace the wire.

Clean the transfer charger housing.

Check for continuity across the terminals. If none, replace them.

Run simulation 33 and check if CN4-1B on the main PCB goes low. If not, replace the main PCB.

If transfer charging does not take place during simulation 33 while CN1-1 on the ST high-voltage transformer goes low, replace the ST high-voltage transformer.

Remove the cause of blowing and replace the fuse.

With power relay 2 on, check if 5 V DC is output. If none while 24 V DC is input, replace the LPH power supply PCB.

Check for loose connectors and poor contact in them, and remedy if necessary. Check for continuity across connector terminals of each wire and, if none, replace them.

Run simulation 102 and if no gray pattern is output, replace the main PCB or LPH.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-5

340-3

(2) No image (entirely black).

Causes 1. Fluorescent lamp fails to light. 2. No main charging. 3. Loose LPH data wire connectors. 4. Defective main PCB. 5. Defective LPH. 6.Loose ISU data wire connectors. 7.Defective ISU PCB.

1. Fluorescent lamp fails to light.

A. Broken fluorescent lamp filament.

B. The fluorescent lamp sockets make poor contact.

C. Defective inverter PCB.

D. Defective main PCB.

2. No main charging.

A. Broken main charger wire.

B. Leaking main charger housing.

C. The connector ter-minals of the main high-voltage trans-former make poor contact.

D. Defective main PCB.

E. Defective main high-voltage transformer.

Check for continuity across the fluorescent lamp filament. If none, replace the fluorescent lamp (see page 3-3-19).

Check for continuity across the sockets. If none, replace them.

Run simulation 110 and if the fluorescent lamp does not light while CN1-2 on the inverter PCB goes low, replace the inverter PCB.

Run simulation 110 and check if CN6-18 on the main PCB goes low. If not, replace the main PCB.

Replace the wire.

Clean the main charger housing.

Check for continuity across the terminals. If none, replace them.

If CN6-17 on the main PCB does not go low during copy-ing, replace the main PCB.

If main charging does not take place during copying while CN1-3 on the main high-voltage transformer goes low, replace the main high-voltage transformer.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-6

340-3

(3) Image is too light. Causes 1. Insufficient toner. 2. Deteriorated developer. 3. Dirty or deteriorated drum. 4. Misadjusted fluorescent lamp intensity. 5. Misadjusted developing section. 6. Misadjusted drum surface potential. 7. Dirty LPH. 8. Dirty main charger grid.

1. Insufficient toner.

2. Deteriorated devel-oper.

3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.

4. Misadjusted fluores-cent lamp intensity.

5. Misadjusted developing section.

6. Misadjusted drum surface potential.

7. Dirty LPH.

8. Dirty main charger grid.

If the add toner indicator is lit, replenish toner.

Check the number of copies made with the current devel-oper. If it has reached the specified limit, replace the devel-oper.

Clean the drum or, if the maintenance level has been reached, replace it (see page 3-3-13 or 3-3-10).

Readjust the exposure amount (see page 3-3-24).

Readjust the position of the magnetic brush or doctor blade (see page 3-3-35 or 3-3-33).

Readjust the drum surface potential (see page 3-3-18).

Clean the LPH.

Clean the main charger grid.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3. Loose LPH data wire connectors.

4. Defective main PCB.

5. Defective LPH.

6. Loose ISU data wire connectors.

7. Defective ISU PCB.

Run simulation 159. If no test pattern is output, check the connection of the LPH data wire connectors and remedy if necessary.

Run simulation 159. If no test pattern is output after the LPH data wire connectors have been found to be correctly inserted, replace the main PCB.

Run simulation 159. If no test pattern is output after the LPH data wire connection and main PCB have been confirmed to be fine, replace the LPH.

Run simulation 159. If the test pattern is output, run sim-ulation 121. If the value of each channel is 255, check the connection of the ISU data wire connectors and remedy if necessary.

Run simulation 159. If the test pattern is output, run sim-ulation 121. If the value of each channel is close to 0, re-place the ISU PCB (check that the fluorescent lamp is lit).

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-7

340-3

(4) Background is visible. Causes 1. Dirty lens array in the CIS. 2. Deteriorated developer. 3. Misadjusted fluorescent lamp intensity. 4. Misadjusted developing section. 5. Misadjusted drum surface potential. 6. Dirty main charger shield.

1. Dirty lens array in the CIS.

2. Deteriorated devel-oper.

3. Misadjusted

fluorescent lamp intensity.

4. Misadjusted developing section.

5. Misadjusted drum surface potential.

6. Dirty main charger shield.

Clean the lens array in the CIS.

Check the number of copies made with the current devel-oper. If it has reached the specified limit, replace the devel-oper.

Readjust the exposure amount (see page 3-3-24).

Readjust the doctor blade position (see page 3-3-33).

Readjust the drum surface potential (see page 3-3-18).

Clean the main charger shield first with a damp cloth and then with a dry cloth.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-8

340

(5) A white line appears longitudinally.

Causes 1. Dirty or flawed main charger grid. 2. Foreign matter in the developing section. 3. Flawed drum. 4. Dirty contact glass. 5. Dirty middle upper original roller. 6. Dirty LPH.

1. Dirty or flawed main charger grid.

2. Foreign matter in the developing assembly.

3. Flawed drum.

4. Dirty contact glass.

5. Dirty middle upper original roller.

6. Dirty LPH.

Clean the main charger grid. If the wire is flawed, replace it.

Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. If not, replace the developer (see page 3-3-31).

Replace the drum (see page 3-3-10).

Clean the contact glass.

Clean the middle upper original roller.

Clean the LPH.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(6) A black line appears longitudinally.

Causes 1. Dirty contact glass. 2. Dirty lens array in the CIS. 3. Dirty or flawed drum. 4. Deformed or worn cleaning blade. 5. Dirty middle upper original roller. 6. Dirty main charger wire.

1. Dirty contact glass.

2. Dirty lens array in the CIS.

3. Dirty or flawed drum.

4. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.

5. Dirty middle upper original roller.

6. Dirty main charger wire.

Clean the contact glass.

Clean the lens array in the CIS.

Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 3-3-13 or 3-3-10).

Replace the cleaning blade (see page 3-3-42).

Clean the middle upper original roller.

Clean the main charger wire. If the wire is flawed, replace it (see page 3-3-14).

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-9

340-3

(7) A black line appears laterally.

Causes 1. Flawed drum. 2. Dirty developing section.

1. Flawed drum.

2. Dirty developing section.

Replace the drum (see page 3-3-10).

Clean the developing section.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-10

340

(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other.

Causes 1. Dirty main charger wire. 2. Dirty lens array in the CIS. 3. Defective fluorescent lamp.

1. Dirty main charger wire.

2. Dirty lens array in the CIS.

3. Defective fluorescent lamp.

Clean the main charger wire. If it is extremely dirty, replace it (see page 3-3-14).

Clean the lens array in the CIS.

Run simulation 110 and check the fluorescent lamp. If any problem exists, replace the fluorescent lamp (see page 3-3-19).

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(9) Black dots appear on the image.

Causes 1. Dirty or flawed drum. 2. Deformed or worn cleaning blade. 3. Dirty or flawed cleaning fur brush.

1. Dirty or flawed drum.

2. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.

3. Dirty or flawed cleaning fur brush.

Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 3-3-13 or 3-3-10).

Replace the cleaning blade (see page 3-3-42).

Clean the cleaning fur brush or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 3-3-46).

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-11

340

(10) Image is blurred. Causes 1. Original is conveyed erratically. 2. Deformed press roller. 3. Paper conveying drive system problem.

1. Original is conveyed erratically.

A. Dirty or deformed front upper, middle upper, rear upper, front lower or rear lower original roller(s).

B. Original conveying drive system problem.

C. Original holding section installed incorrectly.

2. Deformed press roller.

3. Paper conveying drive system problem.

Clean or replace any of the front upper, middle upper, rear upper, front lower and rear lower original rollers if necessary.

Check the gears and belts. Grease the gears or readjust the belt tension if necessary (see page 3-3-63).

Reinstall.

Check visually and replace (see page 3-3-52).

Check the gears and belts. Grease the gears or readjust the belt tension if necessary (see pages 3-3-60 and 61).

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(11) The leading edge of the image is con-sistently misaligned with the original.

Causes 1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.

1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.

Readjust the leading edge registration (see page 3-3-23).

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-12

340-1

(12) The leading edge of the image is spo-radically misaligned with the original.

Causes 1. Registration clutch or bypass registration clutch

installed or operating incorrectly. 2. Original feed clutch installed or operating

incorrectly. 3. Loose original feed drive belt 1.

1. Registration clutch or bypass registration clutch installed or operating incorrectly.

2. Original feed clutch installed or operating incorrectly.

3. Loose original feed drive belt 1.

Check the installation position and operation of each clutch; if it has any operation problem, replace it.

Check the installation position and operation of the original feed clutch. If it has any operation problem, replace the clutch.

Check original feed drive belt 1 and readjust the belt tension (see page 3-3-63).

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(13) Paper creases. Causes 1. Paper curled. 2. Paper damp. 3. Misadjusted fixing pressure.

1. Paper curled.

2. Paper damp.

3. Misadjusted fixing pressure.

Check the paper storage conditions.

Check the paper storage conditions.

Check if the fixing unit pressure adjustment nuts are tightened correctly and, if not, remedy.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-13

340

(15) Image is partly missing.

Causes 1. Paper damp. 2. Paper creased. 3. Drum condensation. 4. Flawed drum. 5. Deformed pre-transfer inner upper guide.

1. Paper damp.

2. Paper creased.

3. Drum condensation.

4. Flawed drum.

5. Deformed pre-transfer inner upper guide.

Check the paper storage conditions.

Change the paper.

Clean the drum (see page 3-3-13).

Replace the drum (see page 3-3-10).

Remedy or replace.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(14) Offset occurs. Causes 1. Defective cleaning blade. 2. Cleaning solenoid malfunctioning. 3. Post-transfer lamp fails to light.

1. Defective cleaning blade.

2. Cleaning solenoid malfunctioning.

3. Post-transfer lamp fails to light.

Replace the cleaning blade (see page 3-3-42).

Run simulation 45 and if the cleaning solenoid does not operate correctly, replace it.

Run simulation 44 and if the post-transfer lamp does not light, replace it.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-14

340

(16) Fixing is poor. Causes 1. Wrong paper. 2. Misadjusted fixing pressure. 3. Misadjusted fixing temperature. 4. Flawed press roller.

1. Wrong paper.

2. Misadjusted fixing pressure.

3. Misadjusted fixing temperature.

4. Flawed press roller.

Check if the paper meets specifications.

Check if the fixing unit pressure adjustment nuts are tightened correctly and, if not, remedy.

Readjust the fixing temperature.

Replace the press roller (see page 3-3-52).

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(17) Image is out of focus. Causes 1. LPH installed incorrectly. 2. Defective LPH. 3. Defective CIS.

1. LPH installed incorrectly.

2. Defective LPH.

3. Defective CIS.

Run simulation 158 and obtain the test pattern for image focus adjustment. If the image is not correct, adjust the LPH position (see page 3-3-28).

After adjusting the LPH position, run simulation 158. If the test pattern is not correct, replace the LPH.

If the image is still out of focus during normal copying after the correct pattern has been obtained by simulation 158, replace the CIS.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

3-6-15

340

(18) The center of the image is misaligned with the original.

Causes 1. Paper roll is not installed correctly on the roll shaft. 2. Paper is not placed correctly on the bypass table. 3. Original is not placed correctly.

1. Paper roll is not installed correctly on the roll shaft.

2. Paper is not placed correctly on the bypass table.

3. Original is not placed correctly.

Correct.

Correct.

Correct.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(19) One forth the A0 width of the image is white.

Causes 1. Defective CIS or ISU PCB. 2. Defective LPH. See (20) One forth the A0 width of the image is black for check procedures and corrective measures.

3-6-16

340-2

(20) One forth the A0 width of the image is black.

Causes 1. Defective CIS or ISU PCB. 2. Defective LPH.

Example If there is a problem with CH1 (CN1) but CH2 (CN2) to CH4 (CN4) are normal, check by swapping the connections of CN1 and CN2 of the CIS and ISU PCB. If the image problem area shifts with the location of CN-1, replace the CIS. If the image problem area doesn't shift, replace the ISU PCB.

1. Defective CIS or ISU PCB.

2. Defective LPH.

Change the connections of CN1, CN2, CN3 and CN4 of the CIS and ISU PCB as shown in the following example to locate the problem.

Run simulation 102. If no gray pattern is output, replace the LPH.

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

340

3-6-17

(1)J-04 appearsas soon asthe mainswitch isturned on.

(2)J-05 appearsas soon asthe mainswitch isturned on.

(3)J-06 appearsas soon asthe mainswitch isturned on.

A piece of paper torn from copypaper is caught around the by-pass registration roller alongthe paper conveying path.

Defective bypass registrationswitch.

A piece of paper torn from copypaper is caught around theoriginal trailing edge detectionswitch along the paper convey-ing path.

Defective original trailing edgedetection switch.

Roll paper is left uncut.

A piece of paper torn from copypaper is caught around the reg-istration switch, paper convey-ing switch or eject switch alongthe paper conveying path.

Defective registration switch.

Defective paper conveyingswitch.

3-6-2 Paper misfeeds

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

Check and remove it, if any.

If CN3-14 on the main PCBremains low when the bypassregistration switch is turned onand off, replace the bypass reg-istration switch.

Check and remove it, if any.

If CN3-13 on the main PCBremains low when the originaltrailing edge detection switch isturned on and off, replace theoriginal trailing edge detectionswitch.

Press the job stop/roll cut key tocut remaining paper and re-move it.

Check and remove it, if any.

If CN3-11 on the main PCBremains low when the registra-tion switch is turned on and off,replace the registration switch.

If CN3-15 on the main PCBremains low when the paperconveying switch is turned onand off, replace the paper con-veying switch.

340

3-6-18

(3)J-06 appearsas soon asthe mainswitch isturned on.

(4)Paper jam inthe 1st rollunit (J-01)occurs duringcopying fre-quently.

Defective eject switch.

Wrong paper.

A piece of paper torn from copypaper is left along the paperconveying path between the 1stroll unit and the registrationroller.

Guide plates or other compo-nents along the paper convey-ing path between the 1st rollunit and the registration rollerare deformed.

The roll paper feed upper rollerof the 1st roll unit is dirty withpaper powder.

The roll paper feed upper rollerof the 1st roll unit is deformedor worn.

Broken registration switch ac-tuator.

Defective registration switch.

Electrical problem with the up-per feed clutch.

If CN3-16 on the main PCBremains low when the ejectswitch is turned on and off, re-place the eject switch.

Check and, if the paper is ex-tremely curled or inappropriatefor copying, change it.

Check and remove it, if any.

Check and remedy or replaceany deformed parts.

Check the roll paper feed upperroller and, if it is dirty, clean itwith isopropyl alcohol.

Check and replace the roll pa-per feed upper roller if neces-sary.

Check and, if the actuator isbroken, replace the registrationswitch.

If the level of CN3-11 on themain PCB does not changewhen the registration switch isturned on and off, replace theregistration switch.

See page 3-6-42.

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

340

3-6-19

(5)Paper jam inthe 2nd rollunit (J-02)occurs duringcopying fre-quently.

(6)Paper jam inthe 3rd rollunit (optional)(J-03) occursduring copy-ing frequently.

Wrong paper.

A piece of paper torn from copypaper is left along the paper con-veying path between the 2nd rollunit and the registration roller.

Guide plates or other compo-nents between the 2nd roll unitand the registration roller aredeformed.

The roll paper feed upper rollerof the 2nd roll unit is dirty withpaper powder.

The roll paper feed upper rollerof the 2nd roll unit is deformedor worn.

Broken registration switch ac-tuator.

Defective registration switch.

Electrical problem with the mid-dle feed clutch.

Wrong paper.

A piece of paper torn from copypaper is left along the paper con-veying path between the 3rd rollunit and the registration roller.

Guide plates or other compo-nents between the 3rd roll unitand the registration roller aredeformed.

The roll paper feed upper rollerof the 3rd roll unit is dirty withpaper powder.

Check and, if the paper is ex-tremely curled or inappropriatefor copying, change it.

Check and remove it, if any.

Check and remedy or replaceany deformed parts.

Check the roll paper feed upperroller and, if it is dirty, clean itwith isopropyl alcohol.

Check and replace the roll pa-per feed upper roller if neces-sary.

Check and, if the actuator isbroken, replace the registrationswitch.

If the level of CN3-11 on themain PCB does not changewhen the registration switch isturned on and off, replace theregistration switch.

See page 3-6-42.

Check and, if the paper is ex-tremely curled or inappropriatefor copying, change it.

Check and remove it, if any.

Check and remedy or replaceany deformed parts.

Check the roll paper feed upperroller and, if it is dirty, clean itwith isopropyl alcohol.

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

340

3-6-20

(6)Paper jam inthe 3rd rollunit (optional)(J-03) occursduring copy-ing frequently.

(7)Paper jam inthe originalfeed section(J-05) occursduring copy-ing frequently.

The roll paper feed upper rollerof the 3rd roll unit is deformedor worn.

Broken registration switch ac-tuator.

Defective registration switch.

Electrical problem with thelower feed clutch.

Original is extremely curled.

The original is longer than themaximum length.

The surfaces of the front upper,middle upper, rear upper, frontlower or rear lower original roll-ers are dirty with paper powder.

The front upper, middle upper,rear upper, front lower or rearlower original rollers are de-formed or worn.

The original holding section isnot closed completely.

Electrical problem with the origi-nal feed clutch.

Defective original leading edgedetection switch.

Broken actuator of the originalleading or trailing edge detec-tion switch.

Check and replace the roll pa-per feed upper roller if neces-sary.

Check and, if the actuator isbroken, replace the registrationswitch.

If the level of CN3-11 on themain PCB does not changewhen the registration switch isturned on and off, replace theregistration switch.

See page 3-6-43.

Check and correct if necessary.

Use the original whose lengthmeets specifications.

Check and clean any dirty roll-ers with isopropyl alcohol.

Check each roller and, if neces-sary, replace it.

Close the original holding sec-tion completely.

See page 3-6-44.

If CN3-12 on the main PCBdoes not go low when the origi-nal leading edge detectionswitch is turned on and off, re-place the original leading edgedetection switch.

Check the actuator of eachswitch and, if it is broken, re-place the switch.

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

340

3-6-21

(8)Paper jaminside themain unit (J-06) occursduring copy-ing frequently.

A piece of paper torn from copypaper is left along the paperconveying path between theregistration roller and ejectroller.

Guide plates along the paperconveying path between theregistration roller and the ejectroller are deformed.

Dirty registration, pre-transferand/or eject rollers.

Deformed or worn registration,pre-transfer and/or eject roller.

Extremely dirty press roller orits separation claws.

Deformed press roller or itsseparation claws.

Broken separation charger wire.

Electrical problem with the pa-per conveying fan motor.

Electrical problem with the reg-istration clutch.

Electrical problem with the rollpaper conveying clutch.

Defective paper conveyingswitch.

Defective eject switch.

Check and remove it, if any.

Check and remedy or replaceany deformed guide plates.

Check and clean any dirty roll-ers with the isopropyl alcohol.

Check and replace the roller(s)if necessary.

Check and clean if dirty.

Check and replace if deformed(see page 3-3-52).

Check and replace the separa-tion charger wire if it is broken(see page 3-3-37).

See page 3-6-41.

See page 3-6-43.

See page 3-6-43.

If the level of CN3-15 on themain PCB does not changewhen the paper conveyingswitch is turned on and off, re-place the paper conveyingswitch.

If the level of CN3-16 on themain PCB does not changewhen the eject switch is turnedon and off, replace the ejectswitch.

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

340

3-6-22

(8)Paper jaminside themain unit(J-06) occursduring copy-ing frequently.

Defective fixing unit pulse sen-sor.

The eject switch actuator or thefixing unit pulse sensor disc isbroken.

If the level of CN3-17 on themain PCB does not changewhen the fixing unit pulse sen-sor is turned on and off, replacethe fixing unit pulse sensor.

Check the actuator and, if it isbroken, replace the ejectswitch. Check the disc and, if itis broken, replace the fixing unitpulse sensor.

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

340

3-6-23

3-6-3 PCB terminal voltages

Precautions• When handling the circuit boards, do not touch the components wth bare hands.• ICs can be damaged by static discharges. If a PCB contains ICs, do not touch the ICs,

cable connectors or edge connectors.• Store the circuit boards wrapped in aluminum foil, conductive spoge rubber, or similar

material.

(1) Power source PCB

C4C5

4CN1F1T6.3A/250V 1

3402805E1

C3

WA

RN

ING

FO

R C

ON

TIN

UE

D P

RO

TE

CT

ION

AG

AIN

ST

RIS

K

OF

FIR

E. R

EP

LAC

E O

NLY

WIT

H S

AM

E

TY

PE

AN

D R

AT

ING

OF

FU

SE

.

C2

L3

R1

L2C1

SQ

2

L1

SQ

3SQ

1

R7

+

+

TP

2

C13

R15

R8

C9

L5 D3R5 D1 ~ ~

C8

T1 CR1

R2

JP1

D2

L13R10

S Q1

R12JP4

C12

R11

R14

D5 Q2 5

JP3

L4

SG

Q3

S

R18

G

Q4

C14

S

G

R3

C7

GR16

JP5JP6

JP7JP8JP9

JP10

JP11

R44R43R42

C25

R40R41

R37R36

R39 R28

R32

R23

C17 C16R17

WH1 R01

R24

R26

101 C55R45

D10TS1

Z4

Z2

RC

D11R33

C26

C22

C23

JP15

JP33

Z9U2

1 1D28

D33

R76

C53

R73JP25R68 JP15

JP26C48

R56R55

Z11

C35

C39

CN2

CN4

CN3

C40

41

1 7

91

C37

R60 L14 D17 R61 Q5

C41

C42

L13

D16R63

L15

D18R64

ID20

Z7D22O D19 Z8

D21I O

C46

C47

CN7

L17

31

CN6

CN51 8

81 JP30

CR

R85R80

R57

R52

L10

L6 D12L7

C32

R47

C31R48

D13

L8 L9C33

R49

RD2 WH2

L11

D27R69R70R74

R71R75

R79R77R78

R82R81

Z10

R50JP21

D24 C28

R46

C27

C22

C23

C24

+R

29

R30JP

13JP12

R31

TP

1

RV

1

JP14

Z1

R34

R35

R90

R38

R91

Z5

++ 14

1

+

1Z

3

C15

D6

D8

C21

1

R25

R27

D9

C20 +

JP17

JP34

+

C18

6

7

5000949E

111

12

JP16

PS

C10

D7

R20

R22

JP32

R19

+

R5

R4

R13

C11

D4

R9

R21

C57

C56

C6

++

C19R

66JP

19JP

20

JP24

D26

D25

R72

D29 JP

27D

30D

32 D31

RV

2

JP18

C49

C51

R88

C50

C52

1Z12

R84

R87

R86

R89

R83

JP28

RC

C36

Z6

R54

D14

D15

R53

R51

+

+

++

R59

JP29

C38L12

C29

C30

C34 Y

EC

L19

C54 U

31

7

L15JP

31

R62

+

C43

C45

+

C44+

+

R65

D23

+

600878L-B U

1M

AD

E IN

JAP

AN

FS

-5V

-

C4C5

4CN1F1T10A/125V 1

3402804E1

C3

WA

RN

ING

FO

R C

ON

TIN

UE

D P

RO

TE

CT

ION

AG

AIN

ST

RIS

K

OF

FIR

E. R

EP

LAC

E O

NLY

WIT

H S

AM

E

TY

PE

AN

D R

AT

ING

OF

FU

SE

.

C2

L3

R1

L2C1

SQ

2

L1

SQ

3SQ

1

R7

+

+

TP

2

C13

R15

R8

C9

L5 D3R6 D1 ~ ~

C8

T1 CR1

R2

JP1

D2

L18R10

S Q1

R12JP4

C12

R11

R14

D5 Q2 G

JP3

L4

SG

Q3

S

R18

G

Q4

C14

S

G

R3

C7

GR16

JP5JP6

JP7JP8JP9

JP10

JP11

R44R43R42

C25

R40R41

R37R36

R39 R23

R32

R23

C17 C16R17

WH1 R01

R24

R26

101 C55R45

D10TS1

Z4

Z2

RC

D11R33

C26

C22

C23

JP22

JP33

Z9U2

1 1D28

D33

R76

C53

R73JP25R68 R67

JP26C48

R56R55

Z11

C35

C39

CN2

CN4

CN3

C40

41

1 7

91

C37

R60 L14 D17 R61 Q5

C41

C42

L13

D16R63

L15

D18R64

ID20

Z7D22O D19 Z8

D21I O

C46

C47

CN7

L17

31

CN6

CN51 8

81 JP30

CR

R85R80

R57

R52

L10

L6 D12L7

C32

R47

C31R48

D13

L8 L9C33

R49

RD2 WH2

L11

D27R59R70R74

R71R75

R79R77R78

R82R81

Z10

R50JP21

D24 C28

R46

C27

C23

C23

C24

+R

29

R30JP

13JP12

R31

TP

1

RV

1

JP14

Z1

R34

R35

R90

R38

R91

Z5

++ 14

1

+

1Z

3

C15

D6

D8

C21

1

R25

R27

D9

C20 +

JP17

JP34

+

C18

6

7

5000855E

111

12

JP16

PS

C10

D7

R20

R22

JP32

R19

+

R5

R4

R13

C11

D4

R9

R21

C57

C56

C6

++

C19R

66JP

19JP

20

JP24

D26

D25

R72

D29 JP

27D

30D

32 D31

RV

2

JP18

C49

C51

R88

C50

C52

1Z12

R84

R87

R86

R89

R83

JP28

RC

C36

Z6

R54

D14

D15

R53

R51

+

+

++

R59

JP29

C38L12

C29

C30

C34 Y

EC

L19

C54 U

31

7

L15JP

31

R62

+

C43

C45

+

C44+

+

R65

D23

+

6000728L-C U

1M

AD

E IN

JAP

AN

FS

-5V

-

220 – 240 V area 120 V area

340

3-6-24

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

1-1 1-4 Local voltage AC supply, input

2-1 2-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

3-1, 2, 3, 4 3-5, 6, 7, 8 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

4-1, 2, 3, 4 4-5, 6 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

5-1, 2, 3 5-5, 6, 7 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, output

6-1, 2, 3, 4 6-5, 6, 7, 8 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, output

7-1 7-2 +12 V DC +12 V DC supply, output

7-3 7-2 –12 V DC –12 V DC supply, output

MADE IN JAPAN 7000267L-C U-2

C5

R14

R17R18C8

C7

C6R11

R12R10

R1

R7

R2

C2

R6 Z1

R3

R9

110

R4

D1

1

JP1C

N1

D2

JP2

C9

R15

R16

RV

1

C3

C1

R5

R8

JP3

D1 FS-1V

C4

R13

+

+

1

YEC

MADE IN JAPAN

7000268L-B

C4

C3

C8

R7

R8FS-1V

R12R10

+

YEC

R16

R5R4

C7

R6

R13 C6

R11

R17

R18

R19

D1

D2

R2

R1

JP1

R15

U-3

R9

CN11 7

Q1

C1

Z1 1

R3

Z2D3 RV1

C2

1

C5 R14

340

3-6-25

(2) LPH power source PCB

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

A-1 A-3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

B-1 B-5, 6, 7, 8 5 V DC 5 V DC supply to LPH, output

B-2 B-5, 6, 7, 8 5 V DC 5 V DC supply to LPH, output

B-3 B-5, 6, 7, 8 5 V DC 5 V DC supply to LPH, output

B-4 B-5, 6, 7, 8 5 V DC 5 V DC supply to LPH, output

MADE IN JAPAN3402806

YEC 6000727L-C

C26

C7

D4

C2

L1

R1

R19

R18

R9

C4 C3+ ++

R10

R7

R5

R15

JP1

R17

R13

C13C11 C

22

C10R12

R23

R26

R22

R21

R27

R30

R3

R11

R2

R31

R29

R32

R20

C24

JP3

R25

R24

R4

Z2

D6T1D7

C9

Z3

C20

C21

C19

CN8

C25

L5

81

1 1

R28

R CZ4

C12R14

C14

D8

CNV

RV11 2

R16

R6

SG

Q1

D3

Z1

C23

RC

Z5

D10

JP2

++

+

+

+

+ L2

C18

C16

C17

C28

C27

D1

F1 10A/125V

WARNING

FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE,REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.

3 1CNA

5

1

7

12

C15

L3L4

D9

TS

1

JP4

C6

R8 D

2

C1

C5

D5

D8 R

DW

H

340

3-6-26

(3) Main PCB

IC34

ALS

197

IC35

ALS

192

IC51

ALS

192

IC68

ALS

192

IC69

ALS

192

IC81

ALS

192

IC90

F24

5

IC91

F24

5

IC10

1 F

245

IC10

9

F24

5

IC18

A

LS19

2

CO

N19

CO

N20

IC12

A

LS19

2

IC13

A

LS19

2

IC23

A

LS19

7

IC43

U

PD

4228

0GU

IC44

U

PD

4228

0GU

IC24

F

374

IC25

A

C14

IC26

F

74

BS

8IC

14 A

LS19

2IC

15 A

LS19

7IC

16 A

LS19

2IC

27

F04

IC29

LS

07IC

29

ALS

192

IC30

A

LS19

7IC

31

ALS

197

IC32

A

LS19

7IC

33

ALS

192

IC45

F

374

IC46

F

04IC

47

HC

14IC

49

ALS

192

IC50

A

LS19

2

IC62

F

374

IC63

F

74IC

65

F04

IC66

F

157

IC48

A

LS19

7B

S9

BS

5

IC84

C

Y7C

185A

IC88

C

Y7C

185A

IC10

6 T

CS

5328

BJ

IC89

H

DC

G43

IC87

C

Y7C

185A

IC78

U

PD

4855

05G

IC87

C

Y7C

185A

IC79

CY

7C18

5AIC

80 C

Y7C

185A

RA

5

RA

10

RA

6R

A7

IC42

UP

D42

280G

U

IC60

UP

D42

280G

U

BS

4 B

S3

RA

12

RA

17

IC100

CH

TG

43R

A24

BS

12

CO

N21

BS

10 B

S11

X3

RA

11

IC77

F

245

IC85

F

245

IC97

F

04IC

86

F24

5

IC94

T

CZ

03

IC86

F

245

IC61

F

ILL1

7

IC12

1 LN

CG

43

IC18

7 F

245

CON22

RA

15

RA

20

RA

21

RA

22

RA

23

RA

18

RA

13

RA

14 RA

19

RA

29

RA

16

NF

357

NF

283 12

0NF

358

NF

359

NF

310

NF

315

NF503

NF

360

NF

285

81

108109

144

NF502

7372

37

36 1

208

1

NF135 NF138 NF160 NF184 NF185 NF209 NF250

NF247

NF248NF208

NF183

NF155

NF158

NF159

NF154

NF89

NF88

NF87

NF85

NF84

NF150

NF151NF177

NF205

NF245

NF152

NF153

NF181

NF182

NF207

NF206

NF246

NF282

NF284

A30

B30

B1 B16

A16 A1B1

A1A1

B1

NF

249

105

156

157

104

53

52

11

11111111

111

9999999

1 1 1 1 1 11

1515

15 15

1 1

111

13

1

11

11

1

11

11

111

11

11

118

89

1

99

99

118

8

89

999

99

99

9

11

11

1

1515

15

1

11

11

11

1

11

98

88

NF

180

158

157

104

105

208

52

53

11

11

15

1

NF

244

1111

1

11

11

81

88

NF

281

51

50 3118

8

1

8

30

A1

B30

A30 B1

51

52

1 2

99

100

49

50

NF90NF91

DI9

DI7DI6

K A C

K A C

K A C

C

C

C

C

C

K A

K A

K A

K A

K A

C

K A

C

K A

C

K A

C

K A

DI10

DI12

DI14

DI16DI15

DI18DI17

DI13

DI11

NF93 NF94

NF99

NF102NF103

NF97

NF101

NF105

NF92

NF98

NF120 NF122 NF124 NF126 NF128 NF130 NF132 NF134

NF26 NF27 NF29 NF31 NF33 NF34 NF36 NF37 NF38 NF39 NF40 NF41 NF43 NF45 NF46 NF48 NF49 NF51 NF52 NF53 NF55 NF57 NF58 NF60

NF

137

NF

138

NF

139

NF

140

NF

141

NF

142

NF

161

NF

162

NF

163

NF

164

NF

105

NF

166

NF

186

NF

187

NF

188

NF

189

NF

143

NF

144

NF

145

NF

146

NF

167

NF

168

NF

169

NF

170

NF

171

NF

172

NF

193

NF

194

NF

195

NF

196

NF110 NF121 NF123 NF125 NF127 NF129 NF131 NF133

NF73 NF74 NF75 NF76 NF77 NF78 NF79 NF80

NF

190

NF

191

NF

192

NF

210

NF

197

NF

198

NF

199

NF

216

NF

211

NF

212

NF

213

NF

214

NF

217

NF

218

NF

219

NF

220

NF

215

NF

253

NF

254

NF

255

NF

221

NF

258

NF

259

NF

260

1515

NF

251

NF

252

NF

286

NF

287

NF

289Z

N

F29

0Z

NF

291Z

N

F28

9 N

F31

6 N

F31

7 N

F31

8 N

F31

9 N

F30

3Z

NF

320

NF

256

NF

257

NF

290

NF

291

NF

292

NF

292Z

N

F29

3Z

NF

288

NF

295

NF

321

NF

322

NF

323

NF

324

NF

304Z

N

F30

5Z

NF396 NF398 NF399 NF400 NF401 NF402 NF403 NF404 NF405 NF406 NF407 NF408 NF410 NF411

IC10

8 A

LS19

7

IC12

5 A

LS19

7

IC12

6 A

LS19

7IC

124

F37

4

IC16

0 F

74

IC15

8 A

LS19

7

IC15

5 A

LS19

2IC

157

ALS

197

IC15

9 A

LS19

2

IC16

1 LS

07

IC15

6 A

LS19

7

ALS

192

IC11

4 U

PD

4855

05G

IC11

5 A

LS19

2

IC14

2 F

04

IC14

0 F

74

IC15

4

IC14

1 F

04

IC11

3 T

C55

328B

J

BS

2

IC12

3 T

C55

328B

J

IC12

2 T

C55

328B

J

IC13

9 T

C55

328B

J

IC13

8 T

C55

328B

J

IC15

2 U

PD

4288

0GU

IC13

7 T

C55

328B

J

RA

34

BS

1

CO

N18

CON17

A17

B17

IC15

3 F

374

IC15

1 F

374

IC16

2 F

374

RA

42

IC10

5 Y

C55

3288

JIC

104

CY

7C18

5A

IC13

6 T

C55

328B

J

IC150 AEPG43RA36

RA37

IC11

2

IUP

G43

C16

7C

170

CO

N5

••

••

••

••

••

•6

78DE

C 2

2V-O

YS

D-E

0005

10-0

01-A

RA

061Z

RA

48R

A46

RA

45R

A44

RA

062Z

8

1A

1

B1

11

11

1

11

98

9

99

A50

B50

11

1

1

1

1

NF

446

RA

064Z

RA

063Z

120

91

90

1

7

+

NF

394

RA

26N

F38

6

NF

352

NF

354

NF353

NF351NF350

31

60

30

13

1

15

361

144 109 108

15

1

60

61

91

90

19

31

37 72

73

NF395

NF392

NF393

NF432

NF433

NF412NF375 NF413

NF414

NF416

NF419NF421

NF422NF377 NF031Z

NF364

NF423

NF415 NF417 NF418 NF420

NF374NF361

1515

11

11

1115

1515

11

NF

397

NF

409

NF

373

4816

01

41

8012

1

1 1 1 1

15 1 15

15

1

15

9

9

9

9

8

1111

1

15

131

88

11

99

NF

380

NF

427

NF

381

NF

439

IC41

1Z

UP

C35

8G2

BS

103

IC22 M3881M2-061FP

CON16

CON15

IC53

F

32

IC75

F

245

IC95

F

373

IC94

F

245

IC96

F

373

IC76

F

245

IC56

F

138

IC54

F

04IC

58

F32

IC55

F

32IC

57

F32

IC59

F

32

IC74

C

XK

5825

7BM

-70L

L

IC84

C

XK

5825

7BM

-70L

LIC

83

M27

C40

02-1

20

IC93

M

27C

4700

2-12

0

IC4

HC

4052

IC6

M62

354P IC

41

N14

0115

0A

IC35

1Z

UP

C35

8G2

CO

N2

CO

N1

3402

801

RE

V:1

CON3 CON7 CON8

IC36

1Z

HC

14IC

2 H

C39

3IC

1 H

C14

IC38

H

C39

3

IC52

H

C14

IC72

LS

07

IC71

LS

07

IC82

LS

07

IC92

LS

07

IC40

1Z

UP

C35

8G2

IC37

LS

07IC

19

LS07

UP

C39

3 IC

3

TC

7W14

F

IC20

IC39

HC

32IC

40H

C08

C16

C22

X1

11

1

1111

11

NF298 NF299 NF300 NF301

NF302 NF303 NF304 NF305

NF228 NF229 NF230 NF231

NF232 NF233 NF234 NF235 NF236

NF237 NF238 NF239 NF240 NF241 NF242 NF243

NF265

NF266

NF267

NF268

NF269

NF270

NF271

NF272

NF273

NF274

NF275

NF277

NF278

NF279

NF280

NF276

CP58

NF227

NF204

NF173

NF176

CP44

2121

1

15

1111

1

11

1

88

9

11

11

15

88

88

NF

175

NF

174

NF

147

NF

148

NF

149

6564

80

24

25

4041

1

1

5

1 2

5 6

TP

1716

64

49

1

2 20

19

483332

1

12

2122

DI5K

A C

++1

2

8

59

58

8

8 8

8 8 8 8 8 8

5

88

9

DI1

DI2

1 2

19 20

11

11

11

1

5

1 111

DI8

KA C

KA C

3334

12

2324

12

78

12

NF226 NF264

DI10

1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1

1

RA

33

IC103ZMCG43

IC11

1 M

3770

2S1A

FP

IC11

9 H

C14

IC13

0 H

C08

IC13

1 H

C74

IC13

3 T

D62

382

IC14

8 T

D62

308

IC14

7 T

D62

382

IC14

4 T

D62

382

IC33

1Z

TD

6238

2

IC11

6 LS

07IC

117

HC

14

IC33

2Z

TD

6238

2

IC14

6 T

D62

308

IC12

7 T

D62

308

IC12

8 T

D62

308

IC14

5 T

D62

308

IC14

9 T

D62

308

IC13

4 T

D62

308

IC13

5 T

C55

328B

J

IC11

8 T

A80

30F

IC1A

H

C02

TR10TR18

TR14

L4

L5

TR19

TR20

TR16

TR13

TR2

CON14

CON13

TR4

TR001E

TR6

TR7

TR5

TR3L1

L2

C163

C137

BS104

IC110

CON10

IC102 N1401150A

TR9

X2

BS13

NF297

NF296

NF326

NF325NF367

DI001E

A1

B1

A10

B10

ECB

ECB

BCEA10B10

A1B1

40

2524 1

80 4948 33

32

1716

641

65

A1A2

B1B2

A15A14

B15B14

6441

TR11

TR12

C12

5

IC13

2 LB

1651

CO

N6

CO

N4

CO

N11

TR

8

X4

M3881M2-061FP

RG

001E

NF327

NF328

NF329

NF331

NF332

NF333

NF334

NF335

NF336

NF337

NF338

NF339

NF340

NF341

NF342

NF343

NF345

NF346

NF347

NF348

NF

344

NF

370

NF

371

NF

372

NF349 NF391

NF390

25

120

1 30

41

40

24

164 65

NF

330

NF

368

11

58+

80

1

+

11

188

4

DI2

0 DI004E DI002E DI003E

DI005E

TR15

DI24

DI26

DI25

DI29 DI30

B

6

CE

B

DI23

DI27

DI28

B

B

C

C

E

E

DI33 DI34

DI331Z

DI31

DI21

DI32

CE

B

EC

99

11

10

11

1

99

1

A17

B17

A1

B1

1912

20

1

10

DI2

2

99

11 1

1

1110

9

RA

002E

RA

001E

RA

003E

RA

421Z

RA

422Z

RA

424Z

RA

423Z

RA

004E

10

8

1

1

11

88

OG

I10

1 81

KA

KA

A

A

A

EB

C

EB

C

EB

C

EB

C

EB

C

KA C

EB

C

EB

EB

C

EB

C

EB

C

C

C

340-3

3-6-27

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

1-1 5-6, 7 +12 V DC +12 V DC supply, input

1-2 5-6, 7 –12 V DC –12 V DC supply, input

2-2 2-1 DTH detection, input

2-5 2-3 FTH1 detection, input

2-6 2-3 FTH2 detection, input

2-7 2-4 FTH3 detection, input

2-8 2-4 FTH4 detection, input

2-10 2-9 ETTH detection, input

2-14 2-13 FLTH detection, input

2-16 2-15 DPS detection, input

2-18 2-17 TNS detection, input

2-19 5-6, 7 DB control, output

3-1 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC KC*1 connected/not connected detection,input

3-3 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC Transfer charger shorting detection, input

3-4 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC 1st roll unit installed/not installeddetection, input

3-5 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC 2nd roll unit installed/not installeddetection, input

3-6 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC 3rd roll unit*1 installed/not installeddetection, input

3-7 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC TDTDSW waste toner tank set/not set,input

3-8 5-6, 7 5/0 V DC OFS toner overflow detection, input

3-9 5-6, 7 5/0 V DC RLDSW-U on/off, input

3-10 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC (pulse) PS-U on/off, input

3-11 5-6, 7 0/ 5V DC RSW on/off, input

3-12 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC OLDSW on/off, input

3-13 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC OTDSW on/off, input

3-14 5-6, 7 5/0 V DC BYPRSW on/off, input

3-15 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC PCSW on/off, input

3-16 5-6, 7 5/0 V DC ESW on/off, input

3-17 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC (pulse) FPS on/off, input

3-18 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC (pulse) PFM FG, input

3-19 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC PSSW1-U on/off, input

3-20 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC PSSW2-U on/off, input

3-21 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC OSSW1 on/off, input

*1 Optional

340-3

3-6-28

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

3-22 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC OSSW2 on/off, input

3-23 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC OFM SPEED1, output

3-24 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC OFM ENA, output

3-25 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC OFM SPEED2, output

3-26 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC PFM SPEED1, output

3-27 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC DCM2PCB RESET, output

3-28 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC PFM SPEED2, output

3-29 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC PFM ENA, output

3-30 3-31 0/5 V DC (pulse) DCM2PCB serial communication, input

3-32 3-33 0/5 V DC (pulse) DCM2PCB serial communication, output

3-34 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC BYPTIMSW on/off, input

4-1A 4-2A 24/0 V AC TM on/off, output

4-3A 5-6, 7 0/7.7 V DC SSR3*1 on/off, output

4-4A 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC Auto shutoff on/off, output

4-5A 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC FFM-R, FFM-L on/off, output

4-6A 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC PCFM on/off, output

4-7A 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC OFCL on/off, output

4-8A 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC FCL-U on/off, output

4-9A 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC RWCL-U on/off, output

4-10A 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC KC count on/off, output

4-11A 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC TC count on/off, output

4-12A 5-2, 3 0/15.5 V DC PCHL on/off control, output

4-13A 5-2, 3 0/15.5 V DC DH on/off control, output

4-14A 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC RH-U*2 on/off control, output

4-15A 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC RH-L*2,3 on/off control, output

4-16A 5-2, 3 0/2.7 V DC PRY1, PRY2 on/off, output

4-17A 5-2, 3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply to PRY1, PRY2, output

4-1B 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC Transfer charger on/off, output

4-2B 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC Separation charger on/off, output

4-3B 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC Developing bias on/off, output

4-4B 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC Developing bias positive/negative polarityswitching, output

4-5B 5-2, 3 0/5.5 V DC FFM-R, FFM-L full-/half-speed, output

4-6B 5-2, 3 0/4.8 V DC PCFM full-/half-speed, output

4-7B 5-6, 7 0/7.7 V DC SSR1 on/off, output

4-8B 5-6, 7 0/7.7 V DC SSR2 on/off, output

4-9B 5-2, 3 0/18.7 V DC R-Lamp on/off, output

*1 For 230 V, 50 Hz models only. *2 Optional for 220 – 240 V models.*3 Optional for 120 V models.

340-3

3-6-29

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

4-12B 5-2, 3 0/15.5 V DC RTL on/off control, output

4-13B 5-2, 3 0/15.5 V DC FLH on/off control, output

4-14B 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC RH-M*1 on/off, output

4-17B 5-2, 3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

5-1 5-2, 3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

5-4, 5 5-6, 7 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, input

6-1 5-2, 3 0/5.5 V DC LPHFM1 full/half-speed, output

6-2 5-2, 3 0/2.6 V DC CFM full-/half-speed, output

6-3 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC CFM on/off, output

6-4 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC CSOL hold/off, output

6-5 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC CSOL pull/off, output

6-6 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC SSOL on/off, output

6-7 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC RCL on/off, output

6-8 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC CCL on/off, output

6-9 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC RPCCL on/off, output

6-10 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC FCL-M on/off, output

6-11 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC RWCL-M on/off, output

6-12 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC FCL-L*1, 2 on/off, output

6-13 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC RWCL-L*1, 2 on/off, output

6-14 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC BYPRCL on/off, output

6-15 5-2, 3 0/5.5 V DC LPHFM2 full/half-speed, output

6-17 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC Main chager on/off control, output

6-18 5-2, 3 0/24 V DC FL on/off control, output

6-19 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC MHVT shorting detection, input

6-20 5-2, 3 24/0 V DC SSW1, SSW2 on/off, input

7-1 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC DRM drive/stop control, output

7-2 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC (pulse) DRM clock, output

7-4 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC DM drive/stop control, output

7-5 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC (pulse) DM clock, output

7-6 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC FDM drive/stop control, output

7-7 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC (pulse) FDM clock, output

7-8 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC DRM lock detection, input

7-11 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC OHSW on/off, input

7-12 5-6, 7 5/0 V DC CHPSW1 on/off, input

7-13 5-6, 7 5/0 V DC CHPSW2 on/off, input

7-14 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC RLDSW-M on/off, input

7-15 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC RLDSW-L*1, 2 on/off, input

*1 Optional for 220 – 240 V models.*2 Optional for 120 V models.

340-3

3-6-30

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

7-16 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC (pulse) PS-M detection, input

7-17 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC (pulse) PS-L*1, 2 detection, input

7-18 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC PSSW1-M on/off, input

7-19 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC PSSW2-M on/off, input

7-20 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC PSSW1-L*3 on/off, input

7-21 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC PSSW2-L*3 on/off, input

7-22 5-6, 7 FL light intensity control, output

7-23 5-6, 7 Grid control, output

8-1 5-6, 7 5 V DC 5 V supply to OPCB, output

8-2 8-3 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB serial communication, input

8-4 8-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB serial communication, output

8-6 8-7 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB clock, output

8-8 5-6, 7 0/5 V DC Job stop/roll cut key on/off, input

11-1 11-2 0/5 V DC (pulse) ISUPCB serial communication, input

11-3 11-4 0/5 V DC (pulse) ISUPCB serial communication, output

11-5 11-8 0/5 V DC ISUPCB reset, output

11-6 11-8 0/5 V DC ISUPCB connected/not connecteddetection, input

11-7 11-8 FL light intensity feedback control, input

*1 Optional for 220 – 240 V models. *2 Optional for 120 V models.*3 Optional

340-2

3-6-31

(4) Servo motor control 1 PCB

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

1-1 1-2 24 V DC DM drive, output

1-3 1-4 0.5 V AC (sinusoidal) DM FG, input

2-1 2-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

2-4 2-5 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, input

3-1 2-5 0/5 V DC DM drive/stop control, input

3-2 2-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) DM clock, input

3-3 2-5 0/5 V DC FDM drive/stop control, input

3-4 2-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) FDM clock, input

3-5 2-5 0/5 V DC DRM drive/stop control, input

3-6 2-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) DRM clock, input

3-7 2-5 0/5 V DC DRM lock detection, output

4-1 4-2 24/0 V DC (pulse) DRM drive, output

4-3 4-4 0.5 V AC (sinusoidal) DRM FG, input

5-1 5-2 24/0 V DC (pulse) FDM drive, output

5-3 5-4 0.5 V AC (sinusoidal) FDM FG, input

CA

UT

ION

FOR

CONT

INUE

D PR

OTE

CTIO

N AG

AINS

T RI

SK O

F FI

RE.

REPL

ACE

ONL

Y W

ITH

SAM

E TY

PE A

ND R

ATIN

G O

F FU

SE.

DMCP

-050

-A15

E-

0757

A 34

0280

8

CN5 CN3 CN2CN4 CN1

C2

+J2

J1

C3

1 4 1 4 7 1 1 4 5 1

J7J8

J15

J16

J17

J19

J14

CX

2J1

3

R49

R43 R24

R28

R29

R6

R7

R23

R20

C11

C15

J12

R22

R39

R48

R47

TR

12

R41

R40

R30

R21

R57

R56

R13

R4

R5

R3

J4

125V

6.3A

F1C

X1

J5

IC3

IC2

R42

J20

J18

J11

+

+

+

+

+TP3

R38

R37

J23

R18

Q3 Q2

E B E B

IC1

Q1

E B

D6 D5 D3

R1

D1D4 D2

J22 +C1

J21

R50R51

R53R58

R19

R52C20

C19R44R45

R46

TR13

C17

C22

C21

TR14

TP2

TR11

C10

C14R31R32

TR6

TR10

J9J10

C16R35

R33R27

R25R26

R34R35 R2

C12

TR7

TR5

TR9

C13

J6

TP1

+R14R15

R3C7

C6

J3

R10

R17

R54

TR3

R8R9

C5

TR2

TR1

C4

C8

+

340

3-6-32

(5) Servo motor control 2 PCB

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

1-1 1-4, 5 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

1-2 1-4, 5 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

1-3 1-6 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, input

2-1 1-6 0/5 V DC OFM SPEED1, input

2-2 1-6 0/5 V DC OFM ENA, input

2-3 1-6 0/5 V DC OFM SPEED2, input

2-4 1-6 0/5 V DC PFM SPEED1, input

2-5 1-6 0/5 V DC DCM2PCB RESET, input

2-7 1-6 0/5 V DC PFM SPEED2, input

2-8 1-6 0/5 V DC PFM ENA, input

2-10 2-11 0/5 V DC (pulse) DCM2PCB serial communication, output

2-12 2-13 0/5 V DC (pulse) DCM2PCB serial communication, input

3-1 3-2 0/24 V DC (pulse) PFM drive, output

3-3 3-5 5 V DC 5 V DC supply to PFM, output

3-4 3-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) PFM FG, input

4-1 4-2 0/24 V DC (pulse) OFM drive, output

4-3 4-6 0/5 V DC (pulse) OFM FG (A), input

4-4 4-6 0/5 V DC (pulse) OFM FG (B), input

4-5 4-6 5 V DC 5 V DC supply to OFM, output

CN

213

1C

N3

15

DA1 FT1 SDG

FT2 SDG

DA2 FT3 SDG

FT4 SDG

FT5 SDG

DA3

6172802R6

C

DA

6A

K

KU-42294V-O H C50R

1 C1

D1

D2

D3

R2 D

4D

5 D6

R3 D

7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

R4

C2

D27

D13

D14

D15

R5

D18

D19

D16

D17

D20

1

CN

45

C6

C7

µPC3935

1

IC5

C13

-

D23

-

TR14

C14

C15

-D25

FUSE1 125V 5A FUSE2 125V 5A

D22

R7

IC13 BCE

IC 0

74H

C14

1

8

IC111

8

IC10

74H

C05

74H

C07

5

1

IC12

C12

TD62304

1

8

IC9

µPC393 -

C11

-

CN1 16

C10

-

TR15B E

-C9

D24

TP2

TP1

JP1

TC57256AD-15

-C8

WARNING

FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE. REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.

AD

A5KC

TR

2E

TR

1E

D28C

4 - A

KD21

IC3

13 D26

K

A A

DA4

LBS-C5

-C3

3

1IC15

1

15IC14

1

11

IC6 74HC16

1

8

IC7

TH3B

74H

C00

1

8

IC2

74H

C14

1

8

IC4

µPC

324

uPD

7831

0AD

F1

182032

3351

52 64

-

X1

IC8

1

8

IC1 74HC14

340

3-6-33

(6) Output PCB

J1

J2

J3

J4 J5

J6

J7

R10

R

9 R

8

R7 R6 R5 R1 R2 R3 R4

J8

J9

J10

R14 R13 R12 R11

R15

R16

R17

R18

R19

R20

R21

TR1

TR2

TR3

TR4

TR5

TR6

TR7

BC

EB

CE

BC

EB

CE

BC

EB

CE

BC

E

CN1 CN2

CN

3C

N4

CN

5

CN6

CN

7

IC1

TD

6250

2

1

1

9

11

14

23

7

4

19

151

••

•

3402

809

RE

V:1

MC

S M

27A

94

V-0

340

3-6-34

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

1-1 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

1-2 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

1-3 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

1-4 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

1-5 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

2-1 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

2-2 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

2-3 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC suppy, output

2-4 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

3-1 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

3-2 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

3-3 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

3-4 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

4-3 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

5-1 6-9 0/24 V DC RH-L*1, 2 on/off control, input

5-2 6-9 0/24 V DC RH-M*1 on/off control, input

5-3 6-9 0/24 V DC RH-U*1 on/off control, input

5-4 6-9 0/15.5 V DC DH on/off control, input

5-5 6-9 0/15.5 V DC FLH on/off control,input

5-6 6-9 0/15.5 V DC RTL on/off control, input

5-7 6-9 0/15.5 V DC PCHL on/off control, input

6-1 6-9 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

6-2 4-1 0/24 V DC RH-L*1, 2 on/off, output

6-3 4-1 0/24 V DC RH-M*1 on/off, output

6-4 4-1 0/24 V DC RH-U*1 on/off, output

6-5 4-1 0/24 V DC DH on/off, output

6-6 4-1 0/24 V DC FLH on/off, output

6-7 4-1 0/24 V DC RTL on/off, output

6-8 4-1 0/24 V DC PCHL on/off, output

7-1 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

7-2 4-1 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, output

*1 Optional for 220 – 240 V models.*2 Optional for 120 V models.

340

3-6-35

(7) Operation unit PCB

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

1-1 1-7 5 V DC 5 V DC supply, input

1-2 1-3 5/0 V DC (pulse) OPCB serial communication, output

1-4 1-5 5/0 V DC (pulse) OPCB serial communication, input

1-6 1-7 5/0 V DC (pulse) OPCB clock, input

1-8 1-7 0/5 V DC Job stop/roll cut key on/off, output

LED1LED4

LED5SW3

LED10

LED42

LED43

LED11

LED12

LED13

LED6

LED7

LED8

LED9

LED14

LED15

LED16

LED17

LED18

LED19

LED20

LED21

LED29

LED30

LED41

LED26

LED34 LED36

LED35 LED37 LED39

LED38 LED40

LED28

LED27

LED31

LED32

LED33

LED2

LED3

SW5 SW7 SW9

SW12

SW11 SW16

LED23

SW1

SW2

SW17

SW18

SW14

SW15

SW19

SW38

SW13

SW4

SW22

SW25

SW20 SW21 SW26 SW27 SW28

SW24SW23

SW6 SW8 SW10

SW29 SW30 SW31

SW32 SW33 SW34

SW35 SW36 SW37

LED24

LED25

LED22

340

3-6-36

(8) Inverter PCB

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

1-1 1-3 FL light control, input

1-2 1-3 0/24 V DC FL on/off control, input

1-4 1-3 24 V DC 24 V DC supply, input

2-1 2-2 FL lighting, output

2-5 2-6 FL lighting, output

MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC WORKS, LTD. CAUTIONFor continued protection against risk of fire. Repiase only with same type and ratings of fuse.

R13-1 R13-2R20 C9 C4

C8C10

ZDR15

R18

R16

R17

IC

AD1C1

960903

Q1

Q2

C5

Q6

D

R19

R10

R14 C6

R9 C2 Q3

C7

B

E

B

E

E

B

R1 R2 R5 R6 R7 R8 R3 R4

OT

MG1

MG2

R11 AD2 R12

ICP

9609 18S

L2L1

B

E

Q5Q4

B

E C3

HTJ1

1

2

3

4

5

6

4

3

2

1

+24

GND

ons

Vrem

CN1

CN2

T125V 3A

Model No.CHF651HPA-20M DC24V 1.6A 3402807

340

3-6-37

(9) ISU PCB

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

7-1 7-2 5/0 V DC (pulse) ISUPCB serial communication, output

7-3 7-4 5/0 V DC (pulse) ISUPCB serial communication, input

7-5 7-8 5/0 V DC ISUPCB reset, input

7-6 7-8 0/5 V DC ISUPCB connected/not connecteddetection, ouptput

7-7 7-8 FL light intensity feedback control, output

IC5

ALS

193

IC7

HC

14

IC8

HC

14

IC10

LS

07

IC70

F

521

IC71

F

245

IC28

T

C53

328J

IC29

T

C53

328J

IC31

T

C53

328J

IC40

T

C45

66F

DI1

0IC39

HC

4066

F

LM63

61M

IC

42

IC6

26LS

31

IC25

26

LS31

IC26

26

LS31

A17 B17

DI1

K A

C

A1 B1

TA

8030

F

IC27

D16

X2

BS9

NF7

NF5 NF29

IC11SHDG43

RA8

RA7

C79

IC9 M380221-4SKT

NF

37

RA

6 BS

7X1

CN

7

RA

1R

A2

RA

3

RA

4R

A5

IC12

F

245

IC30

T

C55

328J

BS

634

0280

3 R

EV

-2

F24

5 IC

13B

S8

LM74

1M

IC38

NF62

NF60

NF64NF63

NF61

8

8 72 1 8

11

115

1515

15

4

1

11

1

1

11

18

5

1111

1

8 5

1

9 999

1 1 1 1

11

A

1133

1208

157

156

105104

5253

4948

32

64 17161

CN

1C

N2

CN

3C

N4

C13

5

C71C72

IC36

LM

6361

MIC

34

LM63

61M

IC32

LM

6361

M

IC33

H

C40

66F

IC16

LM

6361

M

IC15

U

PC

4081

G2

UP

C40

81G

2 IC

14

BS

2

BS

1

VR

3

VR

1V

R5

C132

C134

C120

C109

C100

C99

C108

C121

BS

3

BS

4

CN5

VR

4

NF

10

NF

11

DI2

IC1 AGCZ10

IC3 AGCZ10

IC4 AGCZ10

IC2 AGCZ10

NF

16N

F13

NF

9N

F12

NF

14N

F15

UP

C40

81G

2 IC

23

IC

24

UP

2408

1G2

IC41

LM

6361

MIC

20

UP

C40

81G

2 IC21

U

PC

4081

G2

IC37

H

C40

66F

IC35

H

C40

66F

UP

C40

81G

2 IC

17U

PC

4081

G2

IC18

IC19

LM

6361

M

LM63

61M

IC

22D

I5

DI1

3

DI9

DI8

DI7

DI4

164

49

48 3332

17

16

164

49

48 3332

17

16

164

49

48 3332

17

16

164

49

48

1 7

3332

17

16

55

55

55

5

11

1

1

1

1

11

11

1

1

55

8

55

55

1 5

1

8

5

5

101

101

101

101

++

+

+

+

++

++

+

+

340

3-6-38

Measure the input voltage.

Check that the power cord is firmly con-nected to the outlet.

Check for continuity. If none, replace thepower cord.

Check for continuity across the input andoutput terminals. If none, replace the filter.

Check for continuity across the contacts. Ifnone, replace the switch.

Check for continuity across the contacts ofeach switch. If none, replace the switch.

Check for continuity across the fuse. If none,find the cause of fuse blowing and replace it.

Check if 24 V and 5 V DC are output whenAC is supplied. If not, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil of powerrelay 1. If none, replace the relay.

Check if power relay 1 operates whenCN4-16A on the main PCB is set to low. Ifnot, replace the relay.

Check for continuity across power relay 1. Ifnone with the relay on, replace it.

Check for continuity across the coil of powerrelay 2. If none, replace the relay.

Check if power relay 2 operates whenCN4-16A on the main PCB is set to low. Ifnot, replace the relay.

Check for continuity across power relay 2. Ifnone with the relay on, replace it.

Find and remove the cause of the breakertripping and reset the breaker.

(1)The machinedoes not op-erate at allwhen themain switch isturned on.

There is no powerat the wall outlet.

The power plug isnot connected cor-rectly.

The power cordhas a break.

The noise filter isdefective.

The main switch isdefective.

Safety switch 3, 4,5 or 6 is defective.

The fuse on thepower source PCBis blown.

The power sourcePCB is defective.

Power relay 1 isdefective.

Power relay 2 isdefective.

The noise filterbreaker hastripped.

3-6-4 Electrical problems

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

340-2

3-6-39

(2)The drive mo-tor does notoperate.

(3)The drummotor doesnot operate.

(4)The fixingdrive motordoes not op-erate.

The drive motorcoil is broken.

The main PCB isdefective.

Servo motor con-trol 1 PCB is de-fective.

The fuse on servomotor control 1PCB has blown.

The drum motorcoil is broken.

The main PCB isdefective.

Servo motor con-trol 1 PCB is de-fective.

The fuse on servomotor control 1PCB has blown.

The fixing drivemotor coil is bro-ken.

The main PCB isdefective.

Servo motor con-trol 1 PCB is de-fective.

The fuse on servomotor control 1PCB has blown.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the motor.

Run simulation 10. If no clock pulse is outputat CN7-5 on the main PCB with 24 V DCpresent at CN7-4, replace the PCB.

Run simulation 10. If CN3-1 on servo motorcontrol 1 PCB goes low but the drive motordoes not rotate, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity. If none, find the causeof fuse blowing and replace it.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the motor.

Run simulation 10. If CN7-1 on the mainPCB goes low but no clock pulse is output atCN7-2, replace the PCB.

Run simulation 10. If CN3-5 on servo motorcontrol 1 PCB goes low but the drum motordoes not rotate, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity. If none, find the causeof fuse blowing and replace it.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the motor.

Run simulation 10. If CN7-6 on the mainPCB goes low but no clock pulse is output atCN7-7, replace the PCB.

Run simulation 10. If when CN3-3 on servomotor control 1 PCB goes low but the fixingdrive motor does not rotate, replace thePCB.

Check for continuity. If none, find the causeof fuse blowing and replace it.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

340-1

3-6-40

(5)The paperfeed motordoes not op-erate.

(6)The originalfeed motordoes not op-erate.

(7)The tonerfeed motordoes not op-erate.

The paper feedmotor coil is bro-ken.

The main PCB isdefective.

Servo motor con-trol 2 PCB is de-fective.

Power relay 3 isdefective.

Safety switch 1 or2 is defective.

The fuse on servomotor control 2PCB has blown.

The original feedmotor coil is bro-ken.

The main PCB isdefective.

Servo motor con-trol 2 PCB is de-fective.

The fuse on servomotor control 2PCB has blown.

The toner feedmotor coil is bro-ken.

The main PCB isdefective.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the motor.

Run simulation 11 and check if CN3-29 onthe main PCB goes low. If not, replace thePCB.

Run simulation 11. If CN2-8 on servo motorcontrol 2 PCB goes low but the paper feedmotor does not rotate, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil of powerrelay 3. If none, replace the relay.

Check if power relay 3 operates when CN6-20on the main PCB is set to high. If not, re-place the relay.

Check for continuity across power relay 3. Ifnone with the relay on, replace it.

Check for continuity across each safetyswitch. If none, replace it.

Check for continuity. If none, find the causeof fuse blowing and replace it.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the motor.

Run simulation 24 and check if CN3-24 onthe main PCB goes low. If not, replace thePCB.

Run simulation 24. If CN2-2 on servo motorcontrol 2 PCB goes low but the original feedmotor does not rotate, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity. If none, find the causeof fuse blowing and replace it.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the motor.

Run simulation 64. If 24 V AC is not outputacross CN4-1A and 4-2A on the main PCB,replace the PCB.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

340-3

3-6-41

(8)The paperconveying fanmotor doesnot operate.

(9)The coolingfan motordoes not op-erate.

(10)The right orleft fixing unitfan motordoes not op-erate.

(11)LPH fan mo-tor 1 does notoperate.

(12)The upper rollwinding clutchdoes not op-erate.

The paper convey-ing fan motor isdefective.

The main PCB isdefective.

The cooling fanmotor is defective.

The main PCB isdefective.

The right or leftfixing unit fan mo-tor is defective.

The main PCB isdefective.

The coil of LPH fanmotor 1 has abreak.

LPH fan motor 1 isdefective.

The main PCB isdefective.

The upper rollwinding clutch coilis broken.

The connectorterminals of theupper roll windingclutch make poorcontact.

The main PCB isdefective.

Run simulation 18. If CN4-6A on the mainPCB goes low but the paper conveying fanmotor does not rotate, replace the motor.

Run simulation 18. If CN4-6A on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Run simulation 18. If CN6-3 on the mainPCB goes low but the cooling fan motordoes not rotate, replace the motor.

Run simulation 18. If CN6-3 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Run simulation 18. If CN4-5A on the mainPCB goes low but the right or left fixing unitfan motor does not rotate, replace that mo-tor.

Run simulation 18. If CN4-5A on the mainPCB goes low replace the main PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace LPH fan motor 1.

Run simulation 18. If CN6-1 on the mainPCB goes low but LPH fan motor 1 does notrotate, replace the motor.

Run simulation 18. If CN6-1 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the mainPCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 05. If CN4-9A on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

340

3-6-42

(13)The middleroll windingclutch doesnot operate.

(14)The lower rollwindingclutch*1 doesnot operate.

(15)The upperfeed clutchdoes not op-erate.

(16)The middlefeed clutchdoes not op-erate.

The middle rollwinding clutch coilis broken.

The connectorterminals of themiddle roll windingclutch make poorcontact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The lower rollwinding clutch coilis broken.

The connectorterminals of thelower roll windingclutch make poorcontact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The upper feedclutch coil is bro-ken.

The connectorterminals of theupper feed clutchmake poor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The middle feedclutch coil is bro-ken.

The connectorterminals of themiddle feed clutchmake poor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 05. If CN6-11 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 05. If CN6-13 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 04. If CN4-8A on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 04. If CN6-10 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

*1 Optional.

340

3-6-43

(17)The lowerfeed clutch*1

does not op-erate.

(18)The roll paperconveyingclutch doesnot operate.

(19)The registra-tion clutchdoes not op-erate.

(20)The cutterclutch doesnot operate.

The lower feedclutch coil is bro-ken.

The connectorterminals of thelower feed clutchmake poor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The roll paper con-veying clutch coilis broken.

The connectorterminals of the rollpaper conveyingclutch make poorcontact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The registrationclutch coil is bro-ken.

The connectorterminals of theregistration clutchmake poor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The cutter clutchcoil is broken.

The connectorterminals of thecutter clutch makepoor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 04. If CN6-12 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 06. If CN6-9 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 06. If CN6-7 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 06. If CN6-8 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

*1 Optional.

340

3-6-44

(21)The bypassregistrationclutch doesnot operate.

(22)The originalfeed clutchdoes not op-erate.

(23)The cleaningsolenoid doesnot operate.

(24)The separa-tion claw sole-noid does notoperate.

The bypass regis-tration clutch coil isbroken.

The connectorterminals of thebypass registrationclutch make poorcontact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The original feedclutch coil is bro-ken.

The connectorterminals of theoriginal feed clutchmake poor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The cleaning sole-noid coil is broken.

The connectorterminals of thecleaning solenoidmake poor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The separationclaw solenoid coilis broken.

The connectorterminals of theseparation clawsolenoid makepoor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 08. If CN6-14 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 24. If CN4-7A on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the solenoid.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 45. If CN6-4 and CN6-5 onthe main PCB do not go low, replace thePCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace the clutch.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace them.

Run simulation 48. If CN6-6 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

340

3-6-45

(25)The fluores-cent lampdoes not light.

(26)The fluores-cent lampdoes not gooff.

(27)The pre-charging lampdoes not light.

(28)The post-transfer lampdoes not light.

The fluorescentlamp filament isbroken.

The fluorescentlamp socketmakes poor con-tact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The inverter PCBis defective.

The main PCB isdefective.

The inverter PCBis defective.

The pre-charginglamp has a break.

The main PCB isdefective.

The output PCB isdefective.

The post-transferlamp has a break.

The main PCB isdefective.

The output PCB isdefective.

Check for continuity across the filament. Ifnone, replace the lamp.

Check for continuity across the right and leftlamp sockets.

Run simulation 110. If CN1-2 on the inverterPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Run simulation 110. If CN6-18 on the mainPCB goes low but the fluorescent lamp doesnot light, replace the inverter PCB.

Check if CN6-18 on the main PCB remainslow constantly. If so, replace the main PCB.

Check if the fluorescent lamp goes off whenCN1-2 on the inverter PCB is high. If not,replace the PCB.

If CN1-2 on the inverter PCB is low withCN6-18 on the main PCB disconnected,replace the inverter PCB.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace the lamp.

Run simulation 44. If CN4-12A on the mainPCB fails to go low, replace the PCB.

Run simulation 44. If CN5-7 on the outputPCB goes low but CN6-8 does not, replacethe PCB.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace the lamp.

Run simulation 44. If CN4-12B on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the PCB.

Run simulation 44. If CN5-6 on the outputPCB goes low but CN6-7 does not, replacethe PCB.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

340

3-6-46

(29)Fixing heaterM or S doesnot turn on(C-630, C-631,C-640, C-641,C-650, C-660).

(30)Fixing heaterM or S fails toturn off (C-630,C-641, C-650,C-660).

Fixing heater M orS has a break.

Fixing unit thermalswitch 1 or 2 istripped.

Fixing unit thermis-tor 1 or 2 isshorted.

Solid state relay 1or 2 is defective.

The main PCB isdefective.

Solid state relay 1or 2 is defective.

The thermal sens-ing section of fixingunit thermistor 1 or2 is dirty.

Fixing unit thermis-tor 1 or 2 has abreak.

The main PCB isdefective.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, replace the heater.

Check for continuity across the terminals. Ifnone, locate and remove the cause of theproblem and replace fixing unit thermalswitch 1 or 2.

Measure resistance. If it is 0 Ω, replace fix-ing unit thermistor 1 or 2.

Measure resistances across the terminals. Ifthey are other than ∞ Ω across 1 and 2 andcontinuity in one direction across 3 and 4,replace solid state relay 1 or 2.

Run simulation 47. If CN4-7B and CN4-8Bon the main PCB do not go low, replace thePCB.

Measure resistances across the terminals. Ifthey are other than ∞ Ω across 1 and 2 andcontinuity in one direction across 3 and 4,replace solid state relay 1 or 2.

Visually check and clean if necessary.

Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replacethat thermistor.

Check if CN4-7B and CN4-8B on the mainPCB are low constantly. If so, replace thePCB.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

340

3-6-47

(31)No maincharging.

(32)No transfercharging.

The main chargerwire is broken.

The main chargerhousing leaks.

The main high-voltage trans-former connectorsmake poor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The main high-voltage trans-former is defective.

The transfercharger wire isbroken.

The transfercharger housingleaks.

The ST high-volt-age transformerconnectors makepoor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The ST high-volt-age transformer isdefective.

See page 3-6-5.

See page 3-6-4.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

340-1

3-6-48

(33)No separationcharging.

(34)No develop-ing bias.

(35)The job stop/roll cut keydoes not op-erate.

The separationcharger wire isbroken.

The ST high-volt-age transformerconnectors makepoor contact.

The main PCB isdefective.

The ST high-volt-age transformer isdefective.

The developingbias high-voltagetransformer con-nectors are notconnected cor-rectly or makepoor contacts.

The developingbias high-voltagetransformer is de-fective.

The main PCB isdefective.

The operation unitPCB is defective.

Visually check. Replace the wire if neces-sary.

Check if the connectors are securely con-nected. If not, remedy.

Check for continuity across the connectors.If none, replace them.

Run simulation 34 and, if CN4-2B on themain PCB does not go low, replace the mainPCB.

Run simulation 34. If separation charging isnot conducted with CN4-2B low, replace theST high-voltage transformer.

See page 3-6-9.

If CN1-8 on the operation unit PCB fails togo low when the job stop/roll cut key ispressed, replace the PCB.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

340

3-6-49

(36)The fluores-cent lampheater doesnot operate.

(37)The dehu-midifier doesnot operate.

(38)The upper rollunit heater*1

does not op-erate.

(39)The middleroll unit heater*1

does not op-erate.

The fluorescentlamp heater has abreak.

The main PCB isdefective.

The output PCB isdefective.

The dehumidifierhas a break.

The main PCB isdefective.

The output PCB isdefective.

The upper roll unitheater has abreak.

The upper roll unitheater switch isdefective.

The main PCB isdefective.

The output PCB isdefective.

The middle roll unitheater has abreak.

The middle roll unitheater switch isdefective.

The main PCB isdefective.

The output PCB isdefective.

Check the resistance across the terminals. Ifit is ∞ Ω, replace the heater.

If the fluorescent lamp heater operates withCN4-13B on the main PCB low, replace thePCB.

If CN6-6 on the output PCB fails to go lowwith CN5-5 low, replace the PCB.

Check the resistance across the terminals. Ifit is ∞ Ω, replace the heater.

If the dehumidifier operates with CN4-13Aon the main PCB low, replace the PCB.

If CN6-5 on the output PCB fails to go lowwith CN5-4 low, replace the PCB.

Measure the resistance across the termi-nals. If it is ∞ Ω, replace the heater.

Check for continuity across the switch. Ifnone with the switch set to on, replace it.

If the upper roll unit heater operates withCN4-14A on the main PCB low, replace thePCB.

If CN6-4 on the output PCB fails to go lowwith CN5-3 low, replace the PCB.

Measure the resistance across the termi-nals. If it is ∞ Ω, replace the heater.

Check for continuity across the switch. Ifnone with the switch set to on, replace it.

If the middle roll unit heater operates withCN4-14B on the main PCB low, replace thePCB.

If CN6-3 on the output PCB fails to go lowwith CN5-2 low, replace the PCB.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

*1 Optional for 220 – 240 V models.

340-3

3-6-50

(40)The lowerroller unitheater*1 doesnot operate.

(41)LPH fan mo-tor 2 does notoperate.

The lower roll unitheater has abreak.

The lower roll unitheater switch isdefective.

The main PCB isdefective.

The output PCB isdefective.

The coil of LPH fanmotor 2 has abreak.

LPH fan motor 2 isdefective.

The main PCB isdefective.

Measure the resistance across the termi-nals. If it is ∞ Ω, replace the heater.

Check for continuity across the switch. Ifnone with the switch set to on, replace it.

If the lower roll unit heater operates withCN4-15A on the main PCB low, replace thePCB.

If CN6-2 on the output PCB fails to go lowwith CN5-1 low, replace the PCB.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none,replace LPH fan motor 2.

Run simulation 18. If CN6-15 on the mainPCB goes low but LPH fan motor 2 does notrotate, replace the motor.

Run simulation 18. If CN6-15 on the mainPCB does not go low, replace the mainPCB.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

*1 Optional.

340-1

3-6-51

If they are, clean with iso-propyl alcohol.

Replace if necessary.

If they are, clean with iso-propyl alcohol.

Replace if necessary.

If they are, clean with iso-propyl alcohol.

Replace if necessary.

If it is, clean with isopropylalcohol.

Replace if necessary.

If CN3-14 on the mainPCB does not change lev-els when the bypass regis-tration switch is turned onand off, replace the switch.

If it is, replace the switch.

(1)No primarypaper feed.

Check if the surface of the roll paperfeed upper roller of the 1st roll unitand that of roll paper feed lowerroller A are dirty with paper dust.

Check if the roll paper feed upperroller of the 1st roll unit and roll pa-per feed lower roller A are deformedor worn.

Check if the surface of the roll paperfeed upper roller of the 2nd roll unitand that of roll paper feed rear rollerB are dirty with paper dust.

Check if the roll paper feed upperroller of the 2nd roll unit and roll pa-per feed rear roller B are deformedor worn.

Check if the surface of the roll paperfeed upper roller of the 3rd roll unit(optional) and that of roll paper feedrear roller C are dirty with paperdust.

Check if the roll paper feed upperroller of the 3rd roll unit (optional)and paper feed rear roller C are de-formed or worn.

Check if the surface of roll paperconveying rear roller A is dirty withpaper dust.

Check if roll paper conveying rearroller A is deformed or worn.

Check if the bypass registrationswitch operates correctly.

Check if the bypass registrationswitch actuator is broken.

3-6-5 Mechanical problems

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

340

3-6-52

(1)No primarypaper feed.(cont.)

(2)No secondarypaper feed.

(3)No originalconveying.

Check if the surface of the bypasspaper feed roller is dirty with paperdust.

Check if the bypass paper feed rolleris deformed or worn.

Check if the bypass registrationclutch, upper feed clutch, middlefeed clutch, lower feed clutch (op-tional), and roll paper conveyingclutch are installed correctly.

Check if the bypass registrationclutch, upper feed clutch, middlefeed clutch, lower feed clutch (op-tional) or roll paper conveying clutchoperates correctly.

Check if paper feed section drivebelts 1 and 2 are installed correctly.

Check if the surfaces of the regis-tration roller and registration pulleyare dirty with paper dust.

Check if the surfaces of the bypassregistration roller, bypass pulley andpre-transfer roller are dirty with pa-per dust.

Check if the registration clutch orbypass registration clutch is installedcorrectly.

Check if the registration clutch orbypass registration clutch operatescorrectly.

Check if the surfaces of the frontupper, middle upper, rear upper,front lower and rear lower originalrollers are dirty with paper dust.

Check if the front upper or rear up-per original roller is deformed orworn.

If it is, clean with isopropylalcohol.

If it is, replace the roller.

If not, reinstall.

If not, replace the compo-nent.

If not, reinstall (see pages3-3-60 and 61).

If they are, clean with iso-propyl alcohol.

If they are, clean with iso-propyl alcohol.

If not, reinstall.

If not, replace the clutch.

If they are, clean with iso-propyl alcohol.

If it is, replace.

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

340

3-6-53

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(3)No originalconveying.(cont.)

(4)Original jam.

(5)Paper jam.

Check if the original leading edgedetection switch operates correctly.

Check if the actuator of the originalleading edge detection switch is bro-ken.

Check if the original feed clutch isinstalled correctly.

Check if the original feed clutch op-erates correctly.

Check if original drive belts 1 and 2are installed correctly.

Check if the original holding sectionis installed correctly.

Check if a guide plate or other com-ponent along the original conveyingpath is deformed.

Check the paper.

Check if the separation charger wireon the transfer charger assembly isbroken.

Check if the paper conveying fanmotor rotates correctly.

Check if a guide plate or other com-ponent along the paper conveyingpath is deformed.

Check if the press roller or the sepa-ration claws are extremely dirty.

Check if the press roller or a separa-tion claw is deformed.

Check if the oil roller is extremelydirty.

If CN3-12 on the mainPCB does not change lev-els when the original lead-ing edge detection switchis turned on and off, re-place the switch.

If it is, replace the switch.

If not, reinstall.

If not, replace the clutch.

If not, reinstall.

If not, reinstall.

If it is, correct or replace.

If the paper is extremelycurled or has other prob-lems, replace.

If it is, replace (see page3-3-37).

If not, replace the motor.

If it is, correct or replace.

If so, clean.

If so, replace (see page3-3-52).

If it is, replace (see page3-3-53).

340

3-6-54

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(6)Toner fallsonto the pa-per conveyingsection.

(7)Abnormalnoise.

Check if the developing section isextremely dirty.

Check if the lower cleaning blade isdeformed.

Check if all the rollers and gearsrotate smoothly.

Check if all the drive belts aretensioned correctly.

If it is, clean the develop-ing section and aroundthat area.

If it is, replace.

If there is a problem,grease the bearings andgears.

If not, adjust (see pages3-3-60, 61, 62 and 63).

1-1-33

340

CONTENTS

3-7 Appendixes

Timing chart No. 1 ......................................................................................... 3-7-1Timing chart No. 2 ......................................................................................... 3-7-2Timing chart No. 3 ......................................................................................... 3-7-3Timing chart No. 4 ......................................................................................... 3-7-4Timing chart No. 5 ......................................................................................... 3-7-5Operation Unit PCB....................................................................................... 3-7-6Power Source PCB 1/2.................................................................................. 3-7-7Power Source PCB 2/2.................................................................................. 3-7-8Detachable unit wiring diagram ..................................................................... 3-7-9

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

CHECK LIST

A741

NOTICE:

This PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST applies only to those machines thathave been maintained and placed inoperating environments that meet Ricohspecifications.

4-1-1

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 1 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

1-0 * INSTALLATION * 1 count = 1 foot of Copy Paper Feed

1-1 Developer INST REType 8

EDP# 885164

Install at initial set-up.

2,600 Grams per 1 Bottle

1-2 Toner INST CK CK CK CK CKType 1100W

EDP# 885165

Install at initial set-up.

500 Grams per 1 Bottle

1-3 Toner Disposal Tank CK/RE CK/RE CK/RE CK/RE CK/RE V34000060 Empty when full

2-0 * COVERS *

2-1 Contact Glass CL CL CL CL CL CL V34068010 Use Glass Cleaner

2-2 Exterior Covers CL CL CL CL CL CL Use furniture polish

3-0 * PAPER FEED *

3-1 Upper MiddleOriginal Feed Roller CL CL CL CL V34013240 Use Alcohol

4-1-2

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 2 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

3-2 Lower Original FeedRoller CL CL CL CL V67813211 Use Alcohol

3-3 Upper Original FeedRoller CL CL CL CL V67813010 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

3-4 Registration RollerBypass CL CL CL CL V67806510 Use Alcohol

3-5 Rear Roller B, RollPaper Conveying CL CL CL CL V67806250 Use Alcohol

3-6 Rear Roller A, RollPaper Conveying CL CL CL CL/RE V67806240

Vacuum Sponge Pulley. Use Alcoholon Rubber Pulley. Replace SpongePulley if worn.

3-7 Feed RollerParts Upper Original CL CL CL CL/RE V34093380

Vacuum Sponge Pulley. Use Alcoholon Rubber Pulley. Replace SpongePulley if worn.

3-8 Roller, Cutter Eject CL CL CL CL V67806130 Use Alcohol

3-9 Pulley A, CutterEject CL CL CL CL V67806171 Use Alcohol

4-1-3

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 3 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

3-10 Pre-Transfer RollerInner CL CL CL CL V67816010 Use Alcohol

3-11 Original Feed Clutch CL CL CL CL V74712470 Use Alcohol

3-12 Pulley B, CutterEject CL CL CL CL V67806181 Use Alcohol

3-13 Upper Roller, RollPaper Feed

CL CL CL CL V67807510 Use Alcohol

3-14 Inner Roller, Pre-Transfer

CL CL CL CL/RE V34016010 Use Alcohol

4-0 * Exposure *

4-1 Exposure Lamp CL CL CL CL V74712820 Use Alcohol

4-2 Sensor AO, CIS CL CL CL CL V34009011 Use Alcohol

4-3 Drum Point Source RE V34082010 Replace only if necessary

4-1-4

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 4 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

4-4 Main ChargerAssembly CL CL CL CL RE RE V74700121

Use Dry Clean Cloth. Replace withCorona Wire, P/N V74716280

4-5 Transfer ChargerAssembly CL CL CL CL RE RE V34093062

Use Dry Clean Cloth. Replace withCorona Wire, P/N V74716280

4-6 Surface PotentialSensor CL CL CL CL V34093331

Clean out with Blower Brush, P/N84029490

4-7 Cleaning Lamp CL CL CL CL V34093150 Use Dry Clean Cloth

4-8 Parts LPH AO (SP) CL CL CL CL/RE V34093160 Clean with Cleaning Tool (2) times

4-9 Grid Assembly CL CL CL CL V34000220 Use Dry Clean Cloth

4-10 Right Flange Drum CL CL CL CL Use Alcohol around Electrode

5-0 * Developing *

4-1-5

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 5 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

5-1 Dev. Unit Ass’y CL CL CL CL V34093020 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-2 Upper DevelopingUnit Cover CL CL CL CL/RE? V67814160 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-3 Left Dev. Unit Seal CL CL CL CL V67814060 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-4 Right DevelopingUnit Seal CL CL CL CL V67814050 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-5 Right / Left HolderDeveloping Unit CL CL CL CL/RE

V34008060V34008070 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-6 Lower DevelopingUnit Seal CL CL CL RE V74714290 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-7 Dev. Unit Gears LU LUGrease with Non-Fluid Oil, P/NV84032156

6-0 * Cleaning * DO NOT touch Blade. Clean with asoft dry clean cloth only.

6-1 Cleaning Blade CL CL CL RE V67818041WARNING: New Blades must beprimed with toner before using.

4-1-6

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 6 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

6-2 Lower CleaningBlade CL CL CL RE V67818050 If toner drop noticed, replace.

6-3 All Cleaning UnitSeals CL CL CL RE?

Clean with Vacuum Cleaner. If wornreplace.

6-4 Spiral, Cleaning Unit CL CL CL CL V34018030 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

6-5 Fur Brush, CleaningUnit

CL CL CL RE V67818061 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

6-6 Separation ClawDrum

CL CL CL CL/RE? V78618240 Use Alcohol, P/N 84255001

6-7 Cleaning Lamp CL CL CL CL V34093150 Use dry clean cloth

7-0 * Fixing *

7-1 Heat Roller CL CL CL RE V34093180 Use Silicon Oil

7-2 Press Roller CL CL CL RE V34093190 Use Silicon Oil

7-3 Fixing Oil Roller RE RE V34093261

4-1-7

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 7 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

7-4 Fixing Press RollerClaw CL CL CL CL V67820270 Use Alcohol

7-5 Fixing Thermistor Aand B CL CL CL RE

V67820101V67820110 Use Silicon Oil

7-6 Separation Claw CL CL CL CL V74320540 Use Alcohol

7-7 Fixing Unit Gears LU LUGrease with Temperature 78, P/NV84032159

7-8 Bushing, PressRoller

CL CL CL/RE? V67820230 Use Alcohol

8-0 * Roll Unit *

8-1 Lower Roller A, RollPaper Conveying CL CL CL CL V34007030 Use Alcohol

8-2 Lower Roller A, RollPaper Conveying CL CL CL CL V67807050 Use Alcohol

4-1-8

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 8 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

8-3 Upper roller, RollPaper Feed CL CL CL CL V67807510 Use Alcohol

8-4 Rear Roller B, PaperConveying (RU-2) CL CL CL CL V67806250 Use Alcohol

8-5 Rear Roller B, PaperConveying (RU-2) CL CL CL CL V67807510 Use Alcohol

9-0 * OTHERS *

9-1 All Gears, Chainsand Bushings

LU LU LU Lubricate with Machine Oil

9-2 All Tension Belts CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ Check for proper tension

9-3 Cooling Filter CL CL RE V34023130 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

9-4 Photo Sensors CL CL CL CL Clean with Blower Brush

4-1-9

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 9 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

10-0 * COPY QUALITY *

A Registration CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ

B Focus / LightBalance

CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ

C Image Skew CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ

4-1-10

Intentionally left blank

AA A

A

AA A

A

E

E E

E

E

E E

E

EA

EA

3-7-1

340

Timing chart No. 1 From the main switch being turned on to copier stabilization

DB CHG (+) CN4-4B

DB REM CN4-3B

FDM CN7-6

CSOL 1 CN6-5

CSOL 2 CN6-4

FL CN6-18

SC REM CN4-2B

MC REM CN6-17

FFM-R FFM-L

CN4-5A CN4-5B

PCFM CFM

CN4-6A CN6-3

LPHFM1 LPHFM2

CN6-1 CN6-2

DM DRM PCHL REM RTL REM

CN7-6 CN7-1

CN4-12A CN4-12B

MS

W: O

n

Prim

ary

fixin

g

stab

iliza

tion*

1

Sec

onda

ry fi

xing

st

abili

zatio

n*2

100 ms

200 ms1 s

1 s

3.534 s

*1 TETTH ≤ 15°C/59°F: 145°C/293°F 15°C/59°F < TETTH < 30°C/86°F: 165°C/329°F 30°C/86°F ≤ TETTH: 165°C/329°F

*2 TETTH ≤ 15°C/59°F: 165°C/329°F 15°C/59°F < TETTH < 30°C/86°F: 155°C/311°F 30°C/86°F ≤ TETTH: 155°C/311°F

100 ms

300 ms

100 ms

300 ms

200 ms

10 min

3.543 s × 2

1 s 1 s 1 s 1 s

TETTH: external temperature thermistor temperature

AA A A

A

AA A A

A

E

E E E

E

E

E E E

E

3-7-2

340

Timing chart No. 2 Bypass paper feed, with the paper inserted before the original

ESW CN3-16

OLDSW CN3-12

OTDSW CN3-13

BYPRSW CN3-14

BYPTIMSW CN3-34

PCSW CN3-15

DB CHG(+) CN4-4B

DB REM CN4-3B

FDM CN7-6

CSOL 1 CN6-5

CSOL 2 CN6-4

TC REM CN4-1B

SC REM CN4-2B

OFM CN3-23 – 25

OFCL CN4-7A

FL CN6-18

FFM-R CN4-5A FFM-L CN4-5B

PCFM CN4-6A CFFM CN6-3

LPHFM1 CN6-1 LPHFM2 CN6-2

MC REM CN6-17

BPRCL CN6-14

SSOL CN6-6

CCL CN6-8

PFM CN3-29

OSYNC signalPSYNC signal

DM CN7-2 DRM CN7-1 PCHL REM CN4-12A RTL REM CN4-12B

1 s

100 ms1 s

1 s

100 ms

300 ms

300 ms

1704 ms

540 ms

3.534 s

1.75 s

640 ms

1 s

Half speed

Half speed

Stop

Half speed

Half speedFull speed

Full speed

Full speedStop

944 ms

200 ms

450 ms

600 ms

1325 ms

3.543 s × 2

1680 ms

4.6 s

78P*

100 ms

300 ms 200 ms

1 s 1 s 1 s 1 s

10 min

5.2 s

450 msB

YP

RS

W: O

n

Inpu

t

BY

PR

TIM

SW

: O

nO

LDS

W: O

n

OT

DS

W: O

n

PC

SW

: On

ES

W: O

n

BY

PR

SW

: Off

BY

PT

IMS

W:

Off

OLD

SW

: Off

OT

DS

W: O

ff

PC

SW

: Off

ES

W: O

ff

Shading correction start * Varies depending on the setting in simulation 56.

Out

put

AA A

A

AA A

A

E

E E

E

E

E E

E

EA

EA

3-7-3

340

Timing chart No. 3 Bypass paper feed, with the original inserted before the paper

BY

PR

SW

: On

BY

PT

IMS

W: O

n

OLD

SW

: On

OT

DS

W: O

n

1704 ms

540 ms

Half speed

Half speedFull speed

Full speed

Full speedStop

Half speed

Half speed

Stop

944 ms

200 ms

450 ms

600 ms

1325 ms

3.543 s × 2

1680 ms

4.6 s

78P*

100 ms

300 ms 200 ms

1 s 1 s 1 s 1 s

10 min

5.2 s

450 ms

PC

SW

: On

ES

W: O

n

BY

PR

SW

: Off

BY

PT

IMS

W: O

ff

OLD

SW

: Off

OT

DS

W: O

ff

PC

SW

: Off

ES

W: O

ff

Shading correction start* Varies depending on the setting in simulation 56.

ESW CN3-16

OLDSW CN3-12

OTDSW CN3-13

BYPRSW CN3-14

BYPTIMSW CN3-34

PCSW CN3-15

DB CHG(+) CN4-4B

DB REM CN4-3B

FDM CN7-6

CSOL 1 CN6-5

CSOL 2 CN6-4

TC REM CN4-1B

SC REM CN4-2B

OFM CN3-23 – 25

OFCL CN4-7A

FL CN6-18

FFM-R CN4-5A FFM-L CN4-5B

PCFM CN4-6A CFM CN6-3

LPHFM1 CN6-1 LPHFM2 CN6-2

MC REM CN6-17

BPRCL CN6-14

SSOL CN6-6

CCL CN6-8PFM CN3-29OSYNC signalPSYNC signal

DM CN7-2 DRM CN7-1 PCHL REM CN4-12A RTL REM CN4-12B

Inpu

tO

utpu

t

640 ms

1.75 s 750 ms

3.534 s

200 ms

1 s

1 s

100 ms 300 ms

100 ms750 ms

AA A A

A

AA A A

A

E

E E E

E

E

E E E

E

3-7-4

340

Timing chart No. 4 Roll unit paper feed, single copy

1 s

1 s

1 s

100 ms

100 ms 300 ms

200 ms

640 ms

3.534 s

100 ms

200 ms300 ms

10 min

1 s 1 s 1 s 1 s

1680 ms

5.2 s

1704 ms

574 ms*2 200 ms

4.6 s

3.534 s × 2

450 ms

600 ms

944 ms 78 P*1

1325 ms

OLD

SW

: On

OT

DS

W: O

n

RS

W: O

n

PC

SW

: On

ES

W: O

n

OLD

SW

: Off

OT

DS

W: O

ff

RS

W: O

ff

PC

SW

: Off

ES

W: O

ff

ESW

OLDSW

OTDSW

PCSW

RSW

DB CHG(+)

DB REM

FDM

CSOL 1

CSOL 2

TC REM

SC REM

PFM

FCL-UFCL-M

RPCCL

RCLDMDRMPCHL REMRTL REMMC REM

SSOL

CCL

OSYNC signalPSYNC signal

OFM

OFCL

FL

FFM-RFFM-LPCFMCFMLPHFM1LPHFM2

CN3-16

CN3-12

CN3-13

CN3-15

CN3-11

CN4-4B

CN4-3B

CN7-6

CN6-5

CN6-4

CN4-1B

CN4-2B

CN3-29

CN4-8ACN6-10

CN6-9

CN6-7CN7-6CN7-1

CN4-12ACN4-12B

CN6-17

CN6-6

CN6-8

CN6-18

CN3-23 – 25

CN4-7A

CN4-5ACN4-5BCN6-4ACN6-3A

CN6-1CN6-2

Out

put

Inpu

t

Half speed

Stop

Shading correction start

Half speed

Half speed

StopFull speed

Full speed

Full speed

Half speed

*1 Varies depending on the setting in simulation 56. *2 Varies depending on the setting in simulation 57.

AA A

A

AA A

A

E

E E

E

E

E E

E

EA

EA

3-7-5

340

Timing chart No. 5 Roll unit paper feed, continuous two copies

1 s

1704 ms

574 ms*2

944 ms

450 ms

500 ms48 ms

1325 ms

600 ms

78 P*1

4.6 s

200 ms3.534 s × 2

1680 ms

5.25 s1 s 1 s 1 s 1 s

10 min

200 ms

300 ms

100 ms

200 ms

500 ms

1 s

1 s

1 s

100 ms

300 ms

1704 ms 1680 ms

200 ms

100 ms

574 ms*2

3.534 s

944 ms

450 ms

640 ms

78 P*1

200 ms

600 ms

OLD

SW

: On

OT

DS

W: O

n

RS

W: O

n

PC

SW

: On

ES

W: O

n

OLD

SW

: Off

OLD

SW

: On

OT

DS

W: O

ff

PC

SW

: On

PC

SW

: Off

ES

W: O

n

ES

W: O

ff

OLD

SW

: Off

OT

DS

W: O

ff

OT

DS

W: O

n

OT

DS

W: O

n

RS

W: O

ff

RS

W: O

ff

OT

DS

W: O

ffR

SW

: Off

PC

SW

: Off

ES

W: O

ff

ESW

OLDSW

OTDSW

PCSW

RSW

DB CHG(+)

DB REM

FDM

CSOL 1

CSOL 2

TC REM

SC REM

PFM

FCL-UFCL-M

RPCCL

RCLDMDRMPCHL REMRTL REM

MC REM

SSOL

CCL

OSYNC signalPSYNC signal

OFM

OFCL

FLFFM-RFFM-L

PCFMCFM

LPHFM1LPHFM2

CN3-16

CN3-12

CN3-13

CN3-15

CN3-11

CN4-4B

CN4-3B

CN7-6

CN6-5

CN6-4

CN4-1B

CN4-2B

CN3-29

CN4-8ACN6-10

CN6-9

CN6-7CN7-6CN7-1

CN4-12ACN4-12B

CN6-17

CN6-6

CN6-8

CN6-18

CN3-23 – 25

CN4-7A

CN4-5ACN4-5B

CN6-4ACN6-3A

CN6-1CN6-2

Stop

Out

put

Inpu

t

*1 Varies depending on the setting in simulation 56. *2 Varies depending on the setting in simulation 57.Shading correction start

(+)

(–)

Half speed

Half speed

Full speed

Full speed

Full speed

Stop

Half speed

Half speed

Stop

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

3-7-6

340Operation unit PCB

LED1LED4

LED5SW3

LED10

LED42

LED6

LED43

LED11

LED12

LED13

LED6

LED7

LED8

LED9

LED14

LED15

LED16

LED17

LED18

LED19

LED20

LED21

LED29

LED30

LED41

LED26

LED34 LED36

LED35 LED37 LED39

LED38 LED40

LED28

LED27

LED31

LED32

LED33

LED2

LED3

SW5 SW7 SW9

SW12

SW11 SW16

LED23

SW1

SW2

SW17

SW18

SW14

SW15

SW19

SW38

SW13

SW4

SW22

SW25

SW20 SW21 SW26 SW27 SW28

SW24SW23

SW6 SW8 SW10

SW29 SW30 SW31

SW32 SW33 SW34

SW35 SW36 SW37

LED24

LED25

LED22

LED14

LED22

LED29

LED37

LED5 LED4 LED3

4 4

LED2 LED1

(1/1)LEFT PCB

R12DT4

DT3

R1

C1 C2

IC3 IC4

C3 C4VCC

GND

VCC

GND

14

7 7

6

5 4 3 2 1 42 41 40 39 38

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

37

14

2

4

5

6

3

1

13121110987

36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

14

R2IC4

IC3

C5

IC4

IC4

IC4

R3

R5

R7

SW38

R4

RIGHT PCB (2/2)

LED13

LED21

LED28

LED36

LED43 LED42 LED41 LED40 LED39 LED38

R21

R61

R22

R62

R23

R63

R24

R64

R25

R65

R26

R66

R27

R67

R28

R68

LED12

LED20

LED27

LED35

LED11

LED19

LED26

LED34

LED10

LED18

LED33

LED9

LED17

LED25R G

LED32

LED8

LED16

LED24

LED31

LED7

LED15

LED23

LED30

DT28DT27DT26DT25DT24DT23DT22DT21

LD7

LD6

LD4

LD3

LD2

LD1

LD0

LD5

R14DT6

DT5

R16DT8

DT7

R10DT2

EMC

C9

C8

R29

RS

LCD MODULE

C15

Vdd

V0

Vss

R/W

E

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

RSP81

P80

3

4 5

1GND

RS

Key4

Dig5

Dig4

P81

P80

SB1

SB0

SCK

Stop Key

Key3

P50

P51

P52

P53

P60/KR0

P61/KR1

P62/KR2

P63/KR3

P70/KR4

P71/KR5

P72 /KR6

Key

2

Key

1

Key

0

NC

VD

D

Dig

3

Dig

2

Dig

1

Dig

0

P73

/KR

7

X2

X1

RE

SE

T

XT

2

XT

1

VS

S

P40

P41

P42

P43

OUT

Vdd

IC2

DT1

CN1-2

CN1-6

CN1-8

CN1-4

CN1-1

CN1-7

CN1-5

CN1-3

OPCB RXD

IC1

SG

SG

SG

SV

OPCB TXD

OPCB CLK

OPCB STOP

C6

C7

C13

R6

R8

+

R18

DT10

DT9

R51R56

R20 DT12

DT11

R52R57

R53R58

R54R59

R55R60

R35

C14

LD4

LD0

LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

LD6

LD7

R30

R31

R32

R36

R431

2 SW1

RIGHTPCB

(1/2)

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW5

SW6

SW7

SW8

R44

R45

R46

R47

R48

R49

R50

R37

DT14

R38

R39

R40

R41

R42

DT13

DT15

DT16

DT17

DT18

DT19

DT20

SW9

SW10

SW11

SW12

SW13

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW18

SW19

SW20

SW21

SW22

SW23

SW24

SW25

SW26

SW27

SW28

SW29

SW30

SW31

SW32

SW33

SW34

SW35

SW36

SW37

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

3-7-7

340Power source PCB 1/2

NC

NC

LIVE

COM

D1

F1L1

D2

Z1

11 14

12 13 8 7 4 6 5

9 10 1 2 3R44

L2

CN1

1

2

3

4

L3

C1BG1

BG2

BG3

E1

C2

C4

C5

C6 L18

R1

D1R2

C3

CR1

C7 R4

R3

L4

C8 R6

R7

R5

C56

H.B 2 H.B A

C57

R9 R10

D4 R11

D5

R12 R13

Q1Q2

C11

C12

R14

C13

R8 C9 C10

L5TP1

R15

R16

R27

R28

R29

R30

C20

R32

R31

TB1RV1

R43

R42

R41

U-2

R40+

C26R37R36

Z5 1/2

Z2 2/2 Z9 2/2

Z5 2/2

R91 R39

R38

R90

C22

C23

+R33

D11

R34 R35

C24+ C25

R24 D6

Z2 1/2

C55

R45

D9

Z3 2/2

Z10 2/2

5 3 2 7 5 4

10 9 8 1

+-

+-

+-

+-

+-

+-

C15D6

T1 2/3

T1 /1/3

C16

C17

R23

Q4R18

R19 Q3

D7

R17

C14

+

TP2

R20 R21

R22

C18

Z4

C19

R26

Z3 1/2

C21

T1 3/3

D10

R88R87R86

R83 R84R85 C50 Z12

3/4

Z12 4/4

C52

R89

UV UV

UV UV

R74

R70

R75

C49

Z12 1/4

Z12 2/4

R82

R81 R80

Z11

C51

+R72 R73

D28

R71

R68

R67

R68

D27

Z10 1/2 R76

C53R77 R78

R79

+

C48

D33D32D31D30D29D26D25

+

C45D23

Z8

Z7

D21

R65

D24+

C46R66L17

D19

D18D20

+

L16 C44 R64 D22 C45

+

+ +

U-3

1 2 3 4 5

6

7

+

R63C43

C41

C42

R60D17

C40C37

L14

R61

Q5L15

R62L13

L11L9

D13

R49

C34

C33 D16

C32C31R48

L8

R46 C27 C28

C29

C30

R47L10

L7

D12

L6

Z9 1/2

R50

L12

R51

R52D14

R53 D15

RV2

L13+

C39

CN2

+24VNCNCGND

CN3

CN4

CN5

CN6

CN7

R59C38R57

R55

Z6

C35 R54 +

+

C36

R56

1234

+24V

+24V+24V

GND+24V

+24V

+24V+24V+24V

+5.1V

+5.1V

+5.1V+5.1V+5.1V

+12V

-12V

+5.1V+5.1V

+5.1V

GND

1

23456

GND7

1

23456

7

1

23456

7

8

1

23

1

23

456

7

8

GND8GND

GNDGND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GNDGND

GND

GND

9

C54

+

+

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

3-7-8

340Power source PCB 2/2

D1

45723

C4

6

CN1

R1

R2

R3

C1

+

Q2

R9R8

C5

R11

R10 R12

C6

R13

R14 C7

+

78 6 5 4 3 2 1

109 11 12 13 14 15 16Z1

C8

+

C9 R15 R18

R17

R16

RV1

R7

R4

R5

C3

R6C2

Q1

10 9 8 1

D1

D2

D3

1 2 3 4 5 6

7

C3

C8

C6

C5

CN1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

8 7 56 4 3 2 1Z1

8 7 6 5

1 2 3 4Z1

C7

RV1

R1 R2

R12

R7

R8 R9

R15

R14

R17

R18

R11

R16

R19

R13

R10

R3

R4

R5 R6

C2

C4

C1

Q1

+

+

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

3-7-9

340

1

2

RD

YW24VR

RTL REM

RD

BE

1

2

3

4

5

6

RD

YW

OE

PK

BE

PE

RD

YW

OE

GN

BE

WE

RD

YW

WE

BE

GN

OE

1

2

3

1

2

3

24VR

PCFM

PCFM H/L

RTL

PCFM

PCSW

FTH3

FTH4

BYPTIMSW

STHVT

BYPRSW

GS

PCSW

5V

LB

GN

OE

RD

BK

BE

YW

BE

GY

BE

1

2

3

4

FTH3

GS

FTH4

GS

YW

BE1

2

BK

BK

YW

BE1

2

BK

BK

OE

PE

BE

1

2

3

1

2

3

OE

GY

BE

5V

BYPTIMSW

GS

RD

BE

YW

YW

GN

GN

BE

RD

BE

YW

YW

GN

GN

BE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

YW

YW

GN

RD

BE

1

2

3

4

5

6

TC REM

SC REM

ST ALARM

24VR

GP

GN

BK

YW

RD

BE

RD

BE

GN

BK

YW

1

2

3

4

5

BLACK

GRAY

YELLOW

GREEN

BLUE

WHITE

PINK

RED

ORANGE

LIGHT BLUE

PURPLE

BK

GY

YW

GN

BE

WE

PK

RD

OE

LB

PE

BE

GN

1

2

3

4

GS

BYPRSW

BK

BK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

BK

PE

YW

YW

BE

GY

PE

GN

OE

YW

BK

YW

PK

PE

BE

YW

YW

GN

RD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

WE

BE

PE

GN

YW

RD

WE

YW

BE

GY

GN

YW

C10

2

C10

1

AC

(L)

FF

M H

/L

R-L

amp

RE

M

FT

H1

GS

FT

H2

ES

W

EP

S

5V

FF

M-R

•FF

M-L

AC

(L)

PC

FM

PC

SW

PC

FM

H/L

GP

TC

RE

M

SC

RE

M

ST

ALA

RM

24V

R

H1

GS

BY

PT

IMS

W

BY

PR

SW

OS

SW

1

24V

R

H2

FT

H3

GS

FT

H4

OS

SW

2

RT

L R

EM

WE

WE

WE

FT

SW

2

145˚

C/2

93˚F

145˚

C/2

93˚F

FT

SW

1

WE

WE

H1

H2

WE

WE

BK

1 1

1 1

BK

BK

1 2

GY

GY

BK

BK

1 2

GY

GY

BK

BK

1 2 3 4

FT

H1

GS

FT

H2

GS

YW

BE

GY

BE

1 2

GS

ES

W

BE

PE

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

5V

FP

S

GS

OE

YW

BE

OE

GN

BE

RD

BK

BE

RD

BK

BE

24V

R

FF

M-L

FF

M-L

H/L

1 2 3

RD

BK

BE

RD

BK

BE

24V

R

FF

M-R

FF

M-R

H/L

1 2 3 4

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2

RD

BK

BE

GN

RD

YW

PE

YE

24V

R

R-L

amp

RE

M

RD

GN

5V

OS

SW

1

GS

5V

OS

SW

2

GS

OE

YW

BE

OE

YW

BE

OE

YW

GN

BE

OE

YW

GN

BE

1 2 3 4 5

OE

GN

BE

OE

GN

BE

OSSW2OSSW1

R-Lamp

FFM-L

FPS

FFM-R

ESW

FTH1 FTH2

1 1

1 1

Detachable unit wiring diagram

SERVICE MANUAL

MB-1

®

®

®

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

191

CONTENTS

I THEORY AND CONSTRUCTION SECTION1-1 Specifications

1-1-1 Specifications ................................................................................... 1-1-11-2 Handling Precautions

1-2-1 Part names ....................................................................................... 1-2-11-2-2 Mechanical construction of each section .......................................... 1-2-2

II ELECTRICAL SECTION2-1 Electrical Parts Layout

2-1-1 Electrical parts layout ....................................................................... 2-1-12-2 Operation of the PCB

2-2-1 Memory unit main PCB ..................................................................... 2-2-1

III SET UP AND ADJUSTMENT SECTION3-1 Installation

3-1-1 Unpacking and installation ............................................................... 3-1-13-1-2 Copy mode initial settings ................................................................ 3-1-93-1-3 Installing the hard disk drive (option) .............................................. 3-1-103-1-4 Installing/removing additional memory (option) .............................. 3-1-12

3-2 Simulation3-2-1 Simulations ....................................................................................... 3-2-13-2-2 Adjustment simulations .................................................................... 3-2-53-2-3 Dip switch settings .......................................................................... 3-2-10

3-3 PCB Initial Setting3-3-1 Main PCB ......................................................................................... 3-3-1

3-4 Self-diagnostics3-4-1 Self-diagnostic function .................................................................... 3-4-1

3-5 Troubleshooting3-5-1 PCB terminal voltages ...................................................................... 3-5-1

3-6 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 ...................................................................................... 3-6-1Timing chart No. 2 ...................................................................................... 3-6-2Power source PCB ..................................................................................... 3-6-3Wiring Diagram.............. ............................................................................. 3-6-4

Memory unit main PCB 15/15 ...................................................................... 3-6-18Wiring diagram .......................................................................................... 3-6-19

191

THEORY ANDCONSTRUCTION

SECTION

I

I The

ory

and

Con

stru

ctio

n Se

ctio

n

1-1-4

I

SPECIFICATIONS

1-1-4

191

1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications .................................................................................... 1-1-1

191-1

1-1-1

1-1-1 Specifications

Memory ....................................... 16 MB standardOptions ........................................ Addition in units of 16 MB [72-pin, 70 ns SIMM or

faster (no parity; parity SIMMs can also be used)].Maximum memory: 48 MB (3 SIMMs),

64 MB in total.Media: HDDHDD: 1 GBInterface: SCSI2

Gradation processing .................. Binary (standard) or base 4 (high image quality)Resolution ................................... 400 dpiCoding system ............................ QM-CoderMaximum number of pagesthat can be stored in memory ..... up to 127 pagesFunctions .................................... Group memory copy, sort memory copy, image

storageTime to first print ......................... Standard: 23 s or less

(A1/24" × 36" original, 100% magnification)With HDD installed: 26 s or less(A1/24" × 36" original, 100% magnification)

Time to first copy ......................... Standard: 37 s or less(A1/24" × 36" original, 100% magnification)With HDD installed: 54 s or less(A1/24" × 36" original, 100% magnification)

Power supply .............................. External

Functions that are not available in memory copy modePhotograph mode (half-tone mode)Light original mode (black & white mode)Dark original mode (black & white mode)

1-1-4

II

HANDLINGPRECAUTIONS

1-1-4

191

1-2 Handling Precautions1-2-1 Part names ........................................................................................ 1-2-11-2-2 Mechanical construction of each section .......................................... 1-2-2

191

1-2-1

1-2-1 Part names

2

4

31

Figure 1-2-1

1 Memory unit2 Breakers3 Power cord4 Original guide

191

1-2-2

1-2-2 Mechanical construction of each section

( 1 ) Memory unit

CN2-1A~16A

CN2-25A,26A

CN2-27A,28A

CN2-29A,2-4B

CN2-7B,8B

CN2-9B,10B

CN2-27B~30B

CN2-17A,18A CN2-17B,18B

CN2-21A,22A CN2-13B,14B

HDD

Input image data

Main scanning direction effective image area signal

Image data transfer clock signal

Auxiliary scanning synchronization signal

Main scanning synchronization signal

Power supply on signal

Serial received data signal

Serial transmitted data signal

Output image data

CN1

CN1Power supply

Power supply

MMPCB

MPCB (Copier)

CN19

Figure 1-2-2 Memory unit block diagram

MB-1 S/M (MCA)

ELECTRICALSECTION

II

II El

ectri

cal S

ectio

n

1-1-4

I

ELECTRICAL PARTSLAYOUT

1-1-4

191

2-1 Electrical Parts Layout2-1-1 Electrical parts layout ........................................................................ 2-1-1

191

2-1-1

2-1-1 Electrical parts layout

1

8

2

4

7

6

5

3

Figure 2-1-1 Electrical parts layout

1. Memory unit main PCB (MMPCB) ............... Controls the other PCBs and electricalcomponents.

2. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ....................... Generates 24 V DC, ±12 V DC and 5 VDC.

3. Primary PCB (PPCB) ................................... Attenuates noise on the power supplyline.

4. Noise filter (NF) ........................................... Attenuates noise on the power supplyline.

5. Breaker 1 (B1) ............................................. Forms a safety circuit. 6. Breaker 2 (B2) ............................................. Forms a safety circuit. 7. Hard disk drive (HDD) (option) .................... Stores image data. 8. Additional memory (option) .......................... Stores image data.

1-1-4

II

OPERATIONOF PCB

1-1-4

191

2-2 Operation of the PCB2-2-1 Memory unit main PCB ...................................................................... 2-2-1

191

2-2-1

2-2-1 Memory unit main PCB

2

4

2

IPU interface connector

Differential interface

Base 4/binary conversionQM/FIFO control

QM Coder (4ch)

UL27 UL28 UL29 UL30

FIFO(UL64,65,

66,67)

MPU(UM01)

CIOinterrupt controllerGeneral I/O port

SRAM(256KB)UL05,06

EPROM(128KB)

UL04

Address bus (27 bits)

Data bus (16 bits)

Bus control signal

16/32 bus conversion

Data bus (32 bits)

Code memory

Standard 16 MB DRAMUL07-14

Additional 48 MB DRAMUL15/16/17

Peripheral IC cotrol PLDAddress decoderACK generator

DRAM controllerUP01/02

SCSI interface connector

SCSI controllerUL03

Bus arbiterPLDUP03

DMA controllerUL01

HDD

System memory

Input/output control signal

Figure 2-2-1 Memory unit main PCB block diagram

The main PCB writes and reads the large volume of image data to and from thememory (DRAM) and hard disk drive (HDD, option) at high speed.• MPU (UM01)

Controls the entire processing of the memory unit, including controlling each IC,managing data memory and interfacing with the copier’s control unit.

• QM coder (UL27, 28, 29, and 30)Encodes (compresses) and decodes (expands) image data.

• Peripheral IC control PLD (UP01 and 02)Controls input and output of image data. Also controls the data bus of the DRAM andSCSI controllers.

• Bus arbiter PLD (UP03)Determines which IC may use a bus.

• DMA controller (UL01)Controls encoded data as it is input to and output from the QM coder and DRAM.

• SCSI controller (UL03)Controls the HDD and the encoded data input to and output from it.

191

2-2-2

• FIFO (UL64,65,66 and 67)Functions as line memory to input data to and output data from the I/O PLD and theQM coder.

• SRAM (UL05 and 06)256 KB RAM for the program download and variable areas of the MPU.

• EPROM (UL04)128 KB ROM for storing programs executed by the MPU

• DRAM (UL07 to 14)16 MB RAM to store standard encoded data.

• DRAM module (UL15, 16, and 17)16 MB per module, for a maximum of 48 MB additional memory.

• HDD3.5-inch, 1- or 2-GB HDD is used as additional memory.

MB-1 S/M (MCA)

III S

et U

p an

d

Adj

ustm

ent S

ectio

n

III

SET UP ANDADJUSTMENT

SECTION

1-1-4

I

INSTALLATION

1-1-4

191

3-1 Installation3-1-1 Unpacking and installation ................................................................ 3-1-1

( 1 ) Installation environment ............................................................ 3-1-1( 2 ) Installation procedure ................................................................ 3-1-2

3-1-2 Copy mode initial settings ................................................................. 3-1-93-1-3 Installing the hard disk drive (option) .............................................. 3-1-103-1-4 Installing/removing additional memory (option) .............................. 3-1-12

3-1-1

191

3-1-1 Unpacking and installation

( 1 ) Installation environment 1. Temperature and humidity: 10°C/50°F to 35°C/95°F, 15 to 85% RH 2. Power source: 120 V AC, 0.45 A/220-240 V AC, 0.3 A 3. Power source frequency stability: 50 Hz ± 0.3%, 60 Hz ± 0.3% 4. Installation location

Choose a location which meets the same requirements as those for the copier towhich this unit is attached.

5. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance.

a

b

c

: 542mm/215/16": 402mm/1513/16": 77mm/31/16"

abc

Figure 3-1-1 Installation measurements

3-1-2

191

( 2 ) Installation procedure

1

4

3

2

5

⁄

1

6

7

8

0

)

9

*

(

!@#$%^&¤

Figure 3-1-2 Unpacking

Unpack the memory unit.

@ Original guide retainer# Pin$ Bronze binding screw BVM4 × 6% Bronze binding screw BVM4 × 8^ Bronze cross round head screw 6-32 × 0.25 (inch)& Clamp* Power cord( Cable) Original guide⁄ Bar code label¤ Earth plate

1 Pad2 Spacer3 Outer case4 Memory unit5 Plastic sheet6 Plastic bag7 Installation handbook8 Instruction handbook9 Air-padded bag0 Memory unit retainer! Plastic bag

191-1

3-1-3

191

1. Remove the four screws and the copier rear cover. 2. Remove the seven screws and the main PCB cover.

Main PCB cover

Screws

Figure 3-1-3

3. Plug the 60-pin connector (the one with the longer shrink tube) of the cable intoCN19 on the copier main PCB.

4. Remove the screw holding the copier main PCB mount.

CN-19

screw

Main PCB

Main PCB mount

60-pin connectorCable

Figure 3-1-4

Install the memory unit.

3-1-4

191

5. Attach the clamp to the grounding sheath on the cable and fasten it with the M4× 8 screw provided.

6. Refit the copier main PCB cover with the seven screws.

Clamp

M4 × 8 screw

Figure 3-1-5

7. Fasten the two memory unit retainers to the copier main PCB cover with theeight M4 × 6 screws provided.

Memory unit retainers Main PCB cover

Screws

Figure 3-1-6

3-1-5

191

8. Remove the two screws and the central opening blanking plate on the copierrear cover.

9. Pull out the cable through the central opening in the copier rear cover andfasten the rear cover to the copier with the four screws.

Cable

Central opening blanking plate

Screws

Screws

Screws

Rear cover

Figure 3-1-7

10. Screw the four M4 × 8 screws provided loosely into the memory unit retainers.

M4 × 8 screws

Memory unit retainer

Memory unit retainer

Figure 3-1-8

3-1-6

191

11. Remove the four screws and the cover of the memory unit.

Screws

Screws

Memory unit

Cover

Figure 3-1-9

12. Pull out the cable through the upper opening in the memory unit and attach thememory unit by hanging it on the screws and then tightening them.

Cable

ScrewScrew

Screw

Memory unit

Figure 3-1-10

3-1-7

191

13. Attach the clamp to the grounding sheath on the cable and fasten it with the M4× 8 screws provided.

14. Plug the 60-pin connector of the cable into CN2 on the memory unit main PCB.

CN2

Memory unit main PCB

M4 × 8 screw

60-pin connectors

Clamp

Cable

Figure 3-1-11

15. Refit the cover of the main unit with the four screws.16. Connect the power cord to the memory unit.

Cover

Screws

Memory unit

Power cord

Figure 3-1-12

3-1-8

191

17. Fasten the original guide retainers with the two pins and insert the ends of theoriginal guide into them.

18. Connect the power plug to the wall outlet.Original guideOriginal guide retainers

Original guide retainers

Pin

Pin

Figure 3-1-13

19. Remove the four magnets from the copier, fit an earth plate to the underside ofeach magnet and refit them to their original positions.

Magnets

Magnets

Magnet

Earth plate

Figure 3-1-13-1

20. Turn the copier main switch on.21. Enter 10871087 with the numeric keys. The simulation mode is entered.22. Change the setting to 2 and run simulation 165 (setting the memory unit

connection).23. Press the stop/clear key.24. Exit the simulation mode.

Make a test copy.

Completion of installation.

191-1

3-1-9

191

3-1-2 Copy mode initial settingsThe factory settings for this unit are as shown below.

• Contents of settings

Sim. No. Contents Factory setting Settings20 prints 2178 Memory output mode

3-1-10

191

3-1-3 Installing the hard disk drive (option)

Procedure 1. Remove the four screws and the cover of the memory unit. 2. Detach the memory unit from the copier. 3. Fit the hard disk drive with the four inch screws provided with the memory unit.

Memory unit Hard disk drive

Inch screws

Figure 3-1-14

4. Plug the 50-pin connector of the main PCB into the hard disk drive. 5. Plug the 4-pin connector of the power source PCB into the power connector of the

hard disk drive. 6. Refit the memory unit to the copier and then the unit cover.

CN3

4-pin connector

Power sourcs PCB

Hard disk drive

Memory unit main PCB

50-pin connector

Figure 3-1-15

191-1

3-1-11

191

7. Enter simulation mode. 8. Run simulation 173 to format the hard disk drive.

Caution : Do not turn the power off during formatting.Formatting requires about 32 minutes.

3-1-12

191

3-1-4 Installing/removing additional memory (option)

Procedure• Before starting to install or remove additional memory, ensure the whole machine is

turned off.• Install memory in the order of SIMM0, SIMM1 and SIMM2.

32 MB

Standard 16 MB

48 MB

64 MB

Total memory sizeSIMM0 SIMM1 SIMM2

: installed; : not installed

Table 3-1-1

• Installation 1. Remove the four screws and remove the cover of the memory unit. 2. Insert the SIMM into the SIMM socket at an angle.

Caution : Check the orientation of the memory carefully.

Additional memory

Additional memory

Face with thecomponents

72

72

1

1

Figure 3-1-16

3-1-13

191

3. Raise the memory straight up so that the projections at the ends of the SIMM socketsit in the holes in the ends of the memory.Caution : Ensure the memory is firmly held by the SIMM socket.

4. Refit the cover of the memory unit with the four screws.

Additional memory

Figure 3-1-17

• Removal 1. Remove the four screws and the cover of the memory unit. 2. Lightly holding the claws at the ends of the SIMM socket with tweezers or a similar

tool, slant the memory forward and then gently pull it up. 3. Refit the cover of the memory unit with the four screws.

Additional memory

1

2

Figure 3-1-18

1-1-4

II

SIMULATION

1-1-4

191

3-2 Simulation3-2-1 Simulations ........................................................................................ 3-2-1

( 1 ) Running a simulation ................................................................. 3-2-1( 2 ) Contents of simulations ............................................................. 3-2-2

3-2-2 Adjustment simulations ..................................................................... 3-2-5( 1 ) Adjusting base 4 output density ................................................ 3-2-5( 2 ) Adjusting thresholds (central exposure level) ............................ 3-2-6( 3 ) Adjusting base 4 thresholds simultaneously ............................. 3-2-7( 4 ) Adjusting Exp. 1.0 threshold ...................................................... 3-2-8( 5 ) Adjusting Exp. 7.0 threshold ...................................................... 3-2-9

3-2-3 Dip switch settings .......................................................................... 3-2-10( 1 ) Contents of the dip switch settings .......................................... 3-2-10

3-2-1

191

3-2-1 Simulations

( 1 ) Running a simulation

Start

Turn the main switch on.

Enter 10871087 with the numeric keys.

Enter a simulation No. to be run with the numeric keys.

Press the enter key.

The simulation is run.

Enter 001 and press the enter key or turn the main switch off and back on.

End

Entering simulation mode.

000 is shown on the display.

Selecting a simulation No.

Exiting simulation mode.

The selected simulation No. is displayed.

Simulations that cannot be run in memory copy mode

Simulation 95: Setting the maximum copy length for roll/bypass modeIn the memory copy mode the maximum original and copy length is 5 meters,regardless of the setting in simulation 95.

Simulation 97: Switching between front and rear ejection of originalsIn the memory copy mode an original is ejected to the machine rear, regardless of thesetting in simulation 97.

191-1

3-2-2

191

160 Adjusting base 4 output density

161 Adjusting thresholds (central exposure level)

162 Adjusting base 4 thresholds simultaneously

163 Adjusting Exp. 1.0 threshold

164 Adjusting Exp. 7.0 threshold

165 Setting the memory unit connection

1. Enter 165 with the numeric keys.2. Press the enter key. The current setting is shown

on the display.

3. Change the setting with the mode set keys.

1: No memory unit 2: Memory unit attachedReference: 1

4. Press the stop/clear key.

166 Selecting display of the “PRINT, OK?” screen afterrestart

1. Enter 166 with the numeric keys.

2. Press the enter key. The current setting is shownon the display.

3. Change the setting with the mode set keys.

1: Selected 2: No display Reference: 2

4. Press the stop/clear key.

170 Checking the DRAM

1. Enter 170 with the numeric keys.2. Press the enter key. Checking starts, showing

“DRAM CHECK ∗ ” on the display. “ ∗ ” blinks untilthe check is completed.

The display shows the result upon completion.

CN: Connected NC: Not connected

OK: Normal NG: Abnormal3. Press the stop/clear key.

172 Checking the HDD page management area

1. Enter 172 with the numeric keys.

2. Press the enter key. Check starts, showing “PAGEMANAGER CHECK ∗ ” on the display. “ ∗ ” blinksuntil the check is completed.

The display shows the result upon completion.OK: Normal NG: Abnormal

3. Press the stop/clear key.

( 2 ) Contents of simulations

SIM No. Description Purpose

To be run tochange thesetting whetherto display the“PRINT, OK?”screen afterrestart.

Checks theconnection ofDRAMs 1 to 4 (1:standard, 2 to 4:optional) andtheir status.

Checks theavailability of thepagemanagementarea on the HDD.

See page 3-2-5.

See page 3-2-6.

See page 3-2-7.

See page 3-2-8.

See page 3-2-9.

191-1

3-2-3

191

SIM No. Description Purpose

173 Formatting the HDD

1. Enter 173 with the numeric keys.

2. Press the enter key. Formatting starts, showing“HDD FORMAT ∗ ” on the display.

The display shows “HDD FORMAT FINISHED”when formatting is completed. It takes about 32minutes.

174 Clearing programs 6 to 10

1. Enter 174 with the numeric keys.

2. Press the enter key.

3. Select the program No(s). to be cleared with themode set keys.

1. PROGRAM6

2. PROGRAM7

3. PROGRAM8

4. PROGRAM9

5. PROGRAM10

4. Press the enter key. The selected program(s) is/arecleared.

5. Press the stop/clear key.

175 Restoring programs 6 to 10

1. Enter 175 with the numeric keys.

2. Press the enter key.

3. Select the program No(s). to be restored with themode set keys.

1. PROGRAM6

2. PROGRAM7

3. PROGRAM8

4. PROGRAM9

5. PROGRAM10

6. All

4. Press the enter key. The selected program(s) is/arerestored.

5. Press the stop/clear key.

Formats theHDD.

To be run whenthere is aproblem withprograms 6 to 10on the HDD.

To be run torestore imagedata which ispresent on theHDD but hasbeen clearedfrom the copiermain PCB.

3-2-4

191

SIM No. Description Purpose

176 Memory unit problem history

1. Enter 176 with the numeric keys.

2. Press the enter key. The display shows anyproblems.

1: FIFO overflow

2: FIFO underflow

4: DMAC interrupt error

10: Reset or power turned off during access to theHDD

3. Press the stop/clear key.

177 Clearing the memory unit problem history

1. Enter 177 with the numeric keys.

2. Press the enter key. The problem history is cleared.

3. Press the stop/clear key.

178 Selecting memory output mode

1. Enter 178 with the numeric keys.

2. Press the enter key. The current setting is shownon the display.

3. Change the setting with the mode set keys.

1: Nonstop

2: 20 prints

Reference: 2

4. Press the stop/clear key.

179 Checking the memory unit connection

1. Enter 179 with the numeric keys.

2. Press the enter key. The status of the memory unitconnection is shown on the display.

3. Press the stop/clear key.

To be run tocheck the historyof problems thathave occurred inthe memory unit.

To be run toclear the historyof problems thathave occurred inthe memory unit.

To be run tochange thesetting whetherto output nonstopor to stop after20 prints areoutput.

To be run tocheck thememory unitconnection.

191-1

3-2-5

191

3-2-2 Adjustment simulations

( 1 ) Adjusting base 4 output densityAdjust the half-tone densities (levels 2 and 3) on base 4 outputs as follows.Level 1 is fixed to white (tone 0) and level 4 to black (tone 31).

Procedure

Start

End

Enter simulation mode.

Enter 160 with the numeric keys.

Yes

No

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Change the setting with the mode set keys.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the image correct?

Setting range: –1 to +2 Reference: 0 The larger the value, the darker the image; the smaller the value, the lighter the image.

Select the mode to be adjusted with the leading edge margin or left margin keys. DENSITY2: level 2 DENSITY3: level 3

3-2-6

191

( 2 ) Adjusting thresholds (central exposure level)Adjust the read-in density (threshold) at Exp. 4.

Procedure

Start

End

Enter simulation mode.

Enter 161 with the numeric keys.

Yes

No

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Change the setting with the mode set keys.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the image correct?

Setting range: –10 to +10 Reference: 0 The larger the value, the darker the image; the smaller the value, the lighter the image.

Select the mode to be adjusted with the leading edge margin or left margin keys. THLD BW: binary THLD HLF1: base 4 (light) THLD HLF2: base 4 (normal) THLD HLF3: base 4 (dark)

3-2-7

191

( 3 ) Adjusting base 4 thresholds simultaneouslyPerform the following adjustment to shift the densities (thresholds) on base 4 out-put simultaneously.Since the number set in simulation 162 returns to zero after setting, be sure thatthe four values have been changed accordingly by running simulation 161.

Procedure

Start

End

Enter simulation mode.

Enter 162 with the numeric keys.

Yes

No

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Change the setting with the mode set keys.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the image correct?

Setting range: –10 to +10 Reference: 0 The larger the value, the darker the image; the smaller the value, the lighter the image.

191-1

3-2-8

191

( 4 ) Adjusting Exp. 1.0 thresholdPerform the following steps for making the densities (threshold) for Exp. 1.0 higher.

Procedure

Start

End

Enter simulation mode.

Enter 163 with the numeric keys.

Yes

No

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Change the setting with the mode set keys.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the image correct?

Setting range: –15 to 0 Reference: 0 The larger the value, the lighter the image; the smaller the value, the darker the image.

Select the mode to be adjusted with the leading edge margin or left margin keys. THLD BW (1.0): binary THLD HLF1 (1.0): base 4

191-1

3-2-9

191

( 5 ) Adjusting Exp. 7.0 thresholdPerform the following steps for making the densities (threshold) for Exp. 7.0 lower.

Procedure

Start

End

Enter simulation mode.

Enter 164 with the numeric keys.

Yes

No

Press the enter key.

Press the stop/clear key.

Insert the original and make a test copy.

Change the setting with the mode set keys.

Exit simulation mode.

Is the image correct?

Setting ranges: 0 to +20 for THLD BW 0 to +10 for THLD HLF1 Reference: 0 The larger the value, the lighter the image; the smaller the value, the darker the image.

Select the mode to be adjusted with the leading edge margin or left margin keys. THLD BW (7.0): binary THLD HLF1 (7.0): base 4

191-1

3-2-10

191

3-2-3 Dip switch settings

( 1 ) Contents of the dip switch settingsTurn the power off before changing the dip switch settings.

Dip switch setting Operation

Operates as a normal memory board. Switches 3 and4 must be always off.

Performs a memory (DRAM module) check only.LED02 lights during operation and LED05 or 06 lightsaccording to the check result. Checking 64-MB ofDRAM takes about 6 minutes. (DRAM check isavailable in simulation 170.)

Performs HDD formatting only, which requires about32 minutes. LED04 lights during operation and LED05lights upon completion. When formatting is attemptedwith no HDD connected, LED06 lights. (HDDformatting is available in simulation 173.)

1 2 3 4

ON

1~4: OFF

1 2 3 4

ON1: ON 2: OFF 3: OFF 4: OFF

1 2 3 4

ON1: ON 2: ON 3: OFF 4: OFF

III

PCB INITIALSETTING

1-1-4

191

3-3 PCB Initial Setting3-3-1 Main PCB .......................................................................................... 3-3-1

191-1

3-3-1

3-3-1 Main PCB

When replacing the backup PCB on the copier with the memory unit attached, take thefollowing procedure.

Procedure• With the existing backup PCB

1. Record the following data of user-set items.• Settings used in program copy mode• Initial copy settings

2. Enter simulation mode. 3. Run the following simulations and record the counts.

Sim. No. Counts to be recorded66 Count from the developer loading72 Maintenance count73 Total counter count74 Jam counts by the paper source76 Total counts by the paper source

4. Exit simulation mode. 5. Turn the copier main switch off and disconnect the power plug. 6. Replace the backup PCB.

191-1

3-3-2

• With the new backup PCB 7. Connect the power plug and turn the copier main switch on. 8. Enter simulation mode. 9. Run simulations 70 and 85.10. Clean the contact glass and the middle upper original roller.11. Run simulation 120 to conduct gamma correction.12. Run simulation 83 to select between inch and metric specifications.13. Run simulation 165 to set the memory unit connection.14. Run simulation 175 to restore programs 6 to 10 on the HDD.15. Run the following simulations and enter the data recorded on the simulation label.

Sim. No. Contents35 Entering drum surface potential data for black & white mode36 Entering drum surface potential data for half-tone mode46 Setting fixing stabilization at low speed53 Adjusting 100% magnification54 Adjusting leading edge registration55 Adjusting synchrocut length (297 mm)56 Adjusting synchrocut length (1189 mm)57 Adjusting the leading edge margin58 Adjusting trailing edge margin/displayed synchrocut length59 Adjusting the paper cut position for specified length cut mode63 Checking/changing toner control voltage66 Entering toner sensor control level/copy count67 Selecting the copying operation under the toner empty condition71 Selecting the maintenance cycle75 Entering the service telephone No.80 Switching the counter counting unit81 Selecting the language82 Selecting between key counter/card84 Selecting the No. of exposure steps86 Switching the fixing temperature87 Disabling cancellation of auto shutoff function89 Setting optional roll unit92 Setting potential correction intervals94 Setting the maximum copy length for multiple copy mode95 Setting the maximum copy length for roll/bypass mode96 Selecting the action after paper empty detection97 Switching between front and rear ejection of originals98 Selecting the copy count timing

132 Adjusting optical axis133 Adjusting the image width in the main scanning direction140 Adjusting exposure amount141 Adjusting half-tone image quality142 Adjusting AE optimum level143 Switching filter modes144 Adjusting filter gain145 Selecting the AE slight adjusting width153 Selecting current correct value160 Adjusting base 4 output density161 Adjusting thresholds162 Adjusting base 4 thresholds simultaneously163 Adjusting Exp. 1.0 threshold164 Adjusting Exp. 7.0 threshold166 Selecting display of the “Begin printing” screen after restart176 Displaying memory unit problem history178 Selecting memory output mode

16. Exit simulation mode.17. Enter the data of user-set functions recorded in step 1.

IV

SELF DIAGNOSTICS

1-1-4

191

3-4 Self-diagnostics3-4-1 Self-diagnostic function ..................................................................... 3-4-1

( 1 ) Self-diagnostic display ............................................................... 3-4-1( 2 ) Error message ........................................................................... 3-4-3( 3 ) Conditions that turn the memory unit main PCB LEDs on ........ 3-4-4

191-1

191

3-4-1 Self-diagnostic function

(1) Self-diagnostic displayWhen the copier detects a problem with itself, it disables copying and displays a self-di-agnostic code (C-xxx) indicating the nature of the problem together with a message re-questing to call for service on the display.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by opening andclosing the copier main unit or by turning the main switch off and back on.

Figure 3-4-1 Service call code display

3-4-1

Call for service TEL

C-XXX

CALL FOR SERVICE TEL

C-XXX

Metric

Inch

191

C-32

C-904

C-906

C-907

Code Contents

Communicationproblem withthe memory unit

Reset duringHDD operation

Read error innormally usedarea

Read error inHDD page man-aging area

Poor contact inconnector CN2on the memoryunit main PCB.

Defectivememory unitmain PCB.

Poor contact inconnector CN19on the memoryunit main PCB.

Defective copiermain PCB.

Defective HDD.

Defectivememory unitmain PCB.

Defective HDD.

Defectivememory unitmain PCB.

Defective copiermain PCB.

Defectivememory unitmain PCB.

Defective HDD.

Check the connection of CN2 on thememory unit main PCB and repair ifnecessary. Check for continuityacross the connector terminals andreplace them if necessary.

Replace the memory unit main PCBand check operation.

Check the connection of CN19 on thememory unit main PCB and repair ifnecessary. Check for continuityacross the connector terminals andreplace them if necessary.

Replace the copier main PCB andcheck operation.

Replace the HDD and check opera-tion.

Replace the memory unit main PCBand check operation.

Replace the HDD and check opera-tion.

Replace the memory unit main PCBand check operation.

Replace the copier main PCB andcheck operation.

Replace the memory unit main PCBand check operation.

Replace the HDD and check opera-tion.

3-4-2

Remarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(Self diagnostic codes)

191

Poor contact inconnector CN2on the memoryunit main PCB.

Defectivememory unitmain PCB.

Defective HDD.

Additionalmemory isincorrectlyinstalled, orinserted in thewrong socket.

Defectiveadditionalmemory.

Defectivememory unitmain PCB.

Defective HDD.

Defectivememory unitmain PCB.

Error 1

Error 2

Error 3

Error 4

Code Contents

Communicationproblem withthe memory unit

Additionalmemoryproblem

HDD problem

Standard DRAMproblem

Check the connection of CN2 on thememory unit main PCB and repair ifnecessary. Check for continuityacross the connector terminals andreplace them if necessary.

Replace the memory unit main PCBand check operation.

Replace the HDD and check opera-tion.

Check and reinstall the additionalmemory.

Replace the additional memory andcheck operation.

Replace the memory unit main PCBand check operation.

Replace the HDD and check opera-tion.

Replace the memory unit main PCBand check operation.

Remarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(2) Error messageWhen an error in independent operation of the memory unit is detected, an error messageis shown on the message display, and memory copying is disabled.When a key is pressed after an error is detected, normal copying only is enabled.When the power to the memory unit is turned off and on, the memory unit error detectionis reset.

191-1

3-4-3

• Messeages are indicated to the display as follows.

Metric“Memory unit error-# Press any key”

Inch“MEMORY UNIT ERROR-# PRESS ANY KEY”

191

3-4-4

(3) Conditions that turn the memory unit main PCB LEDs onLED02 to LED06 do not light during normal memory copy operation (attached to thecopier). Errors are identified by the copier through serial communication.

LED01 (SCSI TERMOFF) Red Lights when the circuit protector is triggered.LED02 (memory) Yellow Lights during memory check.LED03 (HDD) Yellow Lights during hard disk check.LED04 (format) Yellow Lights during hard disk formatting.LED05 (end) Green Lights when operation ends normally.LED06 (error) Red Lights when an error occurs.

Lights when PCB formatting is attempted withthe hard disk disconnected.

LED07 (MPU HALT) Red Lights when the MPU stops.LED08 (RESET) Red Lights when reset is triggered.LED09 (POWER ON) Green Lights while power is present.

Name Color Description

191-1

V

TROUBLESHOOTING

1-1-4

191

3-5 Troubleshooting3-5-1 PCB terminal voltages ...................................................................... 3-5-1

( 1 ) Power source PCB .................................................................... 3-5-1( 2 ) Memory unit main PCB .............................................................. 3-5-2

191

3-5-1

3-5-1 PCB terminal voltages

Precautions• When handling the circuit boards, do not touch the components with bare hands.• ICs can be damaged by static discharges. If a PCB contains ICs, do not touch the

ICs, cable connectors or edge connectors.• Store the circuit boards wrapped in aluminum foil, conductive sponge rubber, or

similar material.

( 1 ) Power source PCB

1-1

2-2

3-2

4-24-2

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

100 V AC

5 V DC

5 V DC

5 V DC+12 V DC

AC supply, input

5 V DC supply to MMPCB, output

5 V DC supply to MMPCB, output

5 V DC supply to HDD*, output+12 V DC supply to HDD*, output

1-2

2-1

3-1

4-14-3

* Option.

C7

C4

R6

R9

CR

2R

4

CR

5 C9

CR1

C2 C3

R12

R13

C5

R7

CR3

Q1

R14

R10

C8

R5

R8

Q2

R1

R59 CR54

R53

L51

C59

IC52

CP54

L52 R62 R61

R57

C54

C58

R56

CR55

CP1

CR56CP51

C56

C53

CP52 CP53

R60

CP

2

R52 C

R53

L2

C62

C60

R3

R2

+

C10

L1

F1 C

1

R58

CR

51R

15

IC1

121

R16

R11

CR

4

C51

R51

IC51

C61

R55

R54

CR

52

C52

C55

C57

C6

CR

6

1 2

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

1

T2

2

34

T1

1 2

191

3-5-2

( 2 ) Memory unit main PCB

MS

5780FP

MS

5780FP

MS

5780FP

MS

5780FP

DS

90C

031

DS

90C

031D

S90C

032

DS

90C

032D

S90C

032

DS

90C

032

F273

F273

F273

F253

F253

F253

F253

F273

F04

F04

F74

F74

F74

HC

14

F244

LS882

LS882

LS882

F157

F06

F244

F244

F245

F245

F245

F245

F245

F245

NF

13

RA

25

RA

23

RA

24R

A26

UL31

UL12

UL11

UL14

NF

21

NF

23

NF

25

UL13

UL09

UL10

UL07

UL08

UL23

RA

28R

A29

RA

30U

L17S

IMM

2

UL16

SIM

M1

UL15

SIM

M0

RA

31

NF

22

NF

24

NF

26

UL25

UL24

UL26

UL32

UL33

UL34

NF

14

F848

F848

F157

F157

F20

F20

MS

8258 F

P

MS

8258 F

P

MS

8258 F

P

MS

8258 F

P

MS

92411

M5M

417400M

5M417400

M5M

417400M

5M417400

M5M

417400

M5M

417400

M5M

417400

M5M

417400

R29

R30

5049

21C

N3

NF

10

NF

09

RA

32R

A11

RA

09R

A10

RA

08

R25

R31

R32

R33

UB

01 K

A

D

01C

12R

28R

27

R26

D02

D03

30A1A

R13

R14

R15R16R17R18

R38

R12R11R10R09R08R06R05

R36

R37

1B30B

R35

R34

AK

AK

C

AE U

DO

1

R41

R40

A K

NF112

NF116

NF117

NF115

NF

113N

F114

CN

2

140

41

80

NF18

NF15

81 120

121

160

UL03

UL93 C

08C

09

RE

9560IU

1100

30

31

5051

80

81

UL30

CM

3

1100

30

31

505180

81

UL29

CM

2

1100

30

315051

80

81

UL28

CM

1

1100

30

315051

80

81

UL27

UL39

UL38

UL37

UL36

UL43

UL48

UL49

UL54

UL46

UL52

UL53U

L02

UL47

UL50

UL45

UL51

UL81

UL41

UL40

UL42

UL44

CM

0

NF85

NF86

NF84

NF83

NF82

NF87

NF05

NF

105N

F107

UL59

UL58

UL56

UL57

UL55

UL18

UL19

UL21

UL22

UL20

UL35

NF

88

RA

19RA

20

RA

08

RA

06

RA04

NF06

53C710

A KA KA KA KA KA KA KA KA K LED

01R

A18

LED

02LE

D03LE

D04

LED

05

LED

06

LED

08LE

D07

LED

09

7

17

18

6

28

4074

54

12

32

29

39

SW

01SW02 1

1

8

4

5

342

R24

UL50

JP04

RA27

NF106

NF

01

OS

C01

40,0000MH

z

P01

P02

R02

C02

C01

R01

R23R42

JP03

WDT

C07

C06

C05

36

NF

NF17

NF19

C10

NF20

3427332832293130

NF

NF38NF18

354136403739

NF50NF51NF52NF53NF54NF55NF56NF57

NF58NF59NF60NF61NF62NF63NF64NF65

NF66NF67NF68NF69NF70NF71NF72NF73

NF74NF75NF76NF77NF78NF79NF80NF81

NF10642

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

37

7372

108109

144

1 2

1

1

2

7 8

PLD1–1UP01A MACH231 7511

5333

TA

BO

SO

FU

L82

+

UM01

NF102

NF103

NF104

NF109

NF110

NF111

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CPCP

CP

CP

CP

CPCP

CPCP

CPCP

CPCP

CP

CP CPCP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CPC

P

CP

CP

CP

CPCP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CP

CPCP

CP

CPCP

CP

CPCP

CP

CP

R19

R20

R21

R22

R43

R44

R45

CP CP

CP

CP

C11

CP

CP

727272 7171

71

222

111

CP

CP

RA

01

RA

08

RA

18

NF

02

XT

AL1

3,8884MH

z

RA

22

RA

21

RA

02R

A17

UL01

144

45

8889132

133

176

16

SR

AM

0U

L05

UL048

UL04

SR

AM

1U

L08

RA

07

M5M

51018M

5M51018

MB

M28F

XO

OP

F

P22V

10

PA

L1 UP

03

MB

M27C

102X

7454

1232

PLD

2U

P02

MA

CH

23175

11

5333

7454

1232

PLD

1 –3

UP

01CM

AC

H231

7511

5333

74

54

1232

PLD

1–2

UP

01BM

AC

H231

7511

5333

FIF

O 1

FIF

O 3

UL85

UL87

FIF

O 0

FIF

O 2

UL84

CN

1

UL86

+

61

+

+

Z9538PCC

MC88340PV

1912801

191

3-5-3

1-41-5

2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A

2-19A

2-19A2-19A2-19A

2-19A

2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A

2-19A

2-19A2-19A2-19A2-19A

1-4

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks

5 V DC5 V DC

5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)

5/0 V DC (Pulse)

5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)

5/0 V DC (Pulse)

5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)

5/0 V DC (Pulse)

5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)5/0 V DC (Pulse)

5/0 V DC (Pulse)

5 V DC supply from PSPCB, input5 V DC supply from PSPCB, input

Input image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataInput image dataMain scanning direction effective imagearea signalMain scanning direction effective imagearea signalImage data transfer clock signalImage data transfer clock signalAuxiliary scanning synchronizationsignalAuxiliary scanning synchronizationsignalMain scanning synchronization signalMain scanning synchronization signalCopier power on signalMemory unit power on signalSerial reception data signalSerial reception data signalSerial transmission data signalSerial transmission data signalImage data transfer clock signalImage data transfer clock signalMain scanning direction effective imagearea signalMain scanning direction effective imagearea signalOutput image dataOutput image dataOutput image dataOutput image data

HDD* control signal, input/output

1-11-2

2-1A2-2A2-3A2-4A2-5A2-6A2-7A2-8A2-9A2-10A2-11A2-12A2-13A2-14A2-15A2-16A2-17A

2-18A

2-21A2-22A2-25A

2-26A

2-27A2-28A2-29A2-4B2-7B2-8B2-9B2-10B2-13B2-14B2-17B

2-18B

2-27B2-28B2-29B2-30B

3-1~50

* Option.

1-1-4

VI

APPENDIXES

1-1-4

191

3-6 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 ......................................................................................... 3-6-1Timing chart No. 2 ......................................................................................... 3-6-2Power source PCB ........................................................................................ 3-6-3Wiring diagram............................................................................................... 3-6-4

1-1-4

AA A

A

AA A

A

E

E E

E

E

E E

E

EA

EA

191

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

3-6-1

Timing chart No. 1 Memory copy mode, bypass paper feed, with original inserted before the paper

1 s

1 s

1 s

100 ms

100 ms 300 ms

200 ms

640 ms

3.534 s

100 ms

200 ms300 ms

10 min

1 s 1 s 1 s 1 s

1680 ms

5.2 s

1704 ms

200 ms

4.6 s

3.534 s × 2

450 ms

944 ms

560 ms500 ms

OLD

SW

: On

OT

DS

W: O

n

RS

W: O

n

PC

SW

: On

ES

W: O

n

OLD

SW

: Off

OT

DS

W: O

ff

EN

TE

R K

EY

: On

EN

TE

R K

EY

: On

RS

W: O

ff

PC

SW

: Off

ES

W: O

ff

ESW

OLDSW

OTDSW

PCSW

RSW

DB CHG(+)

DB REM

FDM

CSOL 1

CSOL 2

TC REM

SC REM

PFM

FCL-UFCL-M

RPCCL

RCLDMDRMPCHL REMRTL REMMC REM

SSOL

CCL

OSYNC signalPSYNC signal

OFM

OFCL

FL

FFM-RFFM-LPCFMCFMLPHFM1LPHFM2

CN3-16

CN3-12

CN3-13

CN3-15

CN3-11

CN4-4B

CN4-3B

CN7-6

CN6-5

CN6-4

CN4-1B

CN4-2B

CN3-29

CN4-8ACN6-10

CN6-9

CN6-7CN7-6CN7-1

CN4-12ACN4-12B

CN6-17

CN6-6

CN6-8

CN6-18

CN3-23~25

CN4-7A

CN4-5ACN4-5BCN6-4ACN6-3A

CN6-1CN6-2

Out

put

Inpu

t

Half speed

Stop

Shading correction start Reading end Printing start

Half speed

Half speed

StopFull speed

A0/36" × 48"

A1/24" × 36"

1420 ms

980 ms

680 ms

460 ms

Full speed

*1

Full speed

Half speed

*1 Timing depends on the paper size.

A2/17" × 22"

A3/11" × 17"

AA A A

A

AA A A

A

E

E E E

E

E

E E E

E

191

3-6-2

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Timing chart No. 2 Memory copy mode, roll paper feed, single copy

BY

PR

SW

: On

(Pap

er in

sert

ion)

BY

PT

IMS

W: O

n

OLD

SW

: On

OT

DS

W: O

n

Half speed

Half speedFull speed

Full speed

Full speedStop

Half speed

Half speed

Stop

944 ms

200 ms

600 ms

1325 ms

3.543 s × 2

1680 ms1704 ms

4.6 s

100 ms

300 ms 200 ms

1 s 1 s 1 s 1 s

10 min

5.2 s

PC

SW

: On

ES

W: O

n

BY

PR

SW

: Off

BY

PT

IMS

W: O

ff

OLD

SW

: Off

OT

DS

W: O

ff

PC

SW

: Off

ES

W: O

ff

Shading correction start Printing start

Reading end

ESW

OLDSW

OTDSW

BYPRSW

BYPTIMSW

PCSW

DB CHG(+)

DB REM

FDM

CSOL 1

CSOL 2

TC REM

SC REM

OFM

OFCL

FL

FFM-R FFM-L

PCFM CFM

LPHFM1 LPHFM2

MC REM

BPRCL

SSOL

CCL PFM OSYNC signalPSYNC signal

DM DRM PCHL REM RTL REM

CN3-16

CN3-12

CN3-13

CN3-14

CN3-34

CN3-15

CN4-4B

CN4-3B

CN7-6

CN6-5

CN6-4

CN4-1B

CN4-2B

CN3-23 – 25

CN4-7A

CN6-18

CN4-5A CN4-5B

CN4-6A CN6-3

CN6-1 CN6-2

CN6-17

CN6-14

CN6-6

CN6-8CN3-29

CN7-2 CN7-1

CN4-12A CN4-12B

Inpu

tO

utpu

t

640 ms

1.75 s 750 ms

450 ms

500 ms

3.534 s

200 ms

1 s

1 s

100 ms 300 ms

100 ms750 ms

1 s

191

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

3-6-3

Power source PCB

CP2

L

N

CP1

L2

L1F1

R1 C1

C2C10

C6

C4

CR1

R2

R3

T2 C5R7

2T1

4

7

6

11

9

10

16

12,13

14,15

CR3

Q1

R11CR4R10

R8

R9

C7

C8

C9

C57

C58 C59C60 C61

CR5

R12

R13

R56

R57

L52

CR55

R14

Q2

CR6

R4

R6

CW

R5

CR2

C3

CR54

CR51

CR52

CR53 C53 R52 CP51 CP52

CP54

POWER OK

COM

CP53

V2 +12V

C54

C55

C52

C52

IC51

C56 R54 R55

L51

R53

C51 R51

R60

CR56

R58CW

239108

R15 R16

5

1

4

7

13

61112

R59

R61

R62

IC52

42

7 8

65

IC1

VCC FB1 FB2OUTPUT

OC

G2

DT RT G1 G3 G3

OV

VADJ

+

+

+ + +

+ +

+ +

V3 –12V

V1 +5V

COM

191

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

3-6-4

Wiring di agram

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4

1 2

1 2 3 4

BK

WE

GNBK BK B1

B2WE WE

BK WE

GN/YW

NF

100V

120V

220-240V

1

1 2

1

5 V S.GND +12 V –12 V

AC(N) AC(L)

AC(N) AC(L)

AC(L) – – AC(N)

F.G

F.G

1 2 3 4

5 V S.GND +12 V –12 V

1 2 3 4

+12 V S.GND S.GND 5 V

1 2 3 4

5V S.GND +12 V –12 V

1 2

S.GND P.SIG.

OE OE BE BE

OE BE

OE BE

WE BK

OE BE PK

PK BE

OE

5 V 5 V – S.GND S.GND –

SIMM0 (OPTION)

CN1 (P05)

CN2 (CP51) CN1

(CP1)

F.GF.G

F.G

CN2CN1

(CONNECT ONLY 100V)

GND TERMINALGND

TERMINAL

CN3 (CP52)

CN4 (CP53)

CN1

CN2

HDD (OPTION)

CN5 (CP54)

CN2 (P04)

CN19

MPCB

Copier

CN3 (P03)

MMPCB

PSPCB

PPCB

71 72

1 2

49 50

1 2

49 50

1 2

SIMM1 (OPTION)

71 72

1 2

SIMM2 (OPTION)

71 72

1A

1B 30A

30

B

1A

1B 30A

30

B

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U %KHE#g#NNE NGfEMfMM

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#2f%####6-'3,#h#*;KNGN(####7%:-2#h#2f%

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

GENERAL:The following Parts Updates are being issued for all A741 Parts Catalogs.

• UPDATE 1: NOTES PAGE – A “V” prefix was not added to the beginning of each part number. Please add note six to your Parts Catalog as shown below.

NEW NOTE: 6. Copier parts are ordered using the prefix “V” before each part number. Please add the “V” prefix before ordering the part. Example: part number 1245678 becomes V12345678

• UPDATE 2: DRUM / DISPOSAL TANK – The Part Number for the Drum and Toner Disposal Tank is incorrect, the correct part number is shown below.

REFERENCEINCORRECT

PART NO.CORRECTPART NO.

DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

34082010 V34082040 Drum 1 15 1134000062 V34000060 Disposal tank Assembly 1 29 14

• UPDATE 3: ORIGINAL TRAY –The Original Tray is available only as a supply item. The Part Number is incorrect in the Parts Catalog, please Delete . The Correct Part Number is an EDP#: 000777-MIU / Original Tray.

REFERENCEPART NUMBER - DELETED DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

74760220 Tray, Original 1 - 0 47 5

Note: T

his copy is intended as a master original

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO. 335

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 001WID

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: A741 - 002 12/21/99

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER - NA RICOH – FW7030D SAVIN - NA

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:

The Service Manual page listed below must be replaced with the page supplied. Each bulletinpackage contains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.

• 3-1-30 Updated Information (Key Counter Installation)

No

te: This copy is intended as a m

aster original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

! S

ER

VIC

E M

AN

UA

L

340

8. Reattach the main switch assembly to the main unit. 9. Refit the right front cover on the main unit. 10. Close the right cover. 11. Plug the power cord to a wall outlet then turn the main switch on. 12. Check that when the key counter is removed, “Insert key counter”is shown on the display.

13. Insert the key counter, make a test copy and check that thenumber of copies is counted correctly.

3-1-30

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 003WID

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: A741 - 003 02/18/2000

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER - NA RICOH – FW7030D SAVIN - NA

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:

The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin packagecontains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.

• TOC page 2 Updated Information (Table of Contents page 2)• 4-1-1 through 4-1-10 Updated Information (Preventive Maintenance Check List)

No

te: This copy is intended as a m

aster original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

! S

ER

VIC

E M

AN

UA

L

340

3-3-6 Transfer/separation section 3-3-373-3-7 Cleaning section 3-3-423-3-8 Fixing section 3-3-483-3-9 Other sections 3-3-60

3-4 PCB Initial Settings3-4-1 Main PCB 3-4-13-4-2 Non-field-adjustable volume controls 3-4-3

3-5 Self Diagnostics3-5-1 Self-diagnostic function 3-5-1

3-6 Troubleshooting3-6-1 Image formation problems 3-6-13-6-2 Paper misfeeds 3-6-173-6-3 PCB terminal voltages 3-6-233-6-4 Electrical problems 3-6-383-6-5 Mechanical problems 3-6-51

3-7 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 3-7-1Timing chart No. 2 3-7-2Timing chart No. 3 3-7-3Timing chart No. 4 3-7-4Timing chart No. 5 3-7-5Operation unit PCB 3-7-6Power source PCB 1/2 3-7-7Power source PCB 2/2 3-7-8Detachable unit wiring diagram 3-7-9

4-1 Preventive Maintenance Check ListPreventive Maintenance Check List 4-1-1

Rev. 02/2000

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

CHECK LIST

A741

NOTICE:

This PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST applies only to those machines thathave been maintained and placed inoperating environments that meet Ricohspecifications.

4-1-1

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 1 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

1-0 * INSTALLATION * 1 count = 1 foot of Copy Paper Feed

1-1 Developer INST REType 8

EDP# 885164

Install at initial set-up.

2,600 Grams per 1 Bottle

1-2 Toner INST CK CK CK CK CKType 1100W

EDP# 885165

Install at initial set-up.

500 Grams per 1 Bottle

1-3 Toner Disposal Tank CK/RE CK/RE CK/RE CK/RE CK/RE V34000060 Empty when full

2-0 * COVERS *

2-1 Contact Glass CL CL CL CL CL CL V34068010 Use Glass Cleaner

2-2 Exterior Covers CL CL CL CL CL CL Use furniture polish

3-0 * PAPER FEED *

3-1 Upper MiddleOriginal Feed Roller CL CL CL CL V34013240 Use Alcohol

4-1-2

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 2 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

3-2 Lower Original FeedRoller CL CL CL CL V67813211 Use Alcohol

3-3 Upper Original FeedRoller CL CL CL CL V67813010 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

3-4 Registration RollerBypass CL CL CL CL V67806510 Use Alcohol

3-5 Rear Roller B, RollPaper Conveying CL CL CL CL V67806250 Use Alcohol

3-6 Rear Roller A, RollPaper Conveying CL CL CL CL/RE V67806240

Vacuum Sponge Pulley. Use Alcoholon Rubber Pulley. Replace SpongePulley if worn.

3-7 Feed RollerParts Upper Original CL CL CL CL/RE V34093380

Vacuum Sponge Pulley. Use Alcoholon Rubber Pulley. Replace SpongePulley if worn.

3-8 Roller, Cutter Eject CL CL CL CL V67806130 Use Alcohol

3-9 Pulley A, CutterEject CL CL CL CL V67806171 Use Alcohol

4-1-3

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 3 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

3-10 Pre-Transfer RollerInner CL CL CL CL V67816010 Use Alcohol

3-11 Original Feed Clutch CL CL CL CL V74712470 Use Alcohol

3-12 Pulley B, CutterEject CL CL CL CL V67806181 Use Alcohol

3-13 Upper Roller, RollPaper Feed

CL CL CL CL V67807510 Use Alcohol

3-14 Inner Roller, Pre-Transfer

CL CL CL CL/RE V34016010 Use Alcohol

4-0 * Exposure *

4-1 Exposure Lamp CL CL CL CL V74712820 Use Alcohol

4-2 Sensor AO, CIS CL CL CL CL V34009011 Use Alcohol

4-3 Drum Point Source RE V34082010 Replace only if necessary

4-1-4

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 4 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

4-4 Main ChargerAssembly CL CL CL CL RE RE V74700121

Use Dry Clean Cloth. Replace withCorona Wire, P/N V74716280

4-5 Transfer ChargerAssembly CL CL CL CL RE RE V34093062

Use Dry Clean Cloth. Replace withCorona Wire, P/N V74716280

4-6 Surface PotentialSensor CL CL CL CL V34093331

Clean out with Blower Brush, P/N84029490

4-7 Cleaning Lamp CL CL CL CL V34093150 Use Dry Clean Cloth

4-8 Parts LPH AO (SP) CL CL CL CL/RE V34093160 Clean with Cleaning Tool (2) times

4-9 Grid Assembly CL CL CL CL V34000220 Use Dry Clean Cloth

4-10 Right Flange Drum CL CL CL CL Use Alcohol around Electrode

5-0 * Developing *

4-1-5

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 5 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

5-1 Dev. Unit Ass’y CL CL CL CL V34093020 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-2 Upper DevelopingUnit Cover CL CL CL CL/RE? V67814160 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-3 Left Dev. Unit Seal CL CL CL CL V67814060 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-4 Right DevelopingUnit Seal CL CL CL CL V67814050 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-5 Right / Left HolderDeveloping Unit CL CL CL CL/RE

V34008060V34008070 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-6 Lower DevelopingUnit Seal CL CL CL RE V74714290 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

5-7 Dev. Unit Gears LU LUGrease with Non-Fluid Oil, P/NV84032156

6-0 * Cleaning * DO NOT touch Blade. Clean with asoft dry clean cloth only.

6-1 Cleaning Blade CL CL CL RE V67818041WARNING: New Blades must beprimed with toner before using.

4-1-6

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 6 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

6-2 Lower CleaningBlade CL CL CL RE V67818050 If toner drop noticed, replace.

6-3 All Cleaning UnitSeals CL CL CL RE?

Clean with Vacuum Cleaner. If wornreplace.

6-4 Spiral, Cleaning Unit CL CL CL CL V34018030 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

6-5 Fur Brush, CleaningUnit

CL CL CL RE V67818061 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

6-6 Separation ClawDrum

CL CL CL CL/RE? V78618240 Use Alcohol, P/N 84255001

6-7 Cleaning Lamp CL CL CL CL V34093150 Use dry clean cloth

7-0 * Fixing *

7-1 Heat Roller CL CL CL RE V34093180 Use Silicon Oil

7-2 Press Roller CL CL CL RE V34093190 Use Silicon Oil

7-3 Fixing Oil Roller RE RE V34093261

4-1-7

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 7 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

7-4 Fixing Press RollerClaw CL CL CL CL V67820270 Use Alcohol

7-5 Fixing Thermistor Aand B CL CL CL RE

V67820101V67820110 Use Silicon Oil

7-6 Separation Claw CL CL CL CL V74320540 Use Alcohol

7-7 Fixing Unit Gears LU LUGrease with Temperature 78, P/NV84032159

7-8 Bushing, PressRoller

CL CL CL/RE? V67820230 Use Alcohol

8-0 * Roll Unit *

8-1 Lower Roller A, RollPaper Conveying CL CL CL CL V34007030 Use Alcohol

8-2 Lower Roller A, RollPaper Conveying CL CL CL CL V67807050 Use Alcohol

4-1-8

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 8 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

8-3 Upper roller, RollPaper Feed CL CL CL CL V67807510 Use Alcohol

8-4 Rear Roller B, PaperConveying (RU-2) CL CL CL CL V67806250 Use Alcohol

8-5 Rear Roller B, PaperConveying (RU-2) CL CL CL CL V67807510 Use Alcohol

9-0 * OTHERS *

9-1 All Gears, Chainsand Bushings

LU LU LU Lubricate with Machine Oil

9-2 All Tension Belts CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ Check for proper tension

9-3 Cooling Filter CL CL RE V34023130 Clean with Vacuum Cleaner

9-4 Photo Sensors CL CL CL CL Clean with Blower Brush

4-1-9

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEREGULAR

MAINTENANCEPERIODIC

MAINTENANCEMODEL: A741

Page 9 of 9

CK = CHECK

CL = CLEAN

LU = LUBRICATION

ADJ = ADJUST

RE = REPLACE

INST = INSTALL

NO. CHECKPOINT

ON

DE

LIV

ER

Y

AT

US

ER

CA

LL

5,00

0 C

OU

NT

S

10,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

20,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

40,0

00 C

OU

NT

S

PART NO. REMARKS

10-0 * COPY QUALITY *

A Registration CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ

B Focus / LightBalance

CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ

C Image Skew CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ CK/ADJ

4-1-10

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO. 005WID

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: A741 - 004BULLETIN NUMBER: A741 - 004BULLETIN NUMBER: A741 - 004BULLETIN NUMBER: A741 - 004 04/20/200004/20/200004/20/200004/20/2000

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER – N/A GESTETNER – N/A GESTETNER – N/A GESTETNER – N/A RICOH – FW7030D RICOH – FW7030D RICOH – FW7030D RICOH – FW7030D SAVIN – N/A SAVIN – N/A SAVIN – N/A SAVIN – N/A

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin packagecontains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.

• TOC page 1 Updated Information (Table of Contents page 1)• 3-1 Updated Information (Contents for Installation Section)• 3-1-31 through 41 New Information (Installing the Roll Unit)

No

te:T

hiscopy

isintended

asa

master

originalfor

reproductionofadditionalbulletins.

!S

ER

VIC

EM

AN

UA

L

1-1-1

340

CONTENTS

I THEORY AND CONSTRUCTION SECTION1-1 Specifications

1-1-1 Specifications ................................................................................ 1-1-11-2 Handling Precautions

1-2-1 Handling and storage of the drum ................................................. 1-2-11-2-2 Storage of developer and toner ..................................................... 1-2-11-2-3 Handling of the heaters ................................................................. 1-2-11-2-4 Storage of paper ........................................................................... 1-2-1

1-3 Mechanical Construction1-3-1 Part names and functions ............................................................. 1-3-11-3-2 Copy process ................................................................................ 1-3-31-3-3 Machine cross sectional view ........................................................ 1-3-31-3-4 Machine drive system ................................................................... 1-3-41-3-5 Mechanical construction of each section ...................................... 1-3-8

II ELECTRICAL SECTION2-1 Electrical Parts Layout

2-1-1 Electrical parts layout .................................................................... 2-1-12-2 Detection of Paper Misfeed

2-2-1 Paper misfeed detection ............................................................... 2-2-12-2-2 Paper misfeed detection conditions .............................................. 2-2-2

2-3 Operation of the PCBs2-3-1 Power source PCB ........................................................................ 2-3-12-3-2 LPH power supply PCB ................................................................. 2-3-72-3-3 Servo motor control 1 PCB ......................................................... 2-3-102-3-4 Servo motor control 2 PCB ......................................................... 2-3-132-3-5 Main PCB .................................................................................... 2-3-162-3-6 Backup PCB ................................................................................ 2-3-252-3-7 ISU PCB ...................................................................................... 2-3-262-3-8 Operation unit PCB ..................................................................... 2-3-292-3-9 Inverter PCB ................................................................................ 2-3-30

III SET UP AND ADJUSTMENT SECTION3-1 Installation

3-1-1 Unpacking and installing the copier .............................................. 3-1-13-1-2 Copy mode initial settings ........................................................... 3-1-273-1-3 Installing the key counter (optional) ............................................ 3-1-283-1-4 Installing the roll unit (optional) ................................................... 3-1-31

3-2 Simulation3-2-1 Simulation function ........................................................................ 3-2-1

3-3 Assembly and Disassembly3-3-1 Cautions during disassembly and assembly ................................. 3-3-13-3-2 Paper feed section ........................................................................ 3-3-33-3-3 Main charger section ................................................................... 3-3-103-3-4 Exposure and original feed section ............................................. 3-3-193-3-5 Developing section ...................................................................... 3-3-31

Rev. 04/2000 340

CONTENTS

3-1 Installation

3-1-1 Unpacking and installing the copier ……………………………. 3-1-1(1) Installation environment …………………………………... 3-1-1(2) Installation procedure ……………………………………… 3-1-2

3-1-2 Copy mode initial settings …………………………………….. 3-1-273-1-3 Installing the key counter (optional) ………………………….. 3-1-283-1-4 Installing the roll unit (optional) ……………………………….. 3-1-31

340

3-1-31

3-1-4 Installing the Roll Unit (optional)

ProcedureBe sure to turn the copier main switch off and unplug the power cordfrom the outlet before attaching the optional wall unit.

Caution:Before starting the following procedure, ensure that the unit supportassembly is present on the copier main body since the assemblycannot be attached to the copier after the roll unit is installed.

1. Open the right and left frontcover.

2. Remove the two screws holdingthe stopper center plate [2] to theright front cover [1] and thescrew holding the ground wire[3].

3. Lift the right front cover [1] off thehinges [4] of the copier mainbody.

4. Detach the left front cover in thesame manner.

5. Open the detachable assembly [5]of the copier.

6. Remove the seven screws and liftthe lower cover [6].

7. Close the detachable assembly.

340

3-1-32

11. Remove the four screws and the rearlower cover [7B].

8. Open the right side upper cover andremove the toner disposal tank.

9. Remove the four screws and the rightside lower cover [7A].

10. Close the right side upper cover.

B

A

12. Remove the seven screws and theinner cover [8].

13. Remove the three screws and theroll drive lid [9] from the loweroutside of the left frame.

340

3-1-33

14. Remove one screw and remove thelower lid [10].

15. Fit the roll conveying support plate[P] to the copier rear frame with thethree chromate binding screws [K](M4x6) using the screw holes [11]in the frame.

16. Fit the bearing [Q] to roll conveyingroller [D] with the stop ring [L].

17. Fit roll conveying rear roller [D] tothe copier, inserting the roller’s shaftinto the holes in the left frame androll conveying support plate [P].

NOTE:1. Holding the roller with its long

shaft on the left, insert the endinto the hole in the left frameand insert the other end into thehole in the roll conveyingsupport plate.

2. Ensure that the flat surface ofthe bearing installed in step 16sits snug against the cutout [12]in the roll conveying supportplate.

18. Fit the bearing [H] to the shaft of rollconveying rear roller [D] with thestop ring (E-7) [L] from outside theleft frame.

340

3-1-34

19. Fit the bearing [Q] to the shaft of theroll conveying rear roller [D] with thestop ring (E-7)[D] from outside of theroll conveying support plate [P].

20. Fit the roll drive assembly [C] to theposition where the roll drive lid [9]was until its removal in step 13,using the three screws which wereholding the lid.

NOTE:While tightening the screws, pressthe assembly all the way down inthe direction of the arrow in thediagram.

21. Fit the roll paper feed clutch [E] tothe shaft [13] of the roll conveyingrear roller installed in step 17.

NOTE:1. Ensure stopper [14] of the roll feed

clutch is inserted into bend [15] inthe roll drive assembly.

2. Slide the roll paper feed clutchonto the shaft until it stops, andcheck that the clutch does notcome off when it is pulled.

22. Loosen screw [17] holding the drivetension plate assembly [16] on theroll drive assembly.

340

3-1-35

23. Loop the drive belt [G] over thepulley [18] and the pulley [19] on theroll drive assembly.

24. Press the drive tension assembly[16] in the direction of the arrow inthe diagram until its edge [20]covers half the hole [21] in the rolldrive assembly, and retighten theassembly’s screw [17] loosened instep 22.

25. After connecting the 2-pin connector[22] of the roll paper feed clutch [E],and the 2-pin connector [23] and 3-pin connector [24] of the roll driveassembly [C], insert the cable tie [M]through the opening in the roll driveassembly [C] and fasten the wireswith the tie.

26. Remove the tie [25] holding themain wires. Refasten them with thewires for the 2-pin connector [23]and the 3-pin connector [24].

27. Extend each roll slider [F] to its fulllength

28. While pressing [26] down with ascrewdriver or similar tool, extendthe roll slider until it separates intotwo pieces [27] and [28]. Do thesame on both sliders.

340

3-1-36

29. Fit smaller pieces [27] of the rollsliders to the inside of the rightand left frames using three bindingscrews (M4x6)[K].

NOTE:Orient the smaller pieces [27] withthe portions [29] toward the frontof the machine.

30. Slide one large piece [28] of theslider onto the smaller piece [27]installed inside the left frame.

31. Slide the other larger piece [28] ofthe roll slider onto the smallerpiece [27] installed inside the rightframe.

32. Pull out the roll sliders [F] fully.

340

3-1-37

33. Place the roll unit [A] on the rollslider [F].

NOTE:1. When carrying the roll unit, be

sure to hold the bottoms of theleft and right frames.

2. After installing the roll unit,remove the pads from it.

34. Fasten the roll unit [A] to the rollsliders [F] using two screws(M4x6)[K].

35. Insert the roll unit [A] into the maincopier body.

36. Insert the 4-pin connector [30] ofthe drawer attachment plateassembly [B] into the roll unitconnector at the rear left bottom ofthe copier and fasten the drawerattachment plate assembly [B] withthe two bronze binding screws(M4x6) [K].

37. Insert the 4-pin connector [31] ofthe drawer attachment plateassembly [B] into the main wireconnector and fasten the wire withthe clamp [32].

340

3-1-38

38. Loosen the three screws andremove connector [33], then slidethe power source PCB assembly[34] in the direction of the arrow.

39. Install the empty switch [I] and twosize detection switches [T] with twobronze binding screws [J] and [U](M3x12) respectively.

40. Connect the 3-pin connectors [35]of the wire [V] to the empty switch[I] and insert the 5-pin connector[36] to the main wire connector.

NOTE:Route the wire [V] below the part[37].

41. Fasten the wire [V] with the cabletie [S] and insert the tie clip into thehole in the frame.

42. Refit the power source PCBassembly.

43. Install the roll conveying rear guide[R] with the screw removed in step14.

44. For 120V models, install the“Dehumidifier Switch” decal [O] tothe location shown in theillustration.

45. Refit the left lower cover, right sidecover, right front cover and leftfront cover to the copier.

340

3-1-39

Operation Check

Insert the copier power plug into the wall outlet and turn the mainswitch on. Access SP mode and change the setting of SP89 from 1to 2 to select the Roll Unit. Load paper in the roll unit using the rollshaft and make test copies to check the operation.

Supplied PartsA. Roll Unit 1

B. Drawer B Attachment Ass’y 1

C. Roll Drive B Ass’y 1

D. Roll Conveying Rear Roller 1

E. Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1

340

3-1-40

F. Roll Slider 2

G. Drive Belt 1

H. Bearing 2

I. Empty Switch 1

J. Bronze Binding Screw M3x12 2

K. Bronze Binding Screw M4x6 16

L. Stop Ring (E-7) 3

M. Cable Tie 2

N. Roll Shaft 1

340

3-1-41

O. Roll Heater Label (120V only) 1

P. Roll Conveying Support Plate 1

Q. Bearing 2

R. Roll Conveying Rear Guide 1

S. Cable Tie 1

T. Size Detection Switch 2

U. Bronze Binding Screw M3x12 4

V. Wire 1

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO. 008WID

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: A741 005 A741 005 A741 005 A741 005 01/03/200101/03/200101/03/200101/03/2001

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER - NA GESTETNER - NA GESTETNER - NA GESTETNER - NA RICOH FW7030D RICOH FW7030D RICOH FW7030D RICOH FW7030D SAVIN - NA SAVIN - NA SAVIN - NA SAVIN - NA

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:

The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin packagecontains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.

• TOC Updated Information (Table of Contents)• 3-1-23 Updated Information (Installation)• 3-1-42 Updated Information (Drum Conditioning)

No

te: This copy is intended as a m

aster original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

! S

ER

VIC

E M

AN

UA

L

340

CONTENTS

I THEORY AND CONSTRUCTION SECTION1-1 Specifications

1-1-1 Specifications ................................................................................ 1-1-11-2 Handling Precautions

1-2-1 Handling and storage of the drum .................................................. 1-2-11-2-2 Storage of developer and toner ...................................................... 1-2-11-2-3 Handling of the heaters .................................................................. 1-2-11-2-4 Storage of paper ............................................................................ 1-2-1

1-3 Mechanical Construction1-3-1 Part names and functions .............................................................. 1-3-11-3-2 Copy process ................................................................................. 1-3-31-3-3 Machine cross sectional view ......................................................... 1-3-31-3-4 Machine drive system .................................................................... 1-3-41-3-5 Mechanical construction of each section ........................................ 1-3-8

II ELECTRICAL SECTION2-1 Electrical Parts Layout

2-1-1 Electrical parts layout ..................................................................... 2-1-12-2 Detection of Paper Misfeed

2-2-1 Paper misfeed detection ................................................................ 2-2-12-2-2 Paper misfeed detection conditions ............................................... 2-2-22-3 Operation of the PCBs2-3-1 Power source PCB ........................................................................ 2-3-12-3-2 LPH power supply PCB ................................................................. 2-3-72-3-3 Servo motor control 1 PCB .......................................................... 2-3-102-3-4 Servo motor control 2 PCB .......................................................... 2-3-132-3-5 Main PCB .................................................................................... 2-3-162-3-6 Backup PCB ................................................................................ 2-3-252-3-7 ISU PCB ...................................................................................... 2-3-262-3-8 Operation unit PCB ...................................................................... 2-3-292-3-9 Inverter PCB ................................................................................ 2-3-30

III SET UP AND ADJUSTMENT SECTION3-1 Installation

3-1-1 Unpacking and installing the copier ................................................ 3-1-13-1-2 Copy mode initial settings ............................................................ 3-1-273-1-3 Installing the key counter (optional) .............................................. 3-1-283-1-4 Installing the roll unit (optional) .................................................... 3-1-313-1-5 Drum Conditioning ....................................................................... 3-1-42

3-2 Simulation3-2-1 Simulation function ........................................................................ 3-2-1

3-3 Assembly and Disassembly3-3-1 Cautions during disassembly and assembly ................................... 3-3-13-3-2 Paper feed section ......................................................................... 3-3-33-3-3 Main charger section .................................................................... 3-3-103-3-4 Exposure and original feed section .............................................. 3-3-193-3-5 Developing section ...................................................................... 3-3-31

Rev. 01/2001

340

1. Input 060 with the numeric keys.2. Press the enter key.

• The unit starts operating. When 3 minutes have elapsed since the start ofoperation, the toner control voltage is automatically set and the value is shownon the display.

• Do not apply shock or vibration to the main unit while it is operating.• The displayed value should be written on the simulation label.

1. Pull the main unit release lever to open the main unit.2. Refit the left cover (7 screws).3. Connect the 3P connector of the cleaning solenoid and close the main unit.4. Input 040 with the numeric keys.5. Press the enter key.

• After approximately 35 seconds have elapsed, the chime sounds and coating oftoner on the cleaning blade is finished.

6. Turn the main switch off and on to cancel the forced stabilization mode and exitthe simulation mode.

1. Follow the procedure on page 3-1-42.

Set the developer (simulation 60).

Coat the cleaning blade with toner (simulation 40).

3-1-23

Drum Conditioning (simulation 103).

Rev. 01/2001

⇒

3403-1-5 Drum Conditioning

Start

Enter simulat ion mode.

Input "103" with the numeric keys.

Press the Enter key. *

Is the copy image correct

(Test Pattern 1)?

Press the Stop/Clear key.

Input "035" with the numeric keys andpress the Enter key.

Reference "TRGT" is displayed.

Select "LPH ON" using the Left Margin+- keys.

If Test Pattern 2 is printed, decreasethe sett ing by 2 ~ 3 increments. If TestPattern 3 is printed, increase thesett ing by 2 ~ 3 increments.

Change the sett ing with the arrow UP/DOWN mode set keys.

Press the Stop/Clear key.

Exit Simulation Mode.

End.

Yes

N oPress the Stop/Clear key.

The image is visible from around the 6th tonefor Test Pattern 1, from around the 3rd tone forTest Pattern 2 and from around the 9th tonefor Test Pattern 3.

* To abort Test Pattern output,press the Job Stop/Roll Cut key.

3-1-42

Rev. 01/2001

⇒